





°-'' r . X™ t% <& < ^'°"' * & 



V » * • o. 

^ A* \«/ 








* ^, vl 



^ 

^ 



t \lfc<<W* ^ 








c*^, 

&? ^ 















THE PUBLIC SCHOOlV 

LATIN PRIMER. 



EDITED WITH THE SANCTION OF THE HEAD MASTERS 

OF THE PUBLIC SCHOOLS INCLUDED IN 

HER MAJESTY'S COMMISSION. 



jfczrsnzdfr) Bwjf&vwnh 



Ordlnis haec virtus erit et "Wnus, aut ego fallor, 
JJt jam nunc dicat jam nunc debentia did, 
Phraque differ at et praesens in tempus omittat. 

Hor. ad Pis. 42; 



LONDON : 
LONGMANS, GKEEN, AND CO. 

1867. 






« • i 






Preparing foi 


Publication. 


SU BSI D 1 A 


P R 1 M A R 1 A. 


Parts I. 


AND II. 


being- 


COMPANION BOOKS TO THE PUBLIC SCHOOL LATIN PBIMER. 



Gift 
Mrs. Hennen Jennings 
April 26, 19S3 



PREFACE. 



The Public School Latin Primer is founded on a 
Latin grammar, which has been largely used in English 
schools during the last twenty years. It has been re- 
vised with great care and attention, first by its author, 
subsequently by the Head-masters of various public 
schools, with the advice of other scholars engaged in 
dassical instruction. 

The Primer is put forth as a standard grammar for 
ill classes in public schools below the highest : and the 
lesign is, by exhibiting in clear and concise synthesis 
he leading principles and facts of Latin, to carry 
earners forward in the right direction to that stage of 
progress from which they may advance to wider philo- 
jgical studies without having anything to unlearn. 

In the manner of its use, this book does not differ 
rom the grammar on which it is founded, or from any 
>ther synthetic grammar. Its memorial lessons need 
liscreet guidance, careful explanation, and sound cate- 
•hesis on the part of masters. They need also to be 
upported and supplemented by good exercise-books 
Subsidia Primaria) of a merely analytic and imitative 
haracter. 



IV PREFACE. 

The distinctive features of the Primer are mainly 
these : — 

1. By discerning from the outset the Stem (or Crude Form) of 

declined words, the learner is prepared to understand the 
principles of higher philology. 

2. The arrangement of the Six Cases given by Key, Madvig, 

and Roby, is adopted. 

3. The division of the Verb into two parts, Finite and 

Infinite, appears as in Kruger's grammar. 

4. Neat and uniform adjustment of the Paradigms is observed 

as an important aid to the memory. 

5. The Memorial Syntax appears in English (with the Latin 

Examples) as well as in Latin, to meet the wish of those 
masters who object to the use of Latin rules. In the 
English rules brevity and precision are, as far as possible, 
preserved. 

6. An Appendix of brief Notes is given, enabling learners to 

make considerable advance in the study of Latin. 

7. A Glossary of Terms is added for the purpose of reference. 

Any remarks (sent through the Publishers), which 
may tend to improve future editions, will be thank- 
fully received and fully considered. 

London : 
January, 18G7. 






THE 

PUBLIC SCHOOL LATIN PRIMER. 



ET-Sr]VXOX.OGY. 



THE LETTERS. 

§ 1. The Latin Alphabet is the English without W. The 
Letters have two forms : (l) the Capital, or ancient ; and (2) 
the Cursive, or modern form. 

(1) ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP 

(2) abcdefghijklmnop 

QESTUVXYZ. 
qrst uvxyz. 

§ 2. The Vowels, sounding by themselves, are a, e, i, 0, u, y. 

§ 3. The Consonants sound with Vowels : of these 

The Mutes are b, c, d, g, k, p, q, and t : 

The Liquids are 1, m, h, r: 

The Spirants f, h, j, s, v: 

The Double, x and z, express two letters each, cs, ds. 

1. K remains in very few words : as, Kalendae. 

2. !Fand z only in words from the Greek: as, Dryas, zona. 

3. Q blends with u or v : as, quis or qvis. 

4. I and u are Half-consonants, corresponding to the Half- 

vowels j and v. 

§ 4. Latin has three usual Diphthongs (double vowels), 
^e (ae), oe (02), au : three seldom used, ei, eu, ui. 

B 



2 PARTS OF SPEECH. 

§ 5. Latin is spelt by Syllables, as English. 

§ 6. The Quantity of syllables is short ( w ), long (-), or 
doubtful (-), as the vowels are short, long, or doubtful : as, 
filgeris. 

A Vowel may be — 

(1) Short or long by nature : as, amas. 

(2) Short by nature, but long by position: as, vindex^ § 162. 4. 

(3) Short by nature, but doubtful by position : as, quadruplo. § 162. a. 

§ 7. Diphthongs are long. 

§ 8. The modern Stops are used in Latin. 



PAETS OF SPEECH. 

§ 9. The Parts of Speech, or Words, are of three kinds : 

I. Nouns ; II. Verb ; III. Particles. 

I. (l) The Substantive names a Thing : 

As, rex, a king ; Caesar, Caesar. 
(a) Names of Persons and Places are Proper Names. 
All others are Appeliativa, or Common Nouns. 

(2) The Adjective attributes Quality : 

As, mare vastum, the vast sea. ^ 

Vastum is called an Attribute or Epithet of mare.* 

(3) The Pronoun stands for Substantive or Adjective 
As, tu, thou; manus haec, this hand. 

II. (4) The Verb states what a Thing is, does, or suffers 

As, homines caimnt, men sing. 

(a) Homines is called the Subject. 
Canunt is called the Predicate. 

(b) When we say, 
Mors est propinqua,. death is nigh, 
Mors is the Subject ; 
Est is called the CopfTiA ; 
Propinqua is called the Complement ; 
And Copula with Complement is the Predicate. 

* A Substantive attributively joined to another Substantive is called its Apposite : 
as, Croesus rex Lydorum, Croesus, king of the Lydians, where rex is Apposite to 
Croesus, and agrees with it in Case. 






FLEXION. 

III. (5) The Adverb shows Where, When, or How : 
As, Hue curre nunc celeriter, run hither now 
quickly. 

(6) The Preposition governs the Case of a Noun ; 

and shows the relation of it to some other 
word : 
As, sto ad fores, / stand a t the door, 

(7) The Conjunction links words and clauses: 
As, oves et aves, sheep and birds. 

(8) The Interjection is an exclamation : 
As, ecce ningit, lo, it snows. 

Note. There is no Article in Latin like a, an, the, in English. 
Thus lux may mean a light, the light, or simply light. 

§ 10. Hence the Parts of Speech may be called eight : 

1. Substantive, 5. Adverb, 

2. Adjective, 6. Preposition, 

3. Pronoun, 7. Conjunction, 

4. Verb, 8. Interjection, 
Which have Flexion. Which are without Flexion. 

§ 11. (l) The changes made in a word, in order to vary 
its meaning, are called its Flexion or Inflection. 

(2) Nouns are Declined. 
Verbs are Conjugated. 

(3) A Noun has three Accidents : Number, Case, Gender ; 
A Verb five : Voice, Mood, Tense, Number, Person. 

a. The Stem is that part of a word on which the changes of Flexion 
are based. 

b. A Flexional addition at the end of the Stem is called an Ending 
or Suffix. 

c. The last letter of the Stem is called the Character, and in this 
book is often indicated by a Capital. 

d. The Stem of a Komi is usually discerned by casting off -rum or 
~um from the Grenitive Plural:* as, mens a-, domino-, Icon-, man-, 
gradi;-, diE-. 

e. The Stem of a Yerb is shown in the Imperative Mood: as, amA-, 
audi-, monE-. But in the Third Conjugation -e must be cast off: as, 
reG-e ; and in a Deponent Yerb -re or -ere: as, fA-re, rE-re, lan-ere. 

f. The Root is that part which a word has in common with kin- 
dred words. Thus in agitare, agitA- is the Stem, but ag- the Root 
as shown by comparing ag-ere, ag-men. And g is the Root-character. 

* Dropping -rum in the First, Second, and Fifth Declensions ; -urn in the hii\ 
and Fourth. 

b 2 



SUBSTANTIVES. 



DECLENSION OE NOUNS. 



§ 12. The Substantive is declined by Number and Case : 
the Adjective by Number, Case, and Gender, agreeing in 
these with its Substantive. See § 9 (2). 

§ 13. The Numbers are two: 1. Singular, speaking of 
one, as mensa, a table ; 2. Plural, of more than one, as 
mensae, tables. 



§ 14. The Cases are six. 

Answers the question 



1. Nominative . 



Who or what? 



2. Vocative (Case of one addressed) 



3. Accusative 

4. Genitive 

5. Dative 

6. Ablative* 



Whom or what? 

Whose or 

whereof ? 
To or for whom 

or what? 
By, with, &c, 

whom or what ? 



Quis dedit? 
Who gavel 



Quern video? . 
Whom see I? . 
Cujiis donum ? 
Whose gift? . 
Cui datum? . 
To whom given? 
A quo datum? 
By whom given? 



Vir, 
A man. 
Vir, 
Oman. 

Virum, 
A man. 
Viri, 

A man's. 

Viro, 

To a man. 

A viro, 
By a man, 



§ 15. The Genders are three: 1. Masculine; 2. Feminine; 
3. Neuter. A Substantive which may be either Masculine 
or Feminine is said to be Common to both Genders. 



SUBSTANTIVES. 

§ 16. There are five Declensions of Latin Substantives, 
known by the endings of their Genitives : — 

I. II. III. IV. V. 

Gen. Sing. ae i is us ei 

Gen. Plur. Arum Orum umf or Ium Uum Erum 

§ 17- (1) In Neuter Nouns, the Nominative, Vocative, and Accu- 
sative are the same in each Number severally ; and in the Plural they 
end in &, 

(2) The Vocative of Latin words is the same as the Nominative, 
except in Singular Nouns of the Second Declension like dominus, f Ilius. 

(3) The Dative and Ablative Plural are always the same. 

* Many English Particles may be signs of the Latin Ablative : as, by, icilh, from, 
in, wpon, of , for, at, than. 
t The Consonant before um is the Character. See § 11 c ; § 21 (a). 



FIRST AND SECOND DECLENSIONS. 



THE FIRST DECLENSION (A-nouns). 

§ 18. The First Declension contains Latin Nouns, mostly 
Feminine, with Nominative in a ; and a few Greek words, 
chiefly Proper Names, in as, es, Masculine, and e Feminine. 



Nom, 

Voc. 

Ace. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Abl. 



Singular. 
Mensa, a table 
Mensa, table 
XVEensam, a table 
2Mensae ; of a table 
IVZensae, to or for a table 



Plural. 
XVSensae. tables, f. 
XVXensae, tables 
ZVIensas, tables 
Mens Arum, of tables 
XVTensis, to or for tables 



XVXensa, by, with, or from a table BXensis, by, with, or from tables 



Nom, 

Voc. 

Ace. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Abl. 



Decline also : 

Goddess, f. 

De-a 

De-a 

De-am 

De-ae 

De-ae 

De-a 



Singular. 
Son of Theseus, m. Aeneas, m. 



Thesid-es 
Thesid-e (a, a) 
Thesid-en (am) 
Thesid-ae 
Thesid-ae 
Thesid-e (a) 



Cybele, f. 

Aene-as Cybel-e 

Aene-a Cybel-e 

Aene-an (am) Cybel-en 

Aene-ae Cybel-es (a< 

Aene-ae Cybel-ae 

Aene-a Cybel-e (a) 



Plural. 



N. V. De-ae 
Ace. De-as 
Gen. De-Arum 
D. Abl. De-abiis. 



Thesid-ae 
Thesid-as 
Thesid-um 
Thesid-Is. 



(as Mensa, 
but rare.) 



(as Mensa, 
but rare.) 



Note. — Masc. Substantives in a are declined like mensa : as poeta, a poet. 



THE SECOND DECLENSION (O-nouns). 

§ 19. The Second Declension contains Nouns with Nomi- 
native in us, er, generally Masculine, and in um, Neuter. 



Singular. 
Nom. Dommiis, a lord 
Voc. 3>5mine, lord 
Ace. Dominum, a lord 
Gen. Domini, of a lord 
Dat. Domino, to or for a lord 
Abl. Domino, by, with, or from 
a lord 



(a) Masculine. 

Plural. 

IS 5m mi, lords, m. 
Domini, lords 
Dominos, lords 
33 6m in 6 rum, of lords 
Dominis, to, or for lords 
Bom in Is, by, with, or from 
lords. 



SECOND DECLENSION. 





Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 


Puer, a hoy 




Pueri, hoys, m. 


Voc. 


Puer, hoy 




Pueri, hoys 


Ace. 


Piierum, a hoy 




Piierds, hoys 


Gen. 


Pueri, of a hoy 




Puerdrum, of hoys 


Dat. 


Piierd, to or for a hoy 




Piieris, to or for hoys 


Abl. 


Piierd, hy, with, or from a hoy 


Piieris, hy, with, or from hoys. 


Nom. 


^agister, the master 




SVIagistri, masters, m. 


Voc. 


BSagister, master 




X&agristri, masters 


Ace. 


Xttagrlstrum, the master 




IVIag-istros, masters 


Gen. 


BEagfistr I, of the master 




Magistrdrum, of masters 


Dat. 


Magistro, to or for the master IVSagistris, to or for masters 


Abl. 


BEagistrd, hy, with, or 


from 


Magristris, hy, with, or from 




the master 




masters. 



(h) Neuter. 



Singular. 



N.V.A. Bellum, war, or war 

Gen. Belli, of war 

Dat. Bello, to or for war 



Plural. 



Bella, wars or wars 
Belldrum, of wars 
Bell Is, to or for wars 



Abl. Bello, hy, with, or from war Bellis, hy, with, or from wars. 



Decline also : 



Nom. 
Voc. 
Ace. 
G-en. 



Son, m. 
Pili-us 
Fil-i 
Fili-um 
Fili-I or Pili 



Singular. 



D.Abl. Fili-5 



Coin, m. 
Num-iis 
Num-e 

Num-um 

Num-i 

Num-6 



God, m. 

De-iis 

De-iis 

De-um 

De-i 

De-d 



Garlic, n. 
Alli-um 
Alli-um 
Alli-um 
Alii or AUi-I 
Alli-o 



N.V. 
Ace. 

Gen. 



Fili-i* 
Fili-os 

Fili- drum 



D.Abl. Fili-is. 



Plural. . . 

Num-i* Di (seldom Dei) Alli-a 

Num-os De-os Alli-a 

f Niim-Grum or De-drum or \ A «« = 

Num-is. Dls (seldom Deis). Alli-is. 



THIRD DECLENSION. 7 

THE THIRD DECLENSION (Consonant and I-nouns), 

§ 20. The Third Declension has two Divisions : 

I. Nouns which have for Character a Consonant. 

II. Nouns which have for Character the Half- consonant I. 
Of these Divisions the First is Imparisy liable, having more 

syllables in the Genitive than in the Nominative Singular. 

The Second is Parisyllable, having the same number of 
syllables in the Genitive as in the Nominative. 

But a few Parisyllable Nouns belong to the Consonant Di- 
vision ; and many Imparisyllable Nouns to the I-Division. 

The Endings of the Nominative Singular are numerous. 

§21. I. CONSONANT-NOUNS. 

(a) Masculine and Feminine. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. V. Judex, a judge, or judge Judices, judges, or judges, c. 

Ace. Judicem, a judge Judices, judges 

Gen. Judicis, of a judge JudiCum, of judges 

Dat. Jiidici, to on for a judge Judicibiis, to or for judges 

Abl. Judice, by, with, or from a Judicibiis, by, with, or from 
judge judges. 

N. V. Aetas, an age, or age Aetates, ages, or ages, f. 

Ace. Aetatem, an age Aetates, ages 

G-en. Aetatis, of an age AetaTum, of ages 

Dat. Aetati, to or for an age Aetatibus, to on for ages 

Abl. Aetate, by, with, or from Aetatibus, by, with, on from ages, 
an age 

N. V. led, a lion, or lion Leones, lions, or lions, m. 

Ace. Xieonem, a lion Xieones, lions 

Gen. Xieonis, of a lion LeoNum, of lions 

Dat. Xiedni, to on for a lion Xsednibiis, to on for lions 

Abl. Xiedne, by, with, or from a Leon ib us, by, with, or from lions, 
lion 

N.Y. Virgd, a virgin, or virgin Virgines, virgins, or virgins, f. 
Ace. Virginem, a virgin Virgines, virgins 

Gen. Virgin is, of a virgin VirgiSTum, of virgins 

Dat. Virgin!, to on for a virgin Virginibiis, to on for virgins 
Abl. Virgtf ne, by, with, or from Virginlbus, by, with, or from vir- 
a virgin gins. 



THIED DECLENSION. 



Decline also 


















Singular. 








N.V. 

Ace. 

Gen. 

Dat. 

Abl. 


Law, f. 
Lex 
Leg- 
Leg- 
Leg- 
Leg- 


Foot, m. 
Pes 
Ped- 
Ped- 
Ped- 
Ped- 


Love, m. 

Amor 

Amor- 

Amor- 

Amor- 

Amor- 

Plural. 


Cinder, c. 
Cinis 
Ciner- 
Ciner- 
Ciner- 
Ciner- 


Father, 
Pater 
Patr- 
Patr- 
Patr- 
Patr- 


m. 

em 
is 
1 
e 


N.V. A. 
Gen. 
D. Abl. 


Leg- 
LeG- 
Leg- 


Ped- 
Pen- 
Ped- 


Amor- 
AmoR- 
Amor- 


Ciner- 
CineR- 
Ciner- 


Patr- 
PatR- 
Patr- 


es 

um 
ibus 



Singular. 
N. V. A. Women, name, or name 
Gen. UomlnKs, of a name 
Dat. N 6 mini, to or for a name 
Abl. Nomine, by, with, or from 



(5) Neuter. 

Plural. 
Nomina, names, or names 
NomlNum, of names 
XtTdminibtis, to or for names 
Nominibus, 6y, with, or /rowt 



N. V. A. 6piis, a work, or work 
Gen. dperls, o/* a work 
Dat. dperi, to or for a work 
Abl. dp ere, by, with, or /r<?w 
a work 



Opera, works, or works 
dpe'Rum, of works 
O per Ibus, to ov for works 
Operibus, by } with, or from 
works. 



Decline also the Neuter Nouns : 

Singular. 

Head. Lightning. Leg. Hard wood. Body. 

N.V. A. Caput Fiilgur Crus Eobiir Corpus 

Gen. Capit- Fulgiir- Crur- Pobor- Corpor- 

Dat. Capit- Fulgiir- Crur- Robor- Corpor- 

Abl. Capit- Fulgiir- Crur- R5bor- Corpor- 



is 

I 
e 



N.V.A. Capit- 
Gen. CapiT- 
D.Abl. Capit- 



Plural. 

Fulgiir- Crur- Robor- 

PulgiiR- Cru.R- RoboR- 

Fulgur- Crur- Eobor- 



Corpor- & 
CorpoR- um 
Corpor- Ibus 



THIRD DECLENSION. 



§22. 



II. I-NOUNS. 



(a) Masculine and Feminine. 



Singular. 
N. V. Ovis, a sheep, or sheep 
Ace. 6vem, a sheep 
Gen. 6 vis, of a sheep 
Dat. dvi, to or for a sheep 
Abl. Ove, by, with, or from a 
sheep 



Plural. 
&ves, sheep, or sheep, f. 
6ves, or 6 vis,* sheep 
Ovium, of sheep 
6vibiis, to ov for sheep 
dvibiis, 5y, with, or /ro/ft stop. 



X. V. Nubes. a chad, or cloud 

Ace. WTubem, a cfowd 

G-en. Nubis, of a cloud 

Dat. JNTubi, to or for a cloud 



Ttfubes, clouds, or clouds, f. 
SJubes, or mubls,* clouds 

XtfubXum, of clouds 
riubibiis. zto ov for clouds 



Abl. Wube, 6y, 0,7^, or from a Wubibus, fty, with, or from clouds, 
cloud 



N.V. Bens, a tooth, or tooth 
Ace. Dentem, a tooth 
Gen. Dentis. 0/ a tooth 
Dat. Benti, fc> or for a tooth 
Abl. Bente, 5y, with, or /row a 



D antes. fc<?^, or teeth, m. 
Bentes, or Bentis,* teeth 
BentXum,f of teeth 
Bentibus, to or for teeth 
Bentibiis, by, with, or from 
teeth. 



Decline also : 



N.V. 

Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat, 
Abl. 



Cough, f. 

Tuss-is 

Tuss-im 

Tuss-is 

Tuss-i 

Tuss-i 



Singular. 

Key, f. 
Clav-is 

Clav-em or im 
Clav-ls 

Clav-I 
Clar-e or 1 



Caned, m. 
Canal-is 
Canal-em 
Canal-is 
Canal-i 
Canal-I 



Shower, m. 
Imber 
Imbr-em 
Imbr-is 
Imbr-i 
Imbr-e or 1 



N.V.A. Tuss-es 
Gen. Tuss-Ium 

D. Abl. Tuss-ibiis. 



Rural. 



Clav-es 

Clav-Ium 

Clav-ibus. 



Canal-es Imbr-es * 

Canal-Ium Imbr-Ium 
Canal-ibiis. Imbr-ibiis. 



* The Accus. Pliir. of I-nouns, Masc. and Fern., is also spelt with ending Is, and 
so appears in most ancient manuscripts, and in many editions of Latin authors. 
t I-nouns in -ans, -ens, often drop i in G-en. Plur. ; as parentum for pairentium. 

B 3 



10 FOUKTH AND FIFTH DECLENSIONS. 

(b) Neuter. 

Singular. 
Bone. Sea. Spier. Animal. 

KV.A. Os RZare Calcar Animal 

Gen. Ossis Maris Calcar is Animalis 

Dat. Ossi IVEari Calcari Animal! 

Abl. Osse Marl Calcari Animal! 

Plural. 

N.V.A, Ossa X&aria, Calcari a AnYmalia 

Gen, OssXum X&arXum CalcarZum AnimalXum 

D. Abl. ©ssibus. ftftaribiis. Calcaribus. Animalibiis. 



THE FOURTH DECLENSION (U-nouns). 

§ 23. Masculine and Feminine Substantives in the Fourth 
Declension form the Nominative in us ; Neuter Nouns in U. 

Singular. Plural. 

N. V. Gradiis, a step, or step Gradus, steps, or steps, m. 

Ace. dradum, a step Gradus, steps 

Gen. Gradus, of a step GradlJum, of steps 

Dat. Gradiii, to Cg'for a step Gradibus (iibus), to or for steps 

Abl. Gradu, by, with, or from a Gradibus (iibus), by, with, ex from 
step steps. 

N.V. A. Genu, a knee, or knee Genua, knees, or knees, n. 
Gen. Genus, of a knee Genifrim, of knees 

Dat. Genu, to or for a knee Genibus (iibus), to or for knees 
Abl. Genu, by, with, or from a Genibus (iibus), by, with, or from 
knee knees. 



THE FIFTH DECLENSION (E-nouns), 

§ 24. The Fifth Declension contains Feminine Nouns with 
Nominative in es. (Concerning dies, see § 31.) 

Singular. Plural. 

N. V. Dies, a day, or day Dies, days, or days, c. 

Ace. Diem, a day Dies, days 

Gen. Biei, of a day DiErum, of days 

Dat. Diei, to ovfor a day Diebiis, to or for days 

Abl. Die, by, with, or from a day Diebiis, by, with, on from days, 



ANOMALOUS NOUNS. 11 



§25. ANOMALIES OF THE NOUN. 

(1) Many Nouns are used in the Singular only: as, 

Argentum, aurum, ferrum, plebs, justitia, 
Ver, aevum, letum, sanguis, piieritia. 

Note. — Add aer, air (Ace. S. aera or aerem), aether, sky 
(Ace. S. aethera or aetherem), with many more. 

(2) Many are used in the Plural only : 

As, Manes, loculi, Penates, 
Drntiae, cunae, nugae, grates, 
With arma, munia, magalia, 
And festive seasons, as Floralia. 

(3) Some Nouns change their meaning in the Plural : 

As, opera, exertion ; 
Operae, working -people. 

(4) Many Nouns are Defective in Case : 

As, dapis, opis, vis. 

(5) Some Nouns take forms from two Declensions : 

As, laurus, bay-tree (G-en. I and us). 

Note.— These are called Heteroclita. 

(6) Some vary the Gender: 

As, joeus, jest, PI. joci and joca; 
Lociis, place, PI. loci and loca ; 
Prenum, bit, PL freni and frena ; 
Kastrum, harrow, PL rastri and rastra. 

Note. — These are called Heterogenea. 

a. Decline the Defective Nouns : 

Singular. 

Feast, f. Fruit, f. Help, f. Prayer, f. Change, f. 

N.V. — — ~ — — — 

Ace. Dap- Frug- Op- Prec- Vic- em 

G-en. Dap- Frug- <3p- — Yic- Ss 

Dat. Dap- Frug- — Prec- — x 

Abl. Dap- Frug- 6p- Prec- Vic- e 

Full Plural, with endings es, urn, ibiis, as § 21 : except vie-ium. 
S. N. Yis, strength, f. Ace. vim. Abl. vi. PI. vires, virium, viribus. 

b. The Heteroclite Noun Domus, house, f., is like Gradiis ; but forms 
Sing. Dat. -iii or -o. Abl. o. Plur. Ace. -us or -6s. Gren. rum or orum. 

Domi, at home. 



12 GENDER OF NOUNS. 

GENDER OF NOUNS. 
§ 26. General Rules. 

(1) The Gender of a Latin Noun is shown by Meaning 

or by Form. 

(2) Males, Months, Winds, and People, are always Masculine, 

and most Names of Mountains and Rivers. 

(3) Females and Islands are Feminine, and most Names of 

Countries, Cities, and Trees. 

(4) Nouns indeclinable are Neuter: as, fas, nefas, and the • 

Verb -noun Infinitive ; 

Est summum nefas fallere, 
Deceit is gross impiety. 

(5) Common are to either sex : 
Artifex and opifex, 
Convlva, vates, advena, 
Testis, civis, incola, 
Parens, sacerdos, custos, vindex, 
Adolescens, infans, index, 
Judex, heres, comes, dux, 
Princeps, municeps, conjux, 
Obses, ales, interpres, 
Auctor, exiil ; and with these 
Bos, dam a, talpa, tigris, grus, 
Canis and anguis, serpens, sus.* 



§ 27- Gender in the First Declension. 

Princ. Rule. — Substantives of the First Declension in « 3 <?, 
are Feminine. Substantives in as, es, are Masculine. 

Exc. Nouns denoting males in a 
Are by meaning Mascula ; 
And added to the Males must be 
Hadria, the Hadriatic Sea. 



* Many of these words (with others, as hosWs, hospes, milgs, praeses, augtir, 
aurlga) are rarely found Feminine. A few are rarely Masculine : as, dam a, talpa, 
tigris, grfis, stis. c 
eonjux, 



^rfis, sus. Some are equally used in each Gender, when Singular : as, parens, 
, sacerdos, yates, cSmSs, dux, canls : in Plural generally Masculine, 



GENDER OF NOUNS. 13 



§ 28. Gender in the Second Declension. 

Princ. Rule. — Substantives of the Second Declension in 
iis, er, are Masculine. Substantives in um are Neuter. 

Exc. Feminina stand in us, 
Alvus, arctiis, carbasiis, 
Coliis, humus, pampinus, 
Vannus; names of Plants, as piriis ; 
Names of Jewels, as sapphirus. 
Neuter, pelagus and virus. 
Vulgiis Neuter commonly, 
Earely Masculine, we see. 

§ 29. Gender in the Third Declension. 

Picric. Pule. I. — Substantives of the Third Declension are 
Masculine which end in o, or, os, er ; also Impari syllables 
in es. 

Exc. (1) Substantives in d o and go 
Geniis Femininum show. 
But ligo, ordo, praedo, cardo, 
Are Mascula ; and Common niargo. 

(2) Abstract Nouns in to call 
Pemmina, one and all : 
Mascula will only be 

Things that you may touch or see, 
(As curciilio, vespertilio, 
Pugio, scipio, and papilio,) 
"With the Nouns that number show, 
Such as ternio, senio. 

(3) Echo Pemininum name : 
Caro (carnis) is the same. 

(4) Pemininum call arbor ; 
Neuter aequor, marmor, cor. 

(5) Of the Substantives in os, 
Femmina cos and dos : 
While, of Latin Nouns, alone 
Neuter are os (ossis), bone. 
And os (oris), mouth : a few 
Greek in os are Neuter too.* 

(6) Many Neuters end in er, 
Siler, acer, verber, ver, 
Tuber, uber, and cadaver, 
Piper, iter, and papa ver. 

* As mSlos, melody ; Sp5s, epic poem. 



14 GENDER OF NOUNS. 

(7) Feminina, eompes, teges, 
Merces, merges, quies, seges, 
Though their Genitives increase 
With the Neuters reckon aes. 



Princ. Rule, II. — Substantives of the Third Declension are 
Feminine which end in is, as, aus, x\ or in 5 following another 
Consonant ; also Parisyllables in es. 

Exc. (1) Many Nouns in is we find 
To the Mascula assigned : 
Amnis, axis, eaulls, collis, 
Clunis, crmis, fascis, follis, 
Fustis, ignis, orbis, ensis, 
Panis, piscis, postis, mensis, 
Toms, unguis, and canalis, 
Vectis, vermis, and natalis, 
Lapis, sanguis, ciicumis, 
Pnlyis, casses, Manes, glis. 

(2) Chiefly Mascula we view, 
Sometimes Feminina too, 
Callis, sentis, funis, finis, 
Torquis, and, in poets, cinis. 

(3) Mascula are adamas, 
Elephas, mas, gigas, as : 

Vas (vadis) too as Male is known, 
Vas (vasis) as a Neuter Noun. 

(4) Most are Mascula in ex : 
Feminina, forfex, lex, 

Nex, supellex : Common, piimex, 
Imbrex, obex, silex, riimex. 

(5) Mascula appear in ix, 
Fornix, phoenix, and calix. 

(6) Mascula are fons and mons, 
Chalybs, hydrops, gryps, and pons, 
Eiidens, torrens, dens, and cliens, 
Fractions of the as, as triens ; 
Add to Mascula tridens, 
Occidens and oriens, 

Bidens ( hoe) : but bidens (sheep) 
With the Feminina keep. 

(7) Mascula are found in es 
Verres and acinaces. 



GENDER OF NOUNS. 15 

Princ. Rule. III. — Substantives of the Third Declension are 
Neuter which end in ar, ur, us, a, e, c, I, n, t. 

Exc. (1) Masciila are found in ur, 
Furfur, turtiir, vultur, fur. 

(2) Feminma, some in us 
Keep u long, as, servitus, 
With juventus, virtus, salus, 
Senectus, tellus, incus, palus. 

(3) Also peciis (pecudis) 

Of the Female Gender is. 

(4) Masciila are found in us 
Lepiis (leporis) and mus. 

(5) Masciila in I are mugil, 
Consul, sal and sol, with piigil. 

(6) Masciila are ren and splen, 
Pecten, delphin, attagen. 

(7) Feminma some in on ; 
Gorgon, sindon, halcyon. 



§ 30. Gender in the Fourth Declension. 

Princ. Rule. — Substantives of the Fourth Declension in 
us are Masculine, in u Neuter. 

Exc. Femmina, trees in us, 

With tribus, aciis, porticiis, 
Domus, nuriis, socrus, anus, 
Tdus (lduum) and maniis.* 



§ 31. Gender in the Fifth Declension. 

Princ. Rule. — Substantives of the Fifth Declension are 
Feminine. 

Exc. Dies in the Singular is Common, in the Plural Masculine. 



* See English of Nouns at p. 94. 



16 



ADJECTIVES. 



ADJECTIVES. 

§ 32. A. Adjectives of Three Endings, in us, d, um, or 
, a. urn, follow the Second and First Declensions. 





Masculine 


Feminine 


Neuter 




like 




like mens a 


like bellum 




Dominiis 


. Bonus 


bona 


bonum 


good 


Pner . . 


. Tener 


tenera 


tenerum 


tender 


Magister 


. Niger 


nigra 


nigrum 


black 



Singular. 



Plural. 





M. F. 


N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


Nom. 


Bonus bona 


bonum 


Boni 


bonae 


bona 


Voc. 


B5ne bona 


bonum 


Boni 


bonae 


bdna* 


Ace. 


Bonum bonam bonum 


Bonos 


bonas 


bona 


Gen. 


Bom bonae 


boni 


Bonorum 


bonarum bonorum 


Dat. 


Bono bonae 


bono 


Bonis 


bonis 


bonis 


Abl. 


Bono bona 


b5no 


Bonis 


bonis 


bonis 



N.V. 

Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat. 
Abl. 



Singular. 
Tener, tener-a, tener-um 



Tener- 
Tener- 
Tener- 
Tener- 



M. 

um 

i 
6 
5 



F. 

am 
ae 
ae 
a 



jr. 
um . 



o 
5 



Niger, nigr-a, nigr-um 

M. F. N. 

Nigr- um am um 

Nigr- i- ae i 

Nigr- e ae 3 6 

Nigr- 6 a o 



N. V. Tener- 

Acc. Tener- 

Gen. Tener- 

D.Abl. Tener- 



6s 

drum 

is 



Plural. 
ae a 

as a 

arum drum 
is is 



Nigr- 
Nigr- 
Nigr- 
Nigr- 



i 

OS 

drum 
is 



ae a 
as a 

arum orum 
is is 



Decline : 

as b 5 n a s : 
carus, dear 
dublus, doubtful 
durtis, hard 
jucundus, pleasant 
malus, bad 
pallidas, pale. 



as t e n e r : 
asper, rough 
lacer, torn 
liber, free 
miser, wretched 
cornlger, horned 
fruglfer, fruitful .* 



as niger : 
aeger, sick 
atgr, jet-black 
crebSr, frequent 
pulcher, beautiful 
ruber, red 
sacer, sacred. 



* And many other Adjectives compounded with the Verbs gero, fero. 
the right hand, propitious, is declined either as tener or ntger. 



Dexter, at 



ADJECTIVES. 



17 



§33. 

sion : as 
vast. 



B. All other Adjectives follow the Third Declen- 
melior, better ; tristis, sad-, felix, happy; ingens, 



n.v. 

Ace. 
Gen. 
bat. 

Abl. 

N.V. A. 

Gen. 

D.Abl. 



N.V. 
Ace. 
Gen. 
Dat. 

Abl. 

N.V. A. 

Gen. 

D.Abl. 



Singular. 

M. F. N. 

Melior melius 

Meliorem melius 

r^Seli oris 

IVIeliorl 

IVSeliore or I 

Plural. 
IVSeliores meliora 
ftXeliorum 
XVZelioribiis. 

Singular. 

M. F. N. 

Felix 
Fellcem felix 

Felicis 

Felici 

Felici* 

Plural. 
Felices felicia 

FelicZum 

Felicibus. 



M. F. 

Tristis 
Tristem 



N. 

triste 
triste 



Tristis 

Tristi 

Tristi 

Tristes tristia 

Tristium 
Tristibus. 

M. F. N. 

Xngens 
Ingentem ing-ens 
Ing-entis 
Xng-enti 
Ingenti or e 

Ingentes ingentia 

Xug-entJEum 
Zngrentibus. 



C. Adjectives in er, of the Third Declension, bare Tbree Endings in 
Nom. Sing. : as, N. celer, celeris, celere, swift; N. acer, acris, acre, keen. 





Singular. 






N.V. Celer, celer-is, celer- e 


Acer, acr-is, acr-e 


M.F. 

Acc. Celer- em 
Gen. Celer- 
D.Abl. Celer- 


e 
is 

i 

Plural. 


Acr- 
Acr- 
Acr- 


M.F. N. 

em e 
is 

I 


N.V.A.Celer- es 
Gen. Celer- 
D.Abl. Celer- 


ia 
um 
ibus 


Acr- 
Acr- 
Acr- 


es ia 
ium 

ibus 


Decline : 








asm&llflr : 

audacI5r, bolder 
dtlrlor, harder. 


asfelix: 
audax (ac-), b 
ferox (6c-), ha 


old 
ughty. * 


as cSl&r : 
(none). 


as tristis: 
brevls, short 
facills, easy. 


as ingens: 
anians, loving 
sapiens, icise. 

* Rarely £. 




as acSr: 
alacer, brisk 
equester, knightly. 



18 



ADJECTIVES. 



§34. 



NUMEKAL AND PBONOMINAL ADJECTIVES. 



Some Numeral and Pronominal Adjectives form Gen. Sing, 
in ius, and Dat. Sing, in I : as, uniis, one ; alms, other, 
another] alter, one of two, the other] uter, which of two. 



Singular, 

M. F. 

Nom. tjniis una 

Ace. IJnum unam 

Gen. TTnius uniiis 

Dat. Uni urai uni 

Abl. Und una uno 







Plural. 




N. 


M. 


F. 


N. 


iinum 


IJni 


unae 


una 


unum 


TTnos 


unas 


una 


unms 


IJndrum 


unarum 


unoi 



Urals unis unis 

Unis unis unfs 



Nom. Alms 
Ace. ilium 
i ren. Alius 
Dat, Am 
Abl, Alio 



alia aliiid 

aliam aliiid 

alius alius 

alii alii 

alia alio 



Alii aliae alia 

Alios alias alia 

Aliorum aliarum aliorum 
Aliis aliis aliis 

Aliis aliis aliis 



Singular. 



Nom. Alter, alter-a, alter-um 

M. F. N. 

Ace. Alter- um am um 

Gren. Alter- ius ius ius 

Dat. Alter- i i i 

Abl. Alter- d a 5 



Uter, utr-a, utr-um 

M. F. n. 

ytr- um am um 

Utr- ius iiis iiis 

ytr- i i x 

Utr- o a 6 



Plural. 
Nom. Alter- i ae a 

Ace. Alter- 6s as a 

Gren. Alter- drum arum drum 
D. Abl. Alter- is is is 



Utr- i ae a 

Utr- os as a 

Utr- drum arum drum 

Utr- is is is 



Decline like uniis : ulliis, any at all ; nullus, none, no ; solus, alone; 
totiis, whole. 

Like uter: neuter, neither ; iiterque, each (of two) ; iitervis, iiterlibet, 
which you will; iitercumque, whichever of the two. The suffixes -que, -vis, 
-libet, -cumque, are appended to each case-form : as, utriusque, utrivis, 
utrolibet, utrumcumque. Alteruter, one or the other, is usually declined 
as iiter. But Gen. alterfus-utrius is found. 



Duo, two. 


jjiiuriYJii^* 


Tres, three. 


Plural. 




Plural. 


M. F. 


N. 


M. F. N. 


Nom. Duo diiae 


duo 


Tres tria 


Ace. DiidsorduS duas 


duo 


Tres tria 


Gen. Diiorum duarum 


diidrum 


Trium trium 


D. Abl. Duobiis duabiis 


duobus. 


Tribiis tribiis 



19 



Decline as diio: ambo, both. 

The other Cardinal Numbers (quattiior, four ; quinque, five : sex, 
six ; septem, seven ; octo, eight ; novem, nine ; decern, ten, &c. ; to 
centum, a hundred) are undeclined. Mille, a thousand, is an inde- 
clinable Adjective. The Neuter Plural, millia, thousands, is a Sub- 
stantive, and declined like Maria. 



COMPAEISON. 

§ 35. The Adjective is compared by Three Degrees; the 
Positive, the Comparative, and the Superlative : as, 



Positive. 
Durus, hard 



Comparative, 
durior, harder 



Superlative, 
durissimiis, hardest. 



The Comparative may be formed from the Positive by 
changing i or is of the Genitive into lor. 

The Superlative may be formed from the Positive by 
changing i or is of the Genitive into issimiis : as, 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Durus, hard Gen. dur-I dur-ior dur-issimus 

Brevis, short „ brev-is brev-ior brev-issimiis 

Audax, bold „ audac-is audac-ior audac-issmms. 



(1) Adjectives in -er form the Superlative by adding -rimus to the 
Nominative: as, 



Positive. 
Pulcher, beautiful 
Celer, swift 



Comparative. 

pulchr-ior 

celer-ior 



Superlative, 

pulcher-rimiis 

celer-rimiis. 



Vetus, ancient, forms Superl. veter-rimiis. 



(2) The following form the Superlative by changing is into limus : 

Pacuis, easy Similis, like Gracilis, slender 

Difficilis, difficult Dissimilis, unlike Hiimilis, lowly, 

Superl. facil-limiis, simil-limus, gracil-limiis, humil-limus, &c. 



20 



ADJECTIVES. 



§36. 

Positive. 
Bonus, good 
Malus, had 
Magnus, great 
Parvus, small 
Multus, much 
Kequam, worthless 



IRREGULAR COMPARISON. 



Comparative. 

melior 

pejor 

major 

minor 

(plus, Neut.) 

nequior 



Superlative. 
optimiis. 
pessimiis. 
maximiis. 
minimus, 
plurinius. 
nequissimiis. 



Note 1. The Comparative of multus has no Masc. or Fem. Singular ; but 
full Plural : Nom. Ace. plures, plura, Gen. plurlum, D. Abl. plurlbus. 

Note 2. Dives, rich, often contracts divlt- into dit- : as, Comp. divltlor or 
ditlSr, Superl. divitisslmus or ditissimfis. 

Note 3. Senex, old (generally an old man), has Comp. senlSr. JuvenTs, 
young (generally a youth, Fem. not used), has Comp. junior, Masc. or Fem. 
But older is often natu major, or maj5r only ; eldest, natu maximiis, or maxi- 
miis ; younger, natu minor, or mlnSr ; youngest, natu minimus, or minim us. 

Note 4. Adjectives of Position spring from Prepositions : — 



Preposition. 
E, ex, out of 
Intra, within 


Positive Adj. 
exterus, outside 


Comparative, 
ext&rlor 
interlftr 


Superlative, 
extremus (extlmtis) 
intlmiis 


Super, above 
Infra, below 


superus, high above 
interns, deep belotc. 


superior 
inferior 


supremus (summiis) 
inflmiis (rmus) 


Prae, before 
Post, after 


posterus, next after 


prI5r 
posterI5r 


primus, first 
postremus (postumus) 


Cltra, on near side 
Ultra, beyond 





clterlor 
ulterI5r 


cltimtis 
ultimus, last 


Pr6pe, near 


— 


prSpIor 


proxlmus 


De, down from 


— 


deterlor, worse deterrlmus, icorst 



Obs. Adjectives in us pure* are compared with m&gls, maxlme ; as, diiblus, 
doubtful, magis diiblus, maxlme dfibifis. But plus forms piissimus. Adjec- 
tives in -dlcus, -flcus, -v51tis change us into Comp. -entlor, Superl. -entisslmus ; 
as, magnlf Icus, magnlf Icentior, magnlf Icentisslmus. OcI5r, swifter, ocisslnms, 
has no Positive. Many Adjectives are not compared at all : some have a Com- 
parative without a Superlative, many a Superlative without a Comparative. 

§ 87. Adverbs derived from Adjectives imitate their 
Comparison, with endings, Comparative iis. Superlative e. 

Positive. Comparative. Superlative. 

Adj. Digniis, worthy dignior dignissimus. 

Adv. Digne, worthily digniiis dignissirne. 

Adj. Gravis, weighty gravior gravissimus. 

Adv. Graviter, weightily graviiis gravissime. 

a. So : Saepe, often saeplus saepisslme. 

DIu, long dlutltis dlutisslme. 

But : Multum, much plus plurlmum. 

Magn&pSre, greatly magls, more maxlme. 



* A pure Syllable is one which follows a Vowel. 



PRONOUNS. 21 

PRONOUNS. 

§ 38. Personal and Beflexive Pronouns are purely Sub- 
stantival ; the rest are generally Adjectival, but are often 
used Substantively. 

(1) PERSONAL. 





• 


1. 


First Person. 




Singular. 




Plural. 


Nom. 


fes,/ 




SJos, ara 


Ace. 


Me, me 




Nos, tts 


Gen. 


Mei, of me 




HiTostri, or Nostrum, of us 


Dat. 


ZtXihi, to or for 


we 


Nobis, to or for us 


Abl. 


Me, {with) me 




Nobis, (with) us. 






2. 


Second Person. 




Singular. 




Plural. 


N.V. 


Tu, thou 




Vos, ye 


Ace. 


Te, thee 




Vos, you 


Gen. 


Tul, of thee 




Vestri, or Vestrum, of you 


Dat. 


Tibi, to or for 


£to 


Vobis, to or for you 


Abl. 


Te, (with) thee 




Vobis, (with) you. 



(2) REFLEXIVE (Third Person). 

Singular and Plural. 
Nom. (wanting.) 

Ace. Se (sese), himself, herself itself or themselves 
Gen. Siii, of himself, herself, itself, or themselves 
Dat. Slbi, to or for himself, herself, itself, or themselves 
Abl. Se (sese), (with) himself, herself, itself, or themselves. 

(3) POSSESSIVE. 

As Bonus, decline : 

Meus, mea, meum, my, mine. 
Tuus, tua, tuum, thy, thine. 
Suiis, sua, simm, his, her, its, their own. 
Ciyjus, cuja, cujum, whose; whose 1 

As Niger: 

Noster, nostra, nostrum, our. 
Vester, vestra, vestrum, your. 

Note. Me us has Vocative Masculine mi. Tuus, suiis, have none. 



22 



PRONOUNS. 



(4) DEMONSTKATIVE. 

1. Simple or Unemphatic. 
Is, that (or he, she, it). 





Singular. 








Plural. 




Norn. 


Is 


ea 


id 


ii 




eae 


ea 


Ace. 


Bum 


earn 


id 


Egs^ 




eas 


ea 


Gen. 


Ejus 


ejus 


ejus 


Riorum 


earum 


eorum 


Dat. 


EI 


ei 


ei 




lis or eis 




Abl. 


Ed 


ea 


CO 




lis or eis 










2. Emphatic. 














Hie, this {near one). 






« 




Singular. 








Plural. 




Nom. 


Hie 


haec 


hoc 


Hi 




hae 


haec 


Ace. 


Kunc 


banc 


hoc 


Hds 




has 


haec 


Gen. 


Hujus 


hujus 


hujiis 


Horum 


harum 


hdrum 


Dat. 


Kuic 


Iiuic 


huic 


His 




his 


his 


Abl. 


Hoc 


hac 


hoc 


His 




his 


his 






Ille, that {yonder). 










Singular. 








Plural. 




Nom. 


Xlle 


ilia 


illiid 


nil 




illae 


ilia 


Ace. 


Zllum 


illam 


illud 


Xllos 




illas 


ilia 


Gen. 


XlllUS 


ill ms 


illius 


Xllorum 


illarum 


illdrum 


Dat. 


Xlli 


ill! 


illi 


111X5 




illis 


illis 


Abl. 


Xllo 


ilia, 


illd 


XlllS 




illis 


illis 



Iste, that {near you), is declined like Ille. 



(5) DEFINITIVE. (Idem, same; ipse, self.) 

Singular. Plural. 

Nom. Idem eadem idem Xldem eaedem eadem 

Ace. Eundem eandem idem Eosdem easdem eadem 
Gen. Ejusdem ejusdem ejusdem Eorundem earundem eorundem 
Dat. Eidem eidem eidem Xisdem or eisdem 

Abl. Eodem eadem eodem Xisdem or eisdem. 

Ipse is declined like Ille, but with Neuter Singular N. Ace. ipsum. 
It forms a Superlative ipsissimus, very self. 





PRONOUN 


s. 


2 




(6) RELATIVE. 


(Qui, who, or which.) 




Singular. 






Plural. 


Nom. 


Qui quae quod 


Qui 


quae quae 


Ace. 


Quern quam quod 


Quos 


quas quae 


Gen. 


Cujus cujus CUJU3 


Quorum 


quarum quorum 


Dat. 


Cui cui cui 




Quibus or quis 


Abl. 


Quo qua quo 




Quibiis or quis. 


(7) INTERROGATIVE. 




(8) 


INDEFINITE. 




Singular. 






Singular. 


Nom. 


Quis (quis) quid \ 
Qui quae quod i 




Quis 


qua quid ^ x 
quae quod j 






Qui 


Ace. 


Quern quam quid -, 
Quern quam quod j 


b 

o 


Quern 


quam quid \ ' 
quam quod J 




o" 


Quern 




&c. &c. &c. 


"1 


&c. 


&c. &c. 



In the other forms as Relative. 
Indefinite PI. Nom. 



j In the other forms as Relative. 
Qui, quae, qua or quae. 



(9) COMPOUNDS OP RELATIVE, INTERROGATIVE, AND 
INDEFINITE. 

1. Quisnam, quidnam; quinam, quaenam, quodnam, who, what? 

2. Ecquis (for en-quis), ecqua, ecquid ? Ecqui, ecquae, ecquod, anyone ? 

(Interrogative). So Numquis, siquis, &c. 

3. Aliquis, aliqua, aliquid ; Aliqui, aliqua, aliquod, some one. 

4. Quispiam, quaepiam, quippiam (quoclpiam), anyone. 

5. Quisquam, quicquam ; Genitive, cujusquam, &c, anyone at all. 

6. Quidam, quaedam, quiddam (quodclam), a certain one. 

7. Quicumque, quaejriinque, quodcumque, whosoever, whatsoever. 

8. Quisquis, whosqJ^r, quidquid, whatsoever. 

9. Quivis, quaevis, quidvis (quodvis), any you will. 

10. Quilibet, quaelibet, quidlibet (quodlibet), any you please. 

11. Quisque, quaeque, quicque ; Quisque, quaeque, quodque, each. So 

Unusquisque, unaquaeque, unumquicque (-quodque), each one. 

a. These Compounds are declined as their Primitives, the undeclined suffix or 
prefix accompanying each case, as G-en. cujusnam, alicujus, cujuscumque, &c., &c. 

Note. Correlatives include an Interrogative, Demonstrative, Relative, Indefinite, 
Universals: as, quis? — is— qui — quis (aliquis) — quicumque (quisquis), &c. 

The Pronominal Correlatives quaijs, &c. 



^ Interrog. 


Demonst. 


Relat. 


Indefinite. 


Univ. 


•Quails, of ichat 


talis, such 


qualis, as 




qualiscumque, of 


kind ? 








what kind soever. 


Quantus, how 


tantiis, so great 


quantiis, as 


aliquantus, 


quantuscumque, 


great ? 






of some size 


how great soever. 


Quot, how 


tot, so many 


quot, as 


aliquot, some 


quotcumque, how 


many ? 






few 


many soever. 



The forms Quis, quid, are Substantival ; Qui, quod, Adjectival. 



24 VERBS. 



VERBS. 

§ 39. The Verb has two Voices: (1) the Active Voice ; 
as, amo, / love : (2) the Passive ; as, amor, / am loved. 

§40. A Deponent Verb is chiefly Passive in form, but 
Active in sense ; as, hortor, i" exhort. 

§ 41. Active and Deponent Verbs are either — 

(1) Transitive, acting on an object : as, amo eum, / love him ; or 

(2) Intransitive, not acting on an object : as, sto, I stand. 

Obs. Verbs Intransitive have no personal Passive : see § 76. 

§ 42. The Verb has two parts : 
I. Finite. II. Infinite. 

I. The Verb Finite has three Moods. 

(1) The Indicative; as, amo, Hove. 

(2) The Conjunctive ; as, amem (variously rendered : see § 66). 

(3) The Imperative ; as, am a, love thou. 

§ 43. Time is expressed by Tenses. 

There are six Tense-forms of the Verb Finite: the Present, 
Simple-Future, Imperfect, Perfect, Future-Perfect, and 
Pluperfect. Other Tenses are formed by the verb Sum, esse (to 
be), with Participles. 

§ 44. Tenses have each (1) two Numbers, Singular and^ 
Plural ; and (2) three Persons in each Number. 

The First Person speaks: as, amo, Hove; amamiis, we love. 

The Second Person is spoken to : as, amas, thou lovest; amatis, ye love. 

The Third Person is spoken of: as, amat, he loves ; amant, they love. 

Obs. The Pronouns, ego, nos, tu, vos, is, n, are severally implied in the Personal 
Endings. 

§ 45. II. The Verb Infinite consists of Verb-nouns: 

(1) The Infinitive, having several Tense-forms. 

(2) The Gerund, } Verbal Substantives, which supply Cases 

(3) The two Supines, 3 to the Infinitive. 

(4) Participjles, or Verbal Adjectives, one of which ends in dus, and 

is called Gerundive. 



VERBS. 



25 



§ 46. There are Four regular Conjugations (three of 
Towel Verb3, one of Consonant and U-verbs), of whi^h 
he Present-stem and Character are shown in the Impera- 
ive or Infinitive. 

Active Vebbs. 



st Conj. 
ind Conj. 
! rd Conj. 

cth Conj. 



A- verbs 

E-verbs 

Cons.-verbs 

TT-verbs 

I-verbs 



Ind. Pres. 
Arao 
Moneo 
Rego 
Induo 
Audio 



Imperative. 
ami 
mons 

TQG-e 

indu-e 
audi 



Infinitive. 

amA-re 

monE-re 

reG-ere 

indu-cre 

audi-re 



love 



rule 
put on 
hear. 



Deponent Verbs. 



.st Conj. A-verbs 

ind Conj. E-verbs 

Jrd Conj. Cons.-verbs 

tth Conj. I-verbs 



Venor 


venA-re 


venA-ri 


hunt 


Vereor 


verE-re 


verE-ri 


fear 


TJtor 


UT-ere 


U.T-1 


use 



Partior parti-re parti-ri divide. 



§ 47. The Present, Perfect, and Supine-stems must be 
mown in order to conjugate a Verb : as, 



Pres. Stem. 
L AmA- 

2. MonE- 

3. ReG- 
L Audl- 



Acttve Verbs. 
Perf. Stem. 
amaV- 
monU- 
rex- (regS-) 
audiV- 



Sup. Stem. 

amaT- 

moniT- 

recT- 

audiT- 



Deponent Verbs. 
Pres. Stem. Sup. Stem. 



VenA- 


venaT- 


VerE- 


veriT- 


UT- 


uS- 


Partl- 


partiT 



From these the other parts of the Verb may be formed. 



DERIVATION OF THE VERB-FORMS. 



From Present Stem. 
Present Act. and Pass. 
Suture Simple A. and P. 
Lmperf. Act. and Pass. 
imperat. Act. and Pass, 
infin. Pres. Act. and 

Pass, 
jerund and Gerundive 
Participle Pres. Act. 



From Perfect Stem. 
Perfect Act. 
Future Perfect Act. 
Pluperfect Act. 
Infinitive Perfect Act. 



From Supine Stem. 

Supines 

Participle Fut. Act. 
Infinitive Fut. Pass. 
Participle Perf. Pass. 
Perfect Pass. 
Future Perf. Pass. 
Pluperfect Pass, 
Infinitive Perf. Pasis. 



26 



VERBS. 



A Verb, therefore, is sufficiently conjugated thus : 
Short Form for Active Verbs. 





1st Con j. 


2nd Conj. 


3rd Conj. 


4th Conj. 


1 Pers. Pres. 


Amo 


Moneo 


Beg5 


Audio 


Infin. Pres. 


ama-re 


mone-re 


reg-ere 


audi-re j 


Perfect 


amav-i 


monii-i 


rex-i 


audiv-i 


Supine in um 


amat-um. 


monit-um. 


rect-um. 


audit-um. 


Short Form for 


Deponent or 


Passive Verbs. 


1st Con j. 


2nd Conj, 


3rd Conj. 


4th Conj. 


1 Pers. Pres. 


Amor 


Moneor 


Kegor 


Audior 


Infin. Pres. 


ama-ri 


mone-ri 


reg-i 


audi-ri 


Partic. Perf. 


amat-iis 


nionit-iis 


rect-us 


audit-us 


Gerundive 


amandus. 


monendiis. 


regendiis. 


audiendus 



h. Or, as a useful exercise, the following parts may often 
be repeated : 

Longer Form for Active Verbs. 





1st Conj. 


2nd Conj. 


3rd Conj. 


4th Conj. 


1 Pers. Pres. 


Amo 


Moneo 


Eego 


Audio 


2 Pers. Pres. 


amas 


mones 


regis 


audis 


Infin. Pres. 


amare 


monere 


regere 


audire 


Perfect 


amavi 


rnonui 


rexi 


audivi 


Ger. in dum 


amandum 


monendum 


regendum^ 


audiendum 


„ di 


amandi 


monendi 


regendi 


audiendi 


„ do 


amando 


monendo 


regendo 


audiendo 


Sup. in um 


amatum 


momtum 


rectum 


auditum 


„ u 


amatu. 


monitu 


rectu 


auditii 


Part. Pres. 


amans 


monens 


regens 


audiens 


„ Fut, 


amaturus. 


moniturus. 


recturus. 


audituriis. 




Longer Form for Deponent Verbs. 






1st Conj. 


2nd Conj. 


3rd Conj. 


4th Conj. 


1 Pers. Pres. 


Venor 


Vereor 


Utor 


Partior 


2 Pers. Pres. 


venaris 


vereris 


uteris 


partiris 


Infin. Pres. 


venari 


vereri 


•uti 


partiri 


Perfect 


venatus sum 


veritiis sum 


usus sum 


partitiis sum 


Ger. in dum 


venandum 


verendum 


utendum 


partiendum 


„ di 


venandi 


verendi 


utendi 


partiendi 


„ do 


venando 


verendo 


utendo 


partiendo 


Gerundive 


venandiis 


verendiis 


utendus 


partiendiis 


Sup. in um 


venatum 


veritum 


usum 


partittum 


u 


venatu 


veritu . 


usu 


partitu 


Part, Pres. 


venans 


verens 


utens 


partiens 


„ Perf. 


venatus 


veritiis 


usus 


partitiis 


„ Fut. 


venaturus. 


veriturus. 


usurus. 


partiturus. 



* The forms -undum -undue are sometimes used in the 3rd and 4th Conjugations. 
Intransitive Yerbs form no Gferundiye, and no Supine in w. 



VERBS. 27 

§ 48. Action and State occur in Time. Time is either simply Pre- 
sent, Past, or Future; or it is Present, Past, or Future with some 
? urther relation. The subjoined Scheme shows (for the Active Voice 
ind Indicative Mood) how each of these states is expressed in Latin 
ind English; whence it appears that Latin has not Tense-forms enough 
;o supply one for each state ; but that three (amo, amavi, amabo) are 
ised in two functions each. 



Time. 


Indie. 


English. 


Name of Tense. 


4* ('Simple 


amo . . . . 


Hove 


Present. 


3 J Pres. Eelation 


amo . . . . 


am loving 




g J Past Eelation 


amavi . . . 


have loved 




Ph VFut. Eelation 


amaturus sum 


am about 


Fiiturum Periphras- 






to love 


ticum Praesentis. 




' Simple 


amavi . . . 


loved 


Perfect. 


+3 

CO , 


Pres. Eelation 


amabam . . 


was loving 


Imperfect. 


A 


Past Eelation 


amaveram 


had loved 


Pluperfect. 




k Fut. Eelation 


amaturus fui . 


was about 


Fiiturum Periphras- 






to love 


ticum Praeteriti. 




'Simple 


amabo . . . 


shall love 


Future Simple. 


i 

J 


Pres. Eelation 


amabo . . . 


shall be 

loving 
shall have 




Past Eelation 


amavero . . 


Future Perfect. 


Ph 






loved 






VFut. Eelation 


amaturus ero 


shall be 


Fiiturum Periphras- 






about to 


ticum Futuri. 






love 





Note 1. The Present, the Futures, and the Present Past (amavi, / have loved) are 
Called Primary Tenses: the Imperfect, Pluperfect, and Simple Perfect (amavi, 
I loved) Historic Tenses. 

Note 2. A. The Perfect is formed in several ways : — 1. By adding vi to the Stem : 
as, amavi, flevi. 2. By adding ui (for vi) to the Stem or Clipt Stem :* as, colui, 
montil. 3. By adding si to the Stem or Clipt Stem : as, carpsi, mansi. In this 
formation Consonants are generally changed (see §81). 4. By prefixing a Redupli- 
cation, and adding I to the Stem or Clipt Stem. This Reduplication is either the 
first Consonant and Towel of the Stem : as, cucurri, momordl ; or the first Con- 
sonant with e, in which case the Stem-vowel is usually changed : as, cec£nl (from 
cano) ; see §81 ; § 111 (9). 5. By adding I to the Stem or Clipt Stem, with or with- 
out change of the Stem-vowel : as, bibi, verti, egi (from ago), favi (from faveo). 

B. The Supine is formed : — 1. By adding to the Stem or Clipt Stem turn, some- 
times i-tum, and a change of letters often takes place : as, amatum, cwltum, 
rectum, mon-i-tum. 2. The change of letters often requires turn, to become 
sum. See Examples in § 81. 

Note 3. The learner should bear in mind that the English given in the following 
Tables for the Tenses of Verbs is often only one of several possible meanings ; espe- 
cially in the Conjunctive Mood. 

§ 49. Before the regular Verbs, it is necessary to conjugate 
the irregular but important Verb of Being, sum, esse, which 
lends its forms to complete the conjugation of other Verbs. 



* A Clipt Stem is a Stem without its Vowel Character : as, mon- for monE-. 

c2 



28 



THE 



VERB 



SUM.' 









o 



Q 

O . 
O 

!> 

M 

H 

s S si 

W ' 02 

>0> ID 


esto, thou must he 
esto, he must he 

estote, ye must he 
sunt5, they must he. 


r 


o 
o 






essem vel forem, I might * 
esses v. fores, thou mightst 
esset v. foret, he might 
essemiis v. foremiis, we might 
essetis v. foretis, ye might 
essent v. f orent, they might j 


CONJUNCTIV 

sim, / may 

sis, thou mayst 
sit, Ae raa^ 
simus, we may 
sitis, ye may 
sint, ?Aey may „ 


Indicative Mood. 

S. Sum, 2" am 

es, £Aow ar£ 

est, he is 
PL sumiis, we are 

estis, ye are 

sunt, they are. 


so 


•ss § *> fe 

e S j- S 

S ^ ^ S> § «w 

d £ >g ig io3 05 


S. ero, I shall 1 
eris, thou wilt 
erit, he will 

PL erimus, we shall 
eritis, ye will 
erunt, they will 


is : »t. — 


•©idra^Jiqiyr 


•;09jjp3uii 



THE VERB ' SUM. 



29 






is 



E3 
> 



o 



0) to 

?H ICD 



<D 

S 8 

Id *> 






© 

£ to 
jr. to 



" to 



S s 



CD "<S> 

&•*> U!^ .&<* 



3 

8 

CD 



CD 

9* 

£ CD 

.p. 

o •• 



rD to 



CO 



PI 



cm 



£3 

>CD 



Ph 



>3 






CD 
!£ CD 






Si e 

« fe § ^ 
S a § § 

><U )CD >CD >CD )CD >0> 

££<3<S<g£ 



$1 






'iiddq 



05 ICD 






CD 10) 

to to 

CO CO 



S3 

^a 

>CD ICD 

CO CO 

to to 



^ 



rT ^1 



ICD CD 
to CO 
CO to 



££££<££ 



5: ^ cs -^ *» 



^ 



Gs 



•pojjoj 



*W2?2 aa»?/ 



^ r< ^ CO "^ "Si 
?H M J- *-l ^1 M 

)CD >CD )CD >!!> >CD )CD 



■Uddq 






icS )c3 
)CD )CD 

eg 



>2 to- 



)CD )CD 



^2 



CQ 



CQ 



•^oajjoj om^nj 



•^DQIJfldciU 



92 0-1 
OQ TO 

3 S3 

to aj 

§ g 

^^ 

I? 

« ?zT 

1 a 

fa 

a5l 

CO ICD TO 

.■si 

?3 X! cd 
CO )CD o 
ICD H^ .S 

S ^ CD 

lis 

« s"s 

rO * W 

o to ^j 

■8 5 S 

1 .S 

» *4 OJ 

os S j 

.si* 

>?3 e3 

to PL) 



^ 



30 



FIBST CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 






g 



*? 


W 




H 


I 


hH 


fc 


^ 


O 


HH 


H 


1^ 


-^ 




3 


PQ 


p 

hn 


« 


O 


£ 



§ 

o 

3 



a 



3 

o 



103 

a 

>o8 



fe 

M 

£ 



*0 



r~ 


^ 


£ 


5> 


^ A . 


SSN^g 


•K6 f< 




•N «N 


^ !3 


IO IO 


-t-^ +3 


lo3 lo3 


io3 rt 


a a 


a a 


>c3 >o3 


>c3 >o3 




S BO" 43 s 8 ^ 3 

<x> io> )0) Id) io? o 

a a a a a a 

>o3 >o3 >o3 >o3 )o3 >c3 



o 
o 

a 

HI 

O 

i— i 



=5 & r^ 



>2 

a 



Slo3 )c3 ic3 103 03 
, s a a s a 

3<J ->eS ->ix? -*S ir- -»n* 



)o3 >o3 >o3 >ca )03 



SQ 



0s 






,_r oT ■+■= 

iO )r-( >rM 

rO rJD ^ 

lo3 lo3 ic3 

a a a 

)o3 >o3 >o3 



^5 



§1 



rO ^D rO 

Ic3 io3 103 

a a a 

>o3 >c3 >c3 



103 lo3 

a a 

)o3 )o3 



a >J 

)<d i a? io _ 

H h H t* 

103 103 lo3 103 

§ § a a 

)o3 >o3 )o3 >o3 



'fiuiaoj 



CO g 






5&i 



i« 



03 103 

lo3 io3 

a I 

>c3 >o3 



SQ 



^ >3 

)o3 103 

103 103 

a a 

>c3 >o3 >b3 >c3 



lc3 03 
io3 lo3 

a 



•asnajQ 4 nas9ij 



•ojdiing Gin^tij 



•+08jJ9dmi 



FIRST CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 



31 












.I 5 ' 



5a 



Xfl 



.g >a> - 

103 io3 o 

a a^ 

>o3 )c5 



a e 

>c3 



$ IrT !0 % ^ 

rd ""3 TJ .£ 

C3 w « o 



.i 5 . 



~ .* 



103 103 

a a 



>3 

lo3 © 

a~ 

>o3 




L. ;-, ;_ l- 

)d ku >o-> >:-> )o >cj 

;> >. t> > S> f> 

109 lo3 103 lo3 lo3 1-3 

ih s a a a 

>o3yo3 >o3 )o3 >o3 >o3 



CO 

§ 11 



* 



-p9aoi davi[ 



-pzaoi 



<o 



^s 



"**** "*** ^ 02 ^ 

.* 02 -+^T £ 02 I 

io3 led io3 103 ic3 I 

a a a a a i 

)o: XS >o: >o3 )o3 ) 



5Q 



*w J^ C^° 

t*o ^-*» »»o 2 s 

u U U i-* u u 

)o >o >o >o >o >o; 

;>;>;>}>;>> 

103 ir3 lo3 ir3 lo3 103 

a a a a a a 

X33 >03 >o3 )03 )o3 ->~ 



&q 






s 




<» 


on 


^ 




^ 


> = 


= 


m 


+T 


s 


- 


i- 


xa 


ICC 


u 


H 


n 


Fh 


xu 


XD 


XU 


XL 


> 


> 


> 


> 


103 


1- 


lad 


lad 


S i 


>iZ 


xri 


>o: 


)- 



53 •< 



02 4^T 

*2 a 

103 c3 

)0J KU 

103 103 

a a 

>o3 )03 



5Q 



fcj 



•lddJ2Q£ 



'Pdjid^ ein^ti^ 



•ipajiGdnjj 



c^ 



<3 



'4 



32 






§ 

D 

O 

ft 

O 

o 

C/2 



EH 






O* 

O 



SECOND CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 


Imperative Mood. 
mone, advise thou 

monete, advise ye. 


••* 

1 

to 

CO 

1 




moneto, thou " 
moneto, he 

monetote, ye 
monento, they <*. 


.CO 

1 




>advise. 


Conjunctive Moc 

moneam, / may 
moneas, thou mayst 
moneat, he may 
moneamus, we may 
moneatis, ye may 
moneant, they 7nay 


tO HO 

42 •< ^2 

f 8 f % i i 

S= 55 § 55 ^ %? 

S » +rfl^ d 

0) 10) )0) 10) 10) 0) 

f-4 ^ f-t f— I J-H J~< 

10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 

d d d d cL^d 
>o >o >o >o )3too 

a a a a^a 


Indicative Mood. 

S. Moneo, I advise 
mones, thou advisest 
monet, he advises 

PL monemiis, we advise 
monetis, ye advise 
monent, they advise. 


'9sinpv 


'Sutsiapv 

f * s 

S ^ s» « 
§ S § * | *-, 

a ^ „ 5 w -^ 

d co +3 d 4-5 £ 

c3 ic3 X3 ic3 ic3 c3 
^ ,& ^ ^ ^ ^O 
/O) 10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 
d d d d d d 

>o >o >o >o >o >o 

a a a a a a 


S. monebo, / shall 
monebis, thou wilt- 
monebit, he will 

PL monebimus, we shall 
monebitis, ye tvill 
monebunt, they will „ 


•asuaj, luesoij 


•ajdiuTg ojnqnj 


•;09JJ9dlIIJ 



SECOND CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 



33 









3 



>o> S 



£j} ^5 * N _ 



; i^ 



•2 .§ ^ 



» . ■ 



>0> cc 

10) >d 

d a 
>o >o 

s a 



r"? >=s 



S S 5 

e « k 

d .~ "O .g - 

n3 ^d ^ .5 

0> O) £ ^ 

a d d s 
>o >o >o « 

a a a 



2 ~^ 

d id o 






>0 S5 



&& 1 

d d 






■•"4 









a> a? a) 



3 «3 

d a 

•rH »r-« 

d, p., 

d d 

go m 






^3 









5s 






r~ 


*o 




Sx^ 




v 




go 






> 


1 


*s 


£ 


^ 




tt 


S 




S5 


2 


«3 


£ 

v 






o 


♦3 s 


>d 

c 


m 


4-T 

d 




WrH 




ii— 


i— i 




5h 


~ 


^ 


Ph 


Ph 


u 


>a> 


>0> 


>o> 


VCJ 


KD 


>o 


>d >!= 


>d >d >d >d 


d 


d 


d 


d 


d 


d 


>o 


XD 


XD 


>o 


xo 


>o 


a a 


a 


£ 


S 


rt 








5> ,°!> 


)D 

a 


53 -S 


« ^ 


1^ 






*K> <^ 




d & 


,-T^ 


>d OT 


d ^ 


'■& ^ 


d ^ 


?-i 5S 



'pdsiapv 9 ami 






^3 



5^" 
of 



>d >d 

d a 

s s s s s 



)d >d : 

d d 
>o >o 



>d ^ 

d ^ 



-pasiapv davi{ 



^ | § § S> j? 

^ ^^>d ^^ 

)(D )<D JO )(D 

>3 >s >d >d 
d d d d 
>o >o >o >o . _ 

a a a a a a 



>0) )<D 

>d >d 

d d 



^Q 



^ 



•joojiaj 



•;o9jja j eiuiti^ 



d CQ +3 

d> Id) )<D 

35 82 02 

C/2 CO 02 

>3 >d >d 

d d d 

>o >o >o 

s a a 



a >■& d 

Id) |<D <D 
02 02 CC 
02 02 OQ 

>3 >3 >3 

d d d 
)0 >o >o 

a a a 



-pdsiapv 



■^3 






a oT 

U U 

>d >d 

d d 
>o >o 

a a 

^5 



)rf 1=3 
)0) )<D 

>d >d 
d d 

a a 



^3 



^ d 

133 c8 
)CD )0) 

>d >d 
d d 
>o >o 

a a 



•■joajiodnxa; 



•8 






•« 

^s 



c 3 



34 



THIKD CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 



£ 



s 



l 

o 
O 

« 
I— i 



£ 



EH 






« 






o 






o 

3 






£ 






1— 1 






5 


* 




w 






P-4 


»« 


S> 


S 




<S> 


— 1 


g 








W 




>0) 


>S 




bo 


bD 




><D 


>0) 



ft 
o 
o 



H 

D 
R 

o 









I s 






~ « ^ >3 

03 103 >o3 103 io3 c3 
50 bo bo bJD bo bo 

>0) >0) >0) >0) >0) >0) 

}~K U U 'r-\ U U 



t — 


1 




S*> 


£ 

»< *> 




^S xj 


>S B 




!2!3 


IS g 


bo bO 


bO bo 


>0) >0) 


>0) )0) 


fH f-l 


^ f-( 



S s 
N.8 






^> W 



+*Z >2 



<» s* is> 



O) 10) )0) 

^H f* f* 

>0) )0) >0) 
bo bo bo 
>0) )0) )<D 

?H fH M 



fB 



d 

O) 

M H ?-( 
>0) )0) >0) 

bo bo bo 
>0) ><d >o> 

?-l ?H *H 



P 

o 

o 






s ^^ 



fcfpr 1 Jj- 1 5r-( )p-i 

>0) bp bo bo bo 
- >o> >o> >o) >o) : 

fr-i ?H ?-< fH 



P3 



CO 

30 



SQ 



§ § 
^ g 

^ 






"50 Zfl 



,&« 



c3 i<d >a>iia> id) a? 
bo bo b0 bo bo bo 

)0) )<D )<D ><D )0) )0) 

^ h M Ph ^ ^ 



!>2 



.§> 



e 


53 


Si 


s 


S 




^ 


•a 


B 


rn' 


a 


lad 


rO rJZ 


10) 


ICU 


bo bO 


>0) 


>a; 


?H 


H 



Q 


« 


S 


^ 


<w 


j/T 


•< >S 


■4-T 


a 


>C3 


Id 


rO rC 


10) 


KU 


bo bo 


>fl) 


>0j 


?H 


Sh 



^ 
1^^^ 



^ 



^ PI 

103 e3 
IO) 10) 

bo bo 

)0) )0) 



CQ 



•9snax ^nasoij 



# 9]rdniTg OJTl^TlJ 



^oajjoduij 



THIRD CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 



35 





^ 




o 






5- o 




s a 






FINITE. 

ere, to rule. 
isse, to have 
turus esse, t 


about to rule 
gendum, ruli 
gendi, of ruli 
gendo, for or 

ruling, 
ctum, to rule 


£ *1 




1 








£* >0) >0) O 


O ^ fcj] O " 






>0) )0) ><U 0) 


0) )0) 0) 






H ^ h ^ 


f-i U J* h 


t~i ?-< ?-l 






VEEB 

Pres. Imp. 
Perf. Plup 
Fut. . . 


1 ^ e 
g SiS 5 


«* 0) -£ 


^3 




iltt ft .s 


l-H 


>«3 




^5 ^ ^ 


J-l I* EH Q_, 

0)0 0) rT 

O O O £> 


^ -4-3 -U 

d C3 c3 

^ P-i Ph 


fl 

o 

TO 

u 


s^ 




<o ^ 




^ i<9 




i^ 


T5 




« § 




a 




^ 5^ 




><s &. 


o 




> 




. 


02 


r ^ 


t ^ \ 








s s ■« 


fl 




erim, / may 
eris, £/ie>w mayst 
erit, Ae ma?/ 
erimus, we may 
eritis, ?/e ??iay 
erint, they may 




^-^ §31 


TO 

O 






-a * 1 1 § *> 

°5> S § 5s ^ 5f 

-^>d ^^ 

d to j* b jp d 

0) 10) )0) 10) 10) 0) 

Tfi ji in ui xn xji 

TJ1 xn 02 CO 02 CO 


a 






M X >< X >< >< 


M 6 

if 

H3 •« 




10) |<u 10) id) 10) 10) 
?h ^ ^ ^ ?H J-, 




10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 

?-( r-( ?H ?H ^H 'r-t 




i iXD 








t ~\ 


' 




S lis 


hall 
m ivilt 
will 
we shall 
e will 
,ey will 


had 

u hadst 
had 

we had 
e had 
tey had 


* -1- 




, / rul 

sti, £Ao 
t, he ri 
mils, w 

stis, ye 
erunt 


kj to l< )rj ^ 


d - ^ d >2 -s 






lp>ljH >r-( >_, >,T; .3. 
?-( M ?H M ?-| ?-l 


c3 log )o3 103 ic3 c3 

^ ^ ^ ~ ^, i^ 






I [-J •'"-I ~>r-i >l-H . r-< 1 

M X X *{ X X 


)0) )0) )0) )0) )0) )0) 


)0) )0) )0) )0) )0) )0) 






X M X X JxJ M 


X X X X X X 

10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 




L 


10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 


10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 10) 




1 


t-4 U t-i i-< 't-4 f-t 


^ ?H ^ ^ ^ M 


f-l JH ^ *H ^ ^( 








CQ SJ 






w 


•;oajjaj j 


•^oajjoj ejnjng; 


•^09jj9dnu 



36 



O 

> 

H 
O 



o 

o 
O 



O 

w 

W 

H 



H 

l-H 

pq 








FOURTH CONJUGATION 


ACTIVE. 








§ 








Q 




<to 








O 




rJS 








O 












S 




CO 

3 








: P3 




g 








1 > 




*__ 








; H 




' 








gj 


a ^> 










a 


^ 


5S 








la 


*3 


*a 2 










r^ -+-3 


IS" 12" 


10 s 

-+-' r-' 








•3 'B 


|f-< Ir-t 

T5 -"P 


•B S 








P P 


p p 


p p 








c« o3 


c3 03 


c3 c3 








C 






s! 




53 






e 




O 


so 






<^ 




>■< 






^< 




O 

Is 


A 






A 




( \ 


*•*»*» 


! « 


H 3* ^ 






°0 r< rC» 


• 




s •* ^ ^ s^ 






^ § § ? (»^ 






5 § s ^ ^^ 






^^S ^< )p r/ r - 




1 O 
O 


„ t»o i<: )t-< -. ^ 

S m ^S & ^ p 
c3 lc3 )c3 iq3 lo3 c3 

•"P 'IS '"P T3 r P '"P 

p p p p £ p 
c3 o3 c3 o3 c3 c3 






p co *r r +3 p 

<D IO> >(U ld> l<D <x> 
^ ^1 ^ Jh F-i H 

IrH IpH 1^-t lr-( If-H IrH 

r P T5 ""P r P r o nzj 

P P P P P P 

o3 c3 o3 c3 c3 o3 








B 














'Buumi[ 




O 
O 


£ « § 

^. t^ ?^ "^- 5S 

10 - - § >2 S 






CO ^ <^> 5B 




IS 

1 £ 


"3 '£> ^ ^ 
^5 § s s 

^•K, r< )P 

S »T +T P 


|1 

if 


8 n g «i y 

^ § S " ^ 

^ •« r< )p ^ ^ 

S oiT +r S +3 P 

c3 ic3 )c3 103 !c3 c3 




3 


>rH OQ +^ P +3 P 


c3 10 >£> i<U 


10 <x» 


KU id) id) id) |0) Id) 






T< 13 *"P nj ""P TJ 
^3 p p p p p 
<M 03 c3 o3 c3 c3 






>*-H >— H )i— ( )p >^ >'"* 




5z< 

1— I 


nj ^ 'tj tJ T3 tS 


rp r^ r^ rp rp rp 




p P P P 


p p 


P P P P P P 






o3 c3 o3 c3 


c3 c3 


o3 o3 05 c3 c3 c3 






^ 


• ^ 




^ 




' 


SQ ^ 


&Q (^ 




5Q ^ 


i 


•Gsnax ^uese.ij 


*a];dinig ejn^ti^ 


•^oejjoclnii 



FOURTH CONJUGATION ACTIVE. 


37 


NITE. 

e, to hear, 
isse, to have 
rd. 


Kb 

CQ 

CO 

<x> 

>d 

'3 


mt to hear, 

ndum, hearing. 

ndi, of hearing. 

ndo, for or by 

ring, 

um, fo hear. 


5, in hearing ', or 
»e heard. 
ns, hearing. 

r. 




►H U »> « 




<=> O 0) o> s 43 


-P "^^ O +J ^ 




INF 

audi 

audi 

het 


'S 


"^ 2d id 2d ^ i- 1 

^ nj 15 nj ^ r^ 

fi fi fi 


B 5 « ^ 

fi ** fi fi , ^- 




Cj 


c3 c3 c3 c$ 


c3 c3 c5 




W ftft 


• 


u " P-J 


* * . • 




« a * 


. 


in. A 
n. . 
t.Ab 

um 


• 




^ P-( 

fi fi 




5S » S 




fi 
fi 


Ger. No 
Ger. Ge 
Ger. Da 

Sup. in 


bup. in 

Part. Pi 
Part. Fi 




^3 






'pdV9l( 9CWV L 


§ « 






( K \ 




c <^> 










i«c: i-< 






ho ^3 




f A —> 






QQ »-«» •>* 


O 


I may 
hou mayst 

i.e may 
s, we may 
ye may 
they may 






, / should 
thou would, 
he would 
us, we shou 
i, ye would 
, they wouh 


1 


.s **"» **» >P T X- ~ 






d «- d ^ -^ 


»*3 


fi go +a a Vs d 




, 


fi CO +3" d -*3 d 

10 >o id) i<D a 


^H 


•r 1 "r 1 > r < ''r- 1 xr 1 T 1 






CQ CQ CO 8C CO CQ 




*H ^ ?H —l ?-l *-l 






CQ CQ CQ CO OQ CQ 




>0> )U )<D ><D ><D )<D 










>. ;> |> J> >- t> 






*> "p *> > '£ *> 


O 


|rH ,U( |pH l-H lr-( 1 — < 






H |H H H H H 




nj T3 r 3 r O T3 T3 






T? ^O rC T3 13 T3 


♦ 


fi fi fi d fi fi 






fi 




s€ cz 7i 7i ci tz 






cS c3 c3 C3 c3 c3 




)aT 




'pdV97( 9UDl( 


'pdD9l( 






( K ^ 


( *" -\ 




^ ^ > 




»-«o 


^ ^3 ^ 




mus, ^y«3 hear 
3tis, ?/e heard 
erunt v. audi 




ro, / shall 
ris, thou wilt 
rit, he will 
nmiiSyWesha 
ritis, ye will 
rint, they wil 


ram, / had 
ras, ^Ao^ 7^ac? 
rat, he had 
ramus, ive ha 
ratis, ye had 
rant, they ha( 


■ 


IrH .IH )PX >£ .r-l 1 


>i 


>0> ><D ><D ><X> >0> ->0) 


)0> )0) ><D ->0J )<l) )0) 




> > > > > > 


<o 


>.>>>>> 


>>>>>?> 








|,_( |r- ( |_ |*H |r- 1 1-4 






>"3 T3 T3 *^ T3 TS 


"fo 


•"d ^3 T3 t3 '"O r & 


T3 T5 T3 "^ T? TS 

















c3 s3 e3 c3 o3 oS 




c3 c2 c3 c3 c5 c3 


c3 c3 c3 eg c3 c3 




. ^ 




• ^ 


^ 




SQ O, 




5Q Os 


CQ R, 




-IMgwj: 


•^09jj9j ara^n.j 


•^ajredufci 



38 



o 



< 
P* 



525 

o 

< 
O 

H 

O 



fr 










FIRST CONJUGATION PASSIVE 






A 

o 
o 

i— t 

w 


o 

1 s, 

•* 'a 

'2 1 

103 103 

a a 

)o3 >o3 


- must be loved. 






r 

ss 

o 

£ 

103 

a 

>o3 


amator, he 
amantor, they. 




ft 

O 
O 

S 

H 

! o 
1 O 


•pdClOl 9Q 




•p9aoj 9q 


H 

h- 1 

i— i 
> 


amer, / may 

ame-ris vel -re, thou mayst 
ametiir, he may 
amemur, we may 
amemmi, ye may 
amentiir, they may 


amarer, / might ^ 
amare-ris vel -re, thou 

mightst 
amaretur, he might 
amaremur, we might 
amaremini, ye might 
amarentiir, they might J 




d 

o 

o 

H 

d 

s 


'p9aoj 


•pdaoi 9q 


'p9ao\ 6ui9q 

i -^— : » 

« S S I 

»> oo <^> <^> ^ 
>2 § § § S* 

| s§ - § * - 

^ & J?£ ,a >g 

)o3 lo3 2 io3 io3 103 o3 
103 103 S ««3 |o3 103 lo3 

a a a a a a 

>o3 >o3 >o3 )o3 >o3 >o3 




S. Amor, I am 

ama-ris vel -re, thou art 

amatur, he is 
PL amamur, we are 

amammi, ye are 

amantur, they are 


S. amabor, / shall 

amabe-ris vel -re, thou 


wilt 
amabitur, he will 
PL amabimur, we shall 
amabimini, ye will 
amabuntur, they will J 




•asuax -;u8S8Jj; 


•9^duilg GJirjll^ 


•yoojxQdmi 



FIRST CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 



39 





* 


<» 








<» 








^ 








hC> 






•« 


r^ 














<*> 


<2 








o 






o 


© 












p4 


ho 


>£ 


to 


ti 


o 






H 


© 


a> 


S 


IrH 


r«o 


TO 




i— ( 


**""* 


CO 




H 


i 


>3 


>> 


£5 

1— i 

5 


;§ 

a 

>c3 


>3 

103 

a 




1 

a 

>o8 


9 

a 

>o3 




W 


Ph 


i— < 




• 


• 


• 




tf 


a 












w 


HH 


P-i 






a> 
Ph 


0) 




l> 


to 






2 








Ph 


Ph 




P^ 


-jj 






«M 


*£j 




«+H 


P< 


?H 








►3 




i— i 


o 





'pzaoj U99q davi[ 
t * ^ 






S of 

■S3 'S3 

TO TO 

)g >J 

-t^> -4-3 

I03 193 

a a 

>c3 >o3 



Si 



>3 w 

lo3 103 

a a 

>o3 >o3 



ra -j^T 

CQ TO 

lc3 153 

a a 

)o3 >o3 



-pdaoi 



99 


e co 


41 




i 


^ l< 





>3 >3 >3 

-£ +2 -S 

103 103 lo3 

a a a 

>o3 )o3 >c3 
&3 



^> <» <» 

s $3 s 

1 s §> 

TO ^^ 

Iff 

TO 0> TO 

£ £ S 

103 153 103 

a a a 

)C3 >c3 )o3 



vpajjoj 



"pdcio\ uddq davi[ 









r>s ,"2 >^ .s 



■B 


* 


s 


XI) 


KL) 


10) 


TO 


to 


TO 


>3 >£ 


+s 


-m 


+-> 


tod 


lod 


103 


a e 


)03 


>n 


M 



)CL» JO) 



103 Ig io3 

a a a 

>c3 >e3 >c3 



^ 



•10djjd& 9m\xi£ 



•p9aoj uddq dam[ 



o I § 



0) 03 

TO TO 

■*2 -*2 

103 io3 

a a 

>c8 )o3 



^ 02 

TO <0 

+3 4J 

lo3 103 

a a 

)o3 )o3 



^3 



TO jjT 

IO> <D 

TO TO 

TO TO 



103 io3 

a a 

)03 )o3 



'pdaoj uddq 



5S *< 



KS 



^3 



^s 



a to -»i 

-c3 io3 >c3 
)03 )0 ><W 
02 TO TO 

)ji >3 >tf |p . 
^J3 -^ ^j !^ 



TO **" "^ 
^5 TO" +3* 



103 1^ 103 

a a a 

)o3 >o3 >o3 



>o> >£> )^> 



103 103 103 

a a a 

>o3 >o3 )o3 



^09JJ8dtlJJ 



£ 



I 

o 



S3 



a 

)3$ 



o3 
P4 



P^ 



fl 

S 



o 

el 






40 



SECOND CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 



o 

> 




w 




> 








on 




r/l 




-4j 




*l 


H 


1 


E-i 


ft 


HH 


o 


fc 






c^ 




ft 


pq 


ft 


« 


o 


W 



Q^ 



o 

w 
m 

w 
ft 
EH 



to 















^3 








«s 








•■*> 




ft 


ts 

<» 


1 

8 




o 


•S2 


^> 




o 


b 


r<a 




a 


^3 


CO 




> 




53 
1 




r ^ 


H 


<^> 


a 




• \ 


«2 




53 & 




^ 


^ IrT 


■s ^ 




1— 1 


« a 


~ f-* 






r» )<-* 






! 


>g a 






Id) 10) 


l<D Id <P 




f 


a ft 


ft ft ft 




i 


>o >2 


>o >o >o 






a a 


a a a 






'pdsiapv dq 








t A \ 




'pdsiapv dq 


. 






i K ~\ \ 


! ft 


IS 






1 o 

1 O 






§ ^ ^ ■¥ ! 


3 


53 5s* 
2 ^ 5^ « 

jr v s s a a 

)03 lc3 ic3 lc3 lc3 c3 






1 B 

: £ 
ft 

! >-3 

i o 




n >2 ^ ^r>ft 3 >S 
^ i ^2 43 a a ft 

)d l<D r< ICP ICD Id d 


1 ^ 




^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ ^ 




>d )(D >d >d )d >d 




Id Id •53*10? IO> Id ICL> 




ft ft a ft ft a 




ft ft g ft ft d ft 
>o >o *" >o >o >o >o 




>o >o >o >o >o >o 






a a a a a a 




a a a a a a 




'pdstapo 


•pdsiapv dq 


'pdsiapv duidq 






r \ 


t '—^. : — , 


f '\ 




to 


53 •*** 


53 ^> 




53 *> 

*§ £ £ e 

I i <* $ ^^ 
~,2 u-B >S >ft 


o £» r^ 


O ^> cvj ?- 


ft 

o 
o 


r< . «) S 5?j^ 


»< &» si. ^ 

Co H 5 <^> ^> ^> 


1- 

< 


^02 tT.fa ft >ft 
SH ^ >ft >ft ^3 

c v gaaa 

)0 )<D jft >S >ft ft 


- ? >ft s a -s 
^-t • -+j w p p 

)C3 lg ^> Ig lg IQ3 C3 

^r^ CO ^5 rO ^5 pO 


ft 


XD id id ia> l<D o 


Id Id v2 IO IO Id Id 


Id l<p ^ Id) I<1) Id Id 


jg 


ft ft ft ft ft ft 


jH ft ^ ft ft ft ft 


>g >§ § >g 1 >§ >g 


J-H 


>o >o >o >o >o >o 


>o >o * - >o >o >o >o 




a a s a s a 


a a a a a a 


a a a a a s 




. "--^ 


^ 


•^ 




5Q (^ 


CQ ^ 


CQ ft, 


•8SU8J, ^UaS9JJ 


•o^draTg ajxijnj 


;08jjadraj 













SECOND CONJUGATION 


PASSIVE. 41 






















.Co r< 















Is. 












w 


»>q> 02 r? t-* 


S 
^ 


§ 








H 

1— 1 


~ >2 H S 

S « ^ a 


e 

bo" 
>P 

+3 

P 


of 

)P 

0/ 

p 








|2J 


a a a 


>o 


>o 


e 






1— t 


a 


a 


. 






W 


Ph &• 


• 


• 








tf 


a £ 












P3 


^ Ph 


^ 











l> 


Inf. Pres. 
Inf. Perf. 

Inf. Fut. 





> 

p 
u 

CD 


i 




'p9siapv 










•p9sjapu 




U99q 9am[ 










U99q 90Vl[ 




t 


* 








r~ \ 




•♦o 










S ^^^S ; 




CO 










ssem, / shou 
sses, ^Ao^ 

sset, he woul 
emus,itfes/i02 
setis, ?/e woul 
ent, £Ae?/ ^ow 




im, / may 
is, thou may 
it, he may 
llus, we may 
is, ye may 












02 ai cc c -^ 


^p 








• ••s • a i a 




02 02 02 <£ 02 


*02 








02 02 ^3 02 0) $> 0) 




>P )p >p |rH ,^ 


l>-( 








)P )P ^ )P ,-H ,-H lrH 




-1-3 -+3 +3 -t-3 U-3 










-US -*J cf +J 4J 4J 4J 




>^ )--t )^H >,-l )— ( 










)— 1 )^H O ><-* >^ )^H >P^ 




fl £ a a p 


p 








p p ^ p p p p 




>o >o )Q )D >o 


>o 








)D >o ^ )D >o >o >o 




a s a a a 


g 








a a a a a a 




•p9siapv 


-p9Siapv 

U99Q 90Vl[ 




'p9$ppj) U99q 
r ^ 




t K 


N 




sum, / was 
es, J^ow was£ 
est, 7ie was 
ilmus, we were 
stis, ye were 


c 

t 

n 

p 






s 

P 


cram, / had 
eras, thou hads\ 
erat, he had 
ramus, we had 
ratis, ye had 
rant, they had 




ero, / shall -) 
ens, thou wilt 
erit, he will 
rimus, we 


; — j 

do" 

) — 




02 02 02 02 


OQ 


m 02 02 >0) _, 


)c; 


>3 


02 02 02 >0) >0> )0) 




)P >P >P lrt lrH 


. . 


)p )P )p lrH £2 




)P )P )P lrJ lrH 1^ 




+3 +3 +3 ->-> +3 


53 


■P P -P -w 8 




■£ 


-1-3 +3 -J-3 +3 ^J +3 








)_- )_< )_ ,^h ^O 






)— t >-H >— < >—< )— f )— 1 




p p p q p 


'3 




P 


5 p 


P P P P P P 




>o >o >o >Q )Q 


>o 


>o >o )3 jo ^ 


>o 


>o 


)C >o )o >o >o >o 




a a a a a 


a 


a a a a 


a 


a 


a a a a a a 




. "-i 




^ 






. ■**>* 




SQ ft, 




^ Rs 






CQ ft, 




w»a: 


•pajaej 8Jti;tl £ 


•^jjadnxj 



42 



THIRD CONJUGATION PASSIVE 






5 






s 

EH 

W 

H 



t^ 

O 



O HH 

P 

o 











o 


1 

to 

1 






So 5>i 

>£ 1 

bJO bO 


regitor, thou •> 
regitor, he 

reguntor, they 


-p9\nd 9q 

ft s« 

O gi 

o )oT S *= ^ s=* 

g >i * § ^ ^ 

g e '. *> § ^~ 

g N ,« h >& >S >J 

>c3 103 lo3 103 lc3 c5 

bO bO bO bO bO bO 

><D XU ><U ><X> )03 ><D 
?H f-, ** f* H * 




regerer, / might 
regere-ris v. -re, thoumightst ^ 
regeretur, he might i ^ 
regeremur, we might 
regeremini, ye might ^ 
regerentiir, they might J 


•p9jnd 


S. regar, I shall 

rege-ris v. -re, thou wilt ^ 

regetur, he will [ ^ 
PL regemur, we shall 

regemini, ye will >£ 

regentur, they will 


•p9\nd dupq 

A 

' a 

*» *» ^ 

*\^s a as 

>c3 103 cc ics3 lo3 lc3 c$ 

,Q r& Q r& r& r& r& 

bO bO ^ bfl bfl bO bO 

)0) ><D ><D )<D >0> )<D 

• '*** 
CQ ft. 


Indicative Mood. 

S. Eegor, I am 

rege-ris vel -re, thou art 

regitiir, he is 
PL regimur, we are 

regimini, ye are 

reguntur, they are 


•9SH9J, ^n9S8JJ 


•9-[dinig 9jn}nj 


•^09jJ9drai 



THIED 


CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 43 




<o <x> 


— a 




^ Kb 






. « o 






^S ^ •£ 




. 




fini': 


s^ IB k in S 5 02 
<D ^* )!^ 


**> 

f»o 


,-r f £ I >S 8 


g 


g 


v bO o o o to 


)CD CD CD CD )CD 




hH 


H fH H *_, f-. 




pq 


A A * • ' 




P3 


a ^ 




E? 


»-< Qui Li 33 




F 


Inf. Pres. 
Inf. Perf. 

Inf. Fut. 
Part. Per: 
Gerundiv 
















'pdjru U9dq dam[ 

r "\ 


'p9\nd U9dq davv 




°3 f>& 


r ' a 

•si 
00 




1 is la § 


^ §> §* 5> 

§>§§>s§>1 




.iS-8"5 §1 




essem, / 5/ 
esses, thou 
esset, he w\ 
ssemiis, we 
ssetis, ye w 
ssent, they \ 


sim, / m 
sis, thou 
sit, he m 
imus, we 
itis, ye m 
int, Z/ie?/ 




02 02 02 DO 02 OQ 




02 02 02 O) 0> CD 


>3 >£ >2 w ,^ , H 




>3 >g >2 lrH w ■_. 


+J +3 -4-3 -4-3 +3 -<-3 




4J +3 +3 +3 -t-3 ^3 


o o o o o o 




000000 


cd o cd cd o cd 




CD <D CD CD CD CD 


£4 ' & U t-t U *4 




H F-l ?_, h J^ fn 


'p9jnd 


'p9iruiU99qdcwv 


•pdiru, uddq 




f -\ 


r • *~ ' —\ 


i r - ■** 




I*** 


CO 


sum, I was 
es, thou wast 
est, he was 
iimus, we were 
stis, ye were 
unt, they were 


11 

wilt 
ill 
shal 
ill 
will 


^ rJ ^S sS ^ ^ 


ero, / sha 
ens, thou 
erit, he w 
rimus, we 
ritis, ye iv 
runt, they 


eram, / h 
eras, thou 
erat, he h 
ramiis, we 
ratis, ye h 
rant, £Ae?/ 


02 02 02 GO <D CO 


m 02 02 >0) ><D >0> 


02 02 02 ><D >CD )<D 


>s >2 >d irt ih i~. 


>3 >2 >£ |lH hH 1* 


>3 >2 >3 ,^< l|H inn 


+3 4J +3 4-3 4-3 43 


4^> -+3 +3 4^> +3 -|J 


43 +3 43 +3 +3 43 


o o o o o o 


o o o o o o 


OOOOOO 


d> <D CD O CD CD 


CD CD CD CD CD CD 


CD CD CD CD O CD 


u u u u u U 


?W f-l F-l S-4 f-4 F-l 


J_< ?_, F-l F-l £_, ^ 


• '■■"» 


kS 


• *^3 


5Q Os 


CQ ft< 


CQ «S 


^oaj^a: 


•qoegraj; ejmjnj 


•jpojrodnij; | 



44 



FOURTH CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 



o 

> 

> 






o 

H 
< 

O 

O 

w 

H 
03 
P 
O 

Pm 






Pn 

pq 
P3 



GO 







^ 








s. 








« 








<*> 








r< 




o 




Qi 




o 




»0 




o 


^ 






* 


^ 

e 
«» 






W 


•^ 


§i 




> 


A 


A 




f ~\ 


f - \ 


H 










•O <» 






to hQ 


*2» »v 






^ ._T 


•^r< 






^ '3 


^ 






~ >rH 


^ ^ d 




. 


S ,i 






•B »t3 


IrH IrH >rH 

■"d Tj T^ 






d d 


a a -J 






03 03 


03 03 03 






•puv9i[ dq 




'pjmi[ dq 




r A > 




' -K» ^ 




cc 




co 


ft 


I s 




•< 


o 


s 

^ — . 




.^ 


o 




i 5 
g ^ s s •& 


►> 

H 
O 

O 

O 






»< >oT § >< _ ^ 

cVSSSS 

)0) 10) IO) 10) 10) )0) 




>C3 lc3 lc3 lc3 103 03 




?Lh ;_, u M ?h ^h 








lr-1 IrH l-H Ir-t IrH | rH 




r T^ '"d 'TIS r d ^3 "T^ 




T3 T3 r C T^ h3 nz3 




d a a a a a 




d a a a a 




03 03 03 03 03 03 




03 03 03 03 03 03 




'pjV9l[ 


'puvdi[ dq 


-pum^i Baidq 




a 


t ^ "> 


: ^ , 


r \ 




t° 


r^* 


| « 


Q 

o 
o 


to SO ^> 

S* T °0 i<* 


S ^ ^ v^ 

r< ^o ^ro 2? c 5 
^ >P § *> ^ ^ 

^ T *> § ^^ 
^ & •< ^ 1,4* - 


•« « ^ fe 

*S ^ ^ S 

eo i 5> qj <tt 5^ 

^ * h >3 ,g >g 


< 


s v 2 a a 1 


►r?s aa-g 


)03 103 -. 103 103 103 03 


s 


)03 ICO ICD 10) 10) O) 


IO) IO) S3 '^ ia) |(i) IO) 


5 


rrt l"-! I 1- * 22 ,,-H :>r ~ l 

H nd 13 nd t5 "o 

J3 d a a 

<3 03 03 03 03 03 


r T3 T3 r t3 T3 r Tj nzJ 


^3 ^S S l£ T3 "T5 ^3 


a a d a a a 


d g 3 S 3 El 




03 03 03 03 03 03 


03 03 03 03 03 03 




^ S^ 


cq s; 


^5 5^ 


•9SU8X HI9S9IJ 


•8]diuig ojn^tij[ 


•^oajjaduij 



FOURTH CONJUGATION PASSIVE. 







heard. 
) to have 
d. 

rd. 
meet to 




! 


H 

H 


O S r~ . ^ >3 






t— 1 


02 ^ S of ^ 


to 




£5 


<r T )3 § 3 >3 g 


^ 






,g £ J £ S >£ 

n3 T3 ^ n3 n3 ^ 


to 




£j 


a s 3 3 






t— I 


c3 c3 a c2 c3 














W 


^ Ph c^ <D 






> 


Inf. Pres. 
Inf. Perf. 

Inf. Fut. 
Part. Per 

Gerundiv 
















•pdV9i{U99q9ami 




-pdV9iiu99q9avi[ 




HO 
rS S ^ 




f A 








°3 ^ 




g O "-o is *-<> o 




fc ?= « ^ « R 




J - 1 * § s 




S s g to S ^ 

L^ ^> «. 5 ^ S 




K| „§ <© S to „§ 

3 cc -+n '3 tc -p 




.§ ,2 >S % &■£ 

02 02 m ,3 j+J ^3 




a> i<u )d) h 5^ 3 
S8 02 £ "o io a> 

S S S g g g 




M 03 05 K IC 'tC 




02 02 02 0> QP <W 




>3 >3 >3 IrH IrH IrH 




>3 >3 >3 IrH IrH IrH 




■ +J "^ "t^ tn "S "^ 




-U) ^H5 -p -<-3 HJ -t- 3 








|r-( l-H IrH IrH |rH IrH 




13 ""O ""O 13 h3 13 




TS 13 T5 T3 13 T3 




2 2 3 3 3 3 




3 3 3 3 3 3 




c$ cS c3 cs c3 c3 




c5 a & a cs c5 




'pdV9l{ 


'pdr?9iiu99q9ami 


•pdV92l U99q 




A 


r \ 


f ^ ^ ^ 




f N 




, I was 
hou wast 
he was 
s, we were 
ye were 
they were 


I shall 
thou ivilt 
he will 
s, we shall 
ye will 
, they will 


eram, / 7i«(i 
eras, ^ow 7mc?5i 
erat, Ae Aad 
ramiis, we had 
ratis, ?/6 had 
rant, £Ae?/ 7?ac? 




3 ., -uT 3 of h-^ 
3 ro 02 g vh 3 

02 >d> © >3 DQ 3 


ero, 
eris, 
erit, 
rimu 
ritis, 
runt. 




02 02 32 =C <U « 


02 02 02 ^ )<U >0> 


02 02 02 )(U ><u ><y 




>3 >3 fl W H IH 


)3 >3 >3 IrH IrH .rH 


)2 >3 >3 IrH |r n ,^ 




43 -t-S -JJ -J-3 -t-3 -t-3 


+) +) 4J -P -P 43 


'43 +3 H-3 +3 1+J H-3 






IrH f— |pH IrH IrH IrH 


J^ i^ |_ ( IrH |_( |_i 




^ r d r C13 p O l u 


13 t3 r r3 13 13 13 


rrj 15 T3 "o Tj 15 




3 3 3 3 3 3 


3 3 3 3 3 3 


3 3 3 3 3 3 




cj oj cj <S cj c3 


r: 53 7t 7Z 7Z r: 


n ej cS ra c3 c3 




cq s; 




Cq S^ 




•pajaaj 


^oojjaj 9in;nj 


•^oajjadn^ 



46 



THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS ! 



§59. 



Scheme of the 
ACTIVE 







Indicative Mood. 










Singular. Plural. 










1. 2. 3. 1. 2. 


3. 






Am- 


5 as at amiis atis 


ant 




H 


Mon- 


eo es et emiis etis 


ent 




s 


Eeg- 


o es it emiis etis 


emt 




P4 


Aud- 


io is it imiis Itis 


lemt 




«3 

f 


Ama- ) 
Mone- J 


bo bis bit bimiis bitis 


bunt 




Keg- i 
Audi- i 


am es et emus etis 


ent 




2 

I 
a 


Ama- ^ 






Mone- 1 
Eeg-e- f 


bam bas bat bamiis batis 


bant 




Audi-e- J 










Amav- \ 






8 
1 


Monu- 
Eex- f 


I isti it imiis istis 


erunt v. 




Pw 


Audiv- J 




ere 




y 


Amav- \ 






3 

PM 
•S 


Monii- I 
Eex- 


ero ens erit enmus eritis 


erint 




,*! 


Audiv- J 








1 


Amav- \ 






Monii- [ 
Eex- 
Audiv- J 


eram eras erat eramus eratis 


erant 




as 










Imperative Mood. 






Present. Future. 






S. 2. 


PI. 2. > S. 2. S. 3. PI. 2. 


PI. 3. 




Am- a 


ate | at5 ato atote 


anto 




Mon- e 


ete i eto eto etote 


ento' 




KeG- e 


ete < eto eto etote 


unto' 




And- i 


ite ito lto Itote 


lemto 




iVofe. — When the Perfect-stem ends in av, ev, ov> v is often eliminated before is 




or er (but not before 


er£), and contraction always follows : as — 






amavisti x amasti 


implevissem x implessem novisti x nosti 




amaverunt x amarunt impleveram x impleram noveram x noram 




When the Perfect-stem ends in iv, v is often eliminated, and contraction may 




ollow before is only : 


as, audivi x audli : audivisti x audlisti x audisti. 






Writers sometimes cast out is from other Perfect forms : as, dixti for dixisti, 




accestis for accessistis 


, surrexg for surrexisse" ; erepsemtis for erepsissemus. 




The sign x means * 


changed to.' 







ACTIVE VOICE. 



47 



Four Conjugations. 
VOICE. 







Singular. 






1. 


2. 


3. 


Am- 


em 


es 


et 


Mon- 


earn 


eas 


eat 


Reg- 


am 


as 


at 


Aud- 


lam 


las 


iat 



Conjunctive Mood. 



1. 

emus 
eamiis 
amiis 
lamus 



Plural. 
2. 

etis 
eatis 
atis 
latis 



3. 

ent 
eant 
ant 
lant 



Ama- 
Mone- 
Rege- 
Audi- 



rem res 



ret 



remus retis rent 



Amav- ^ 

Monii- 

Rex- 

Audiv- d 



erim ens ent 



erimiis eritis erint 



Amav- 
Monu- 
Rex- 
Audiv- 



issem isses isset 



issemiis issetis issent 



VERB INFINITE. 



Infinitive. 



Pres. Imperf . 

. Ami.- \ 
Mode- I « 
ReGe- I e 
Audi- 



Perf. Pluperf . 
Amav- \ 
Monti- I . 
Rex- 1SS 
Audiv- J 



GrERUND. 



N.Ac. a. D.Abl. 



Am-and- 
Mon-end- 
Reg-end- 
Audi-end- 



um i 



Participle Pres. Impf. 
ans 



Am- 
Mon- 
Reg- 
Audi- 



ens 



Supines. 

Amat- \ 1. 2. 

Monit- I , - 

Rect- f um > u 
Audit- J 



Participle Future. 



48 



THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS: 



§60. 



Scheme of the 
PASSIVE 



Indicative Mood. 



Am- 

Mon- 

Keg- 

Aud- 



1. 

or 
eor 
or 
ior 



Singular. 

2. 3. 

aris* atiir 

etur 

£tur 

Itiir 



ens 
eris 
iris 



1. 

amur 
emiir 

mur 



Plural. 

2. 3. 

amim antur 



emini 
zmini 



entur 
wntur 



Imur lmini ltmtur 



S 
H3 



Ama- ) 

Mone- I 

Reg- l 

Audi- } 



bor beris bitiir 

v. bere 
ar eris etur 

v. ere 



bimiir bimini buntur 
emiir emmi entur 



Ama- 
Mone- 
Rege- 
Audi-e- 



bar 



baris batur 
f. bare 



bamur bammi bantur 



Amat- 
Monit- 
Rect- 
Audlt- 



us us 
sumf es 



us 
est 



i i 

sumiis estis 



i 
sunt 



| 

V 



Amat- 
Monit- 
Rect- 
Audit- 



us 
ero 



us 
eris 



us 
erit 



ill 

erimiis eritis erunt 



Amat- 
Monit- 
Rect- 
Audit- 



us us 
eram eras 



us 

erat 



ill 

eramiis eratis erant 



Impeeative Mood. 



Present. 
S. 2. PI. 2. 

AniA- ) 

Reo- ere £mini 

Audi- re mini 



S. 2. 
tor 
tor 
etor 
tor 



Future. 
S. 3. 
tor 
tor 
etor 
tor 



PI. 3. 

ntor 

ntor 

untov 

wntor 



* In the Second Pers. Pres. Indie. Passive it is not so usual to write r& for ris, 
on account of the confusion with Infin. Act. and Imperat. Pass. 

t In the periphrases fill is occasionally used for sum, fuero for ero, fueram 
for eram, fiiSrim for sim, f iiissem for essem, and fiiisee for ess8 : as, amatiis fui, 
fuero, fueram ,f uerim, f iiissem, f uisse^ etc. 



I our Conjugations. 
VOICE. 



PASSIVE VOICE. 



40 







Conjunctive 


Mood. 










Singular. 






Plural. 






1. 


2. 


3. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


im- 

Mone- 


er 


ens v. ere 


etur 


emiir 


emini 


entur 


Reg- 
Audi- j 


- ar 


arfs v. are 


atiir 


amiir 


amirji 


antur 



Ama- 


) 










Mone- 


l - 










Rege- 


f rer 


reris v. 


retur 


remur 


remmi rentur 


Audi- 


) 


rere 








Amat- 


\ 










Monit- 


1 us 


us 


us 


i 


I I 


Eect- 


i sim 


sis 


sit 


simus 


sitis sint 


Audit- 


) 












50 



THE DEPONENT VERB c UTOR.' 




w 




o 




H 




P 






H 


H 


t» 


h- 1 


Eh 


H-H 


Sz; 


^ 


H 






pq 


fa 


M 


fa 

Q 


£ 


fa- 




ti 




H 




fa 




o 




£ 




o 




t— 1 




H 




"^ 




tt 


1 


t3 




*s 




& 




O 




O 


f 



to 


5^ 


^ 


1 § 


i 

S3 




^ S 


3 


^ 


» ^ 


^ 


Ir-T 



^ >2 h >3 ,5 « 

u v s a a s 

)c3 ic3 I5S log ic3 c3 

4J -P +3 4J +3 4-' 

13 13 i3 13 13 13 



& ^ ~, 



s 


00 


1-4 >3 


3 


)3 


tS 


1 


)3 3 


a 


rt 


><D 


ic; 


10) 10) 


i<u 


CU 


*H 


fH 


Sh ^h 


^ 


fH 


><U 


)•-:; 


>0> >o) 


>o> 


)QJ 


+J 




-4J -+-> 


+j 




a 


13 


13 13 


13 


ir 






'dinsn 











3 










^3 




© ^o 


*~o 


>oT 


to 




CO 




. -re, th 
e will 
we shal 


l **o £? 




*T8 






*>o 


§ ^ 


i 

6 ** 






5^ 






U 1 


^ ?h )3 
)G 1 -13 


>3 


If*" U 

3 >3 

FI A 


CO 


^ >3 3 
I -m 3 


a a 


■+-> >0) )-H 








10) 10) io 


10) 0) 


10) 10) 


W 13 13 




+3 -+J 


-4-3 


-+-3 -{-3 4^> 


•+j -w 


•+J -+3 


13 


13 13 


13 


13 13 '3 


13 13 


13 13 




^ 






^o 






SQ 


?j 




^ 


* 




&Q 



^ )3 

CO -JJ 

c3 leg 
13 



03 


5- 5 


3 


s *> 


<o 


^ v 


§ 




^3 


;§» 


s 


8c 


led 


103 c3 


_L^ 


rO ^ 


Id) 

+3 


!2 !g 


IZ 


13 13 



•9sii8£ ^U8S8J^[ -e-fdraig aJTi^nj 



•^Doj.isdini 





THE 


DEPONENT YERB c UTOR. ? 


51 




t 


*C> rO 


$ -^ 






e 




f_i 


3? ^ 






LNITE. 

to use. 

esse, to h 
sed. 


»ijMH I 


£ 3 






*■§ a** *js * s 3 « § * 

^ § P tf io.g -.* 3 * "f^S 

>P><i r b r d r c5 co a <» 02 )P ^T5 






^ , ~>P =^ 


*- 


^flPP5Sbj^^Pp?3P 
J S O O P IP a IP )P CD 






£ 5 .2 
1— i '— '— 


5 


4J 4J ^J 02 02 


-»-= 02 02 -»-=> 






1 = 


IP IP IP IP IP 


ip ip ip iP 






ERB 

Imp. 
Plnp. 




er. Nom. Ac. 
er. Gen. . . 
er. Dat. ALL 

up. in um 
Lip. in u . . 


02 . «+4 CD 






Inf. Pres. 
Inf. Perf. 




art. Pre 
art. Fut 
art. Per 
erundiv 






hH OOO tf} CO 


f^PHf^O 














> 




-p9sn 9 am[ 












!> 1 1 
§>§ §>s §>| 






an, I should 
s, thou wouldsi 
t, he ivould 
liis, ^6 should 
s, ?/<? would 


t, if/iey would 




I m 

thou 
he m 
;, we 
ye m 
they 








P. 02 +a 'p m -u 

02 02 02 S -±-> ^M 






<D icd >cd H >r3 

i g| % i53 10 


CD 








® «" © % a 


02 

02 




02 02 02 ^ 02 '02 






02 02 02 <D O 


CD 




>3 >P >P l-H |~l l-J 






)P )P )p ,^ ,_ 


1— 1 




02 02 02 02 02 "Jl 






02 02 '72 02 02 


02 




Id Id Id Ip IP Ip 






IP IP IP IP IP 


IP 






-p9sn 9 ami 


•p3S» 










A 

f \ 


A. 




f 


\ 










«KS 














^ 




sum, I used 
es, £Aow used 

est, 7iC W5(?6? 

timus, we use 

StlS, ?/<? W56tZ 

unt, they usei 




^-> Ci *^> ^ '""■^ ^ 








0, / sha 

is, thou 
it, he w 
niis, we 
is, ye iv 
nt, £//#?/ 


am, [ h 
as, Z/icw 
at, Ae 7ii 
[nus, we 








)CD >CD ><D >£ >£ £ 


)CD )0 )CD 'g 'g 






02 02 02 02 cy 02 




gq op 02 >£> >D XI) 


02 02 02 >CD )CD 


)<D 




)d >P >P 1- IrH IpH 




>P" >P )P IjH ,jH IrH 


)P )P >P |,H |rW 


,. 




02 02 02 02 02 02 




02 02 02 02 02 02 


02 02 02 02 02 


02 




li Id Ip IP IP IP 




l^j IP IP IP IP 15 


Ip IP Ip Ip Ip 


IP 




. '*** 




Kj 


r -»S 






CQ ^ 




GQ ^ 


SQ ^ 




rwZPd 




•^ajjaj W11 4M 


•poijadqj 


1 








» 2 







52 



THE FOUR CONJUGATIONS i 



§62. 



Scheme of the 
DEPONENT 



Indicative Mood. 



Yen- 
Yer- 

Ut- 
Part- 



1. 

or 
eor 
or 
lor 



Singular. 

2. 3. 

a-ris (re) atur 

e-ris (re) etur 

e-ris (re) ltiir 

l-ris (re) ltur 



1. 

amiir 
emiir 
lmiir 
lmiir 



Plural. 

2. 
amini 
emini 
imini 
imini 



antur 
entur 
wntur 

iiaitur 



Yena- 
Yere- 
Ut- 
Parti- 



Ibor be-ris(re) bitiir bimiir bimini buntiir 

J ar e-ris (re) etur emur emini entiir 




bans v. batur 
bare 



bamur bamini bantur 



8 



Yen at - 

Yerit- I us 

Us- j sum 

Partit- ) 



us 

es 



us 
est 



i i 

sumiis estis 



l 

sunt 



Yenat- \ 

Yerit- f us 

Us- [ ero 

Partit- j 



us 

eris 



us 
erit 



ill 

erimiis eritis erunt 



Yenat- ] 

Yerit- f us iis 
Us- feram eras 
Partit- J . 



us 
erat 



ill 

eramus eratis erant 



Imperative Mood. 



Present. 
S. 2. PI. 2. 

VenA-) rg 
YerE- ) 
Ut- ere z-mini 

Parti- re mini 



mini 



S. 2. 

tor 

£tor 
tor 



Future. 
S. 3. 

tor 

£tor 
tor 



PI. 3. 

ntor 

wntor 
tmtor 



Note. Some Deponents have an Active form also ; as,puniorand punio, punish. 
Many Participles Perfect of Deponent Verbs are used Passively as well as Actively ; 
such are, auspicatus, abominatiis, adeptiis, comitatus, commentus, confesses, de- 
testatus,dignatus,exsecratiis,expertus, emensus, furattis, fabricates, frustrates, 
Imitatus, meditatiis, mentitus, medicatus, meritus, moderates, oblitus.5pInatus, 
pactus, partitus, pollicittis, populates, praedatus, precatus, professdsy solitus, 
testatus, testificatiis, veneratus, etc. 



DEPONENT VERBS. 



53 



Four Conjugations. 
VEKBS. 







Conjunctive 


Mood. 










Singular. 




Plural. 






1. 


2. 3. 


1. 


2. 


3. 


Ven- 


er 


e-ris (re) etur 


emur 


emmi 


entur 


Ver- 


ear 


ea-ris (re) eatur 


eamur 


eammi 


eantur 


Ut- 


ar 


a-ris (re) atiir 


amur 


ammi 


antur 


Part- 


lar 


ia-ris (re) latur 


lamur 


lamini 


iantur 



Vena- 


r rer 












Vere- 

Vt-c- 


reris v. 


retur 


remiir 


remini 


rentiir 


Parti- 


rere 










Venat- 


1 us 












Verit- 


us 


us 


I 


I 


I 


Us- 


f sim 


SIS 


Sit 


simus 


SltlS 


sint 


Partit- 


) 













Venat- \ 
Verit- 
Us- f 
Partit- J 



us 
essem 



us 

esses 



us 
esset 



i i 

essemus essetis 



i 

essent 



Infix. Pres. Imperf . 

VenA.- ) . 
T tw . [ ri 

V erE- J 

Ut- i 

Parti- ri 



VERB INFINITE. 

Infix. Perf. Plup. Part. Fut. 

Venat- ) 

Vent- [ . 

f- T )■ us esse 

Us- 

Partit- J 



IXFIN. Fut. 



Part. Pres. 

Venans 
Verens 
Utens 
Partiens 



GrERUND. 

Venand- \ 
Verend- 
tJtend- u ' 
Partiend- J 



Gerundive. 


Part. 
Venat- 1 


Perf. 


' 


Verit- 




us 


TTs- 

Partit-, 


• us 



Supines. 



54 VERBS IN 10 (THIRD CONJUGATION). 

§ 63. A. Verbs in i-o of the Third Conjugation, in their Present- 
stem forms, retain this inorganic i generally ; but not before i, final e, 
and short er. These Verbs are : — 

Capz5, cup?o, and faczo, 
F6d£6, fugzo, and jaczo, 
Pareo, rapzo, sapzo, quatzo, 
Compounds of speczo and laezo. 
Deponent : gradzor, patzor, monor ; 
And, in some tenses, potior, orzor, 

Examples. 
Active. 

Indie. Pres. capz-6, cap-is, -it, -imus, -itis, capz-unt. 
Fut. cap£-am, -es, -et, -emus, -etis, -ent. 
Imperf. capz-ebam, -ebas, -ebat, -ebamus, -ebatis, -ebant. 
Conj. Pres. capz-am, -as, -at, -amus, -atis, -ant. 

Imperf. cap-erem, -eres, -eret, -eremus, -eretis, -erent. 
Imper. Pres. cap-e, -ite. 

Put. cap-ito, -itote, capz-unto. 
Infin. Pres. cap-ere. Gerund, capz-endum, -endi, -endo. 
Deponent. 

Indie. Pres. pat£-6r, pat-eris, -itur, -imiir, -imini, patz-untur. 
Fut. patz-ar, -eris, -etur, -emur, -emini, -entur. 
Imperf. patz-ebar, -ebaris, -ebatur, -ebamiir, -ebamini, -ebantur. 
Conj. Pres. patz-ar, -aris, -atiir, -amur, -amini, -antur. 

Imperf. pat-erer, -ereris, -eretiir, -eremur, -eremini, -erentiir. 
Imper. Pres. pat-ere, -imini. 

Fut. pat-itor, patz-untor. 
Infin. Pres. pat-!. Gerund, patz-endum, -endi, -endo. Gerundive, 
patz-endiis. 

Note 1. Orior is conjugated like patior, except a few forms which follow the 
Fourth Conjugation : oriri, orirer, etc. PotiSr follows the Fourth Conjugation, but 
in some forms wavers between the Third and Fourth : as, potrtur or p5titur; 
potimur or potimur ; pSterer or potirer. 

Note 2. Morior, Srior, have Future Participles moriturils, oriturus. 

B. Verbs in uo retain u in all forms ; as, induo, indiiis, indui, 
induere. 



PEKIPHKASTIC CONJUGATION. 

§ 64. The Participles in uriis, dus, may be conjugated with all the 
Tenses of the Verb sum. These forms are called Conjugatio Periphras- 
tica Fiituri and Conjugatio Periphrastica Gerundlvi : as, 



PERIPHRASTIC CONJUGATION. 



r=l O 



00 



'^3 cc ^ 



g >0 >© ?i I© >© *> oa 






,= 






~ 02 



w g 

p 1 

-4 )<| 



Pi ' 






■g ig 1r _, 'g 
H -P? g | ,_ g J 





B*S 


a 




>£ g 


i© 


X 

— 


aw 


X 
X 




1© 3© 




1 


X 1 

X 3p 


>i 


X 


© «+-( 


<4-< 


- 

pi 


runt 

rant 

erunt 

crint 

erant 


X 


3© 3© i 


1 ' 



Q 



-3 


xl 










> 


, 


^ 


^ 


o 


tt 


U3 


53 




© 


£/yt 


■*"* 




9> 


O 


<*0 






r^ 


o 


83 


■» 


H 


s 


© 


Si 


1 


*s 



■P )H IS t! ^ S-I 

x ,g f-i .£ 3© 3© 

© 3© 3© I I I 



p g s >g >s >© 

>S ^ '3 J >i >p 

5a >s j© <ri <& «« 



3© ^p* 

X ?-l 
X 3© 



X )£> 



"S>S 



$3 © g S ^ © 

2 b£^3 SP ^1 © S 
>0 >S> 2 1© 5© £ c3 



• 3PJ 

. Ip 

£3 



~>p 



X fj 



J 1+3 *J '"-? >P* ,^ , 

3 ^ $3 >£ ip "£ 
5 fS 1© 3© w S3 



>P* 



+= >i-i ->:J ,(_; 

© 3© 3© 1 






._ ^1 fn >2 )G >P 

I )i )© «H <H <H . 

E p © p ^-1 

PM 02 kh P^ Ph PM 



t3 






^ S 


PS 






H ^ 


■r-i 1 










>© 

X 
X 


>© 

X 
X 

1 






- 


«+-i 






X 

© 


<4H 






S-I 


© 




PhPM 


* g S 








ill 

^^ x 






j. 


S 








■ff 






pi j « 






-^ ^ 


a 






only required to e 
s sum, I am about 
■ to be ; futurus sim 


M 






33 12 

tfi fH Sf 


- g 








Td 

= 
H 






ranslating, i 
pie : as, am 
3 sum, / am 




















^'S>P 








In 
Parti 
futiir 









56 SIGNS OF THE TENSES AND MOODS. 

SIGNS OF THE TENSES AND MOODS. 
§ 65. The Latin Tenses may be variously rendered : as, 

Indicative Mood. 

Pres. amo, love, am loving. 

Imp. amabam, loved, was loving, used to love. 

Perf. amavi, loved (Simple Past), have loved (Present Past). 

§ 66. The Conjunctive Mood has two general uses : 

(1) Pure, or not subordinate to another Verb : 

(2) Subjunctive, or subordinate to another Verb. 

1. The Pure Conjunctive is rendered in English with auxiliary Verbs 
for Signs ; generally would or should ; sometimes can, could ; may, might ; 
shall, or will : as, 

amem te (si bonus sis), 

I can love you {if you are good). 

amarem te (si bonus esses), 

/ should — would — love you {if you were good), or 

I should have been loving you {if you were good). 

amavissem te (si bonus fuisses or esses), 

I should — would — have loved you {had you been good). 

2. When the Mood is Subjunctive, it sometimes has a sign in 
English: as, Ede iit vivas, eat that you may live-, but oftener it must 
be rendered as if it were Indicative : as sis, esses, fuisses, in the last 
Examples. So : 

Laudatur quod paruerit, he is praised in that he obeyed. 
Laudavi eum qui pariiisset, / praised him (as one) who had 
obeyed. 

§ 67. The Present Conjunctive is also used Imperatively : 

Active. 
Amem, may I, or let one 



Ames, mayst thou, or 

thou, 

Amet, may he, or let him 
Am emus, may we, or let us 
Ametis, may ye, or see ye 
Ament, may they, or let them) 



Amer, may 1, or let one 
Ameris, mayst thou, or see 

thou 
Ametur, onay he, or let hion 
Amemur, onay we, or let us 
Amemmi, onay ye, or see ye 
Amentur, onay they, or let them 



THE INFINITIVES. 



57 



THE INFINITIVES. 

§ 68. The Infinitives in re, ri, are Present or Imperfect ; Infinitives 
in isse, tus-esse, Perfect or Pluperfect : as, 



(1) Dicitiir amare, 

He is said to be loving. 



(1) Dicitiir amari, 

He is said to be loved. 



Dicebatiir amare, Dicebatiir amari, 

He tvas said to have been loving. He was said to have been (at the 

time) loved. 



Scio eum amare, 

I know (that) he is loving. 

Sciebam eum amare, 

I knew (that) he was loving. 

(2) Dicitiir amavisse, 

He is said to have loved. 

Dicebatiir amavisse, 

He was said to have loved. 



Scio eum amavisse, 
I know (that) he loved. 
I know (that) he has loved. 

Sciebam eum amavisse, 
I knew (that) he had loved. 



Scio eum amari, 

/ know (that) he is lo ved. 

Sciebam eum amari, 

I knew (that) he was loved. 

(2) Dicitiir amatus esse, 

He is said to have been loved, 

Dicebatiir amatus esse, 
He was said to have been (at 
a former time) loved. 

Scio eum amatum esse, 

I know he was loved. 

I know he has been loved. 

Sciebam eum amatum esse, 
I knew he had been loved. 



§ 69. A. The Future Infinitive Active has two forms, -uriis esse, 
-iirus fiiisse, the uses of which a few instances will show : — 

(a) Crederis ituriis esse, you are believed to be about to go. 
Credo te iturum esse, / believe (that) you will go. 

(b) Credebaris ituriis esse, you were believed to be about to go. 
Credebam te iturum esse, I believed that you would go. 

(c) Crederis ituriis fiiisse, you are believed to have been about to go. 
Credo te iturum fiiisse, I believe that you would have gone. 

d 3 



58 GERUND, SUPINES, PARTICIPLES. 

B. The Future Infinitive Passive is formed by the union of the 
Supine in um with the Impersonal Infinitive iri : as, 

Credo amatum iri Juliam, (lit.) / believe there-is-a-going to love Julia 

i.e., / believe Julia will be loved. 
Aiunt ultum iri injurias, they say that the wrongs will be avenged. 

a. The same may be expressed by fiiturum esse iit, fore iit, with 
ametur, amaretiir; as, 

Credo futurum-esse (or fore) iit Julia ametur, I believe (that) Julia 

will be loved. 
Credebam fore lit Julia amaretur, / believed (that) Julia would be 

loved. 



GEKUND.— SUPINES.— PAKTICIPLES. 

§ 70. A. The Gerund is perhaps the Neuter Gerundive Participle 
declined as a Yerb-Noun (um, i, 6). 

B. The Supines are Cases (Accusative and Ablative) of a Verb-Noun 
of the Fourth Declension. 

C. The Gerundive (iis, a, um, like bonus) is used to express meetness 
or necessity, either impersonally, as, eundum est, one must go ; or 
personally, as, vita tuenda est, life should be protected. If a Case of 
the Person is added, that Case is usually the Dative: as, eundum 
est mihi, / must go; vita nobis tuenda est, life should be protected 
by us. 

J). The other Participles are— 

Active. Pres. amans, loving, like ingens. 

Fut. amaturiis, about to love. ) ,., *.* ^ 
v ' [ like bonus. 

Passive. Perf. amatiis, loved, ) 

The three Participles wanting may be thus supplied : 

Act. Part. Perf. ' having loved,' quum amavisset (or by § 125.) 
Pass. Part. Pres. ' being loved,' qui amatiir, or dum amatiir. 
,, Part. Fut. i about to be loved,' qui amabitur. 

E, Some Verbs form Participials in bundiis or cundiis, expressing 
'fulness,' as, vagabundiis, wandering, iraeundiis, wrathful; in bilis, 
expressing 'possibility,' as, parabilis, procurable ; in ilis, expressing 
' capacity,' as, docilis, teachable ; in ax, expressing ' inclination,' as, 
loquax, talkative; inidiis, expressing 'active force,' as, rapidiis, hurrying, 
ciipidus, desirous. 



DERIVED, ETC. VERBS. 59 



DERIVED VEEBS. 

§71. I. Frequentative Verbs express repeated action, are of 
the First Conjugation, and formed either in -to, -so, from Supine-stems: 
as, canto, I sing often (cano, cantum), cnrso, Iran often (curro, cursum) ; 
or by adding -i-to, -i-tor to the Clipt Stem, as, rogzto, I ash often (rogo). 

II. Inceptive Verbs express beginning of action, are of the Third 
i Conjugation, and formed by adding -sco to the Present-stem : as, 

Labasco, / begin to totter, from labile. 

Pallesco, I turn pale, „ pallEre. 

Or from Nouns, with suffix -a-sco or -e-scd ; as, 

Puerasco, / become a boy, from piier. 

Mitesco, I become mild, „ mitis. 

III. Desiderative Verbs express the desire of action, are of the 
Fourth Conjugation, and formed by adding -urio to the Supine-stem 
as, 

Esiirio, I am hungry , from edo, es-um. 

Parturio, I am in labour , ,, pario, part-um. 

QUASI-PASSIVE AND SEMI-DEPONENT VERBS. 

§ 72. The Verbs which unite an Active form with a Passive meaning 
are : 

Exulo, I am banished (are). Vapulo, I am beaten (are). 

Flo, I am made. Veneo, I am on sale (ire). 

Liceo, I am put to auction. 

§ 73. The Verfe which have an Active Present with a Perfect of 
Passive form, are: 

Audeo, I dare, Perf. ausiis sum, I dared. 

Fido, / trust, „ f Isiis sum, I trusted. 

Gaudeo, I am glad, „ gavlsus sum, / was glad. 

Soled, I am wont, „ solitus sum, I was wont. 

Some have Active Perfect -with Deponent Perfect Participles : as, 
Present. Perfect. Part. Perf. 

Juro, I sic car juravl, I sic ore juratus, having sworn. 

Ceno, I sup cenavl, I supped cenatus, having supped. 

Prandeo, I dine prandi, I dined pransiis, having dined. 

So nupta, wedded, potus, having drunk, and some others. 



Coep- 
Od- 


Indic. 
Y ero 


Conj. 
erim 


Infin 
isse 


Memm- 


J eram 


issem 


isse 



60 DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 

DEFECTIVE VEEBS. 

Defective Verbs want some of the usual parts of a Verb. 
§ 74-. I. The Verbs eoepi, I have begun, odT, I hate, meminl, 1 
remember, have no Present-stem Tenses, 

Scheme. 

Infin. 

Perf. 

Fut. Perf. 
Plup. 

Meminl has Imperative Fut. Sing, memento ; Plur. mementote. 

Coepi has Part. Perf. coeptiis ; Fut. coepturus. 

Odi „ „ osiis „ osuriis. 

a. Novi, I Jcnovj (from nosco), is similarly used. 

II. Many Verbs have Perfect without Supine (see Table), and many 
Inceptive and other Verbs have neither Perfect nor Supine : as, mitesco, 
polleo, furo, ferio. 

III. Verbs Defective in other forms : 

(1) Aid, I say l ay] affirm. 

Indie. Pres. aio, ais, ait aiunt. 

,, Imperf. aiebam, -bas, &c, complete. 

Conj. Pres. aias, aiat aiant. 

(2) Inquam, I say. 

Indie. Pres. inquam, inquis, inquit, inquimiis inquiunt. 

„ Imperf. inquiebat inquiebant. 

,, S. Fut. inquies, inquiet. 

„ Perf. inquisti, inquit. 

Imper. Pres. inque inquite. 

(3) Quaeso, I entreat', 1st Pers. PL quaesiimus. 

(4) Fan, to speak; used by the Poets in this and a few other forms : 
as, fatiir, he speaks ; fabor, / shall speak ; fare, speak thou. Participles : 
fatiis ; fandiis. Grerund : fandi, fando. 

(5) The Imperatives : 
a. Apage, begone. 

Cedo, cedite {or cette), give h;re. 

Have (or ave), havete, hail. Infin. havere. 

Salve, salvete, hail. Infin. salvere. Fut. salvebis. 

h. Age, agite, come; Vale, valete, farewell ; Infin. valere ; ar* used 
with special meaning, but their Verbs ago, valeo, are fully eon-* 
jugate^ • 1 



IMPERSONAL VERBS. 



61 



Impersonal Verbs. 



§ 75. Impersonal Verbs are conjugated (as such) only in the Third 
Persons Singular of the Finite Verb, and in tbk 'Infinitive. 

A. Active Impersonate have no Passive Voice. 
(1) The principal of these are of the Second Conjugation : 



Oportet, decet, dedecet, 
Piget, piidet, paenitet, 
Taedet add and miseret, 
Libet, licet, and liquet, 
Attinet and pertinet. 



it behoves, beseems, misbesecms, 

it irks, shames, repents , 

it disgusts, moves pity, 

it phases, is lawful, is clear, 

it relates, belongs. 



Conjugation of Impersonal Verbs (Second). 
Indie. Conjunc. Infin. 



, 1. Oport- ^ 

2. Dec- 

3. Dedec- 


























me, te, eum,J 4. Pig- 


et 


eat 


ere. 


Pres. 


nos, vos, eos \ 5. Pud- 


ebit. 






a Fut. 


6. Paenit- 


eba-t 


eret. 




Imperf. 


7. Taed- 


' ? x \ 


uerit 


uisse. 


Perf. 


V 8 Miser- 


uerit. 






Fut, Perf. 


v, ^ , f 9. Lib- 
nub, etc. { 10 Mc . 


uerat 


iiisset. 




Pluperf. 


v, . . (11. Attin- 
ad me, etc. \ l% p ert j n .j 



















The Persons are expressed by the Case : as, 



Sing. Oportet me ire, it behoves me \ 

oportet te ire, ,, 

oportet eum ire, ,, 
Plur. oportet nos Ire, ,, 

oportet vos ire, ,, 

oportet eos ire, ,, 



you 
him 



you 
them 



or 1 



- to go, 



you 
he 



ye 
they 



ought to 
go. 



Sing. Licet mihi ire, it is 


allowed me \ 


licet tibi ire, ,, 


?) 


you 


licet el ire, „ 


?> 


him 


Plur. licet nobis ire, ,, 


)5 


us 


licet vobis ire, „ 


5} 


you 


licet lis Ire, ,, 


5) 


them 1 



h to go, 



or / 

you 
he 



ye 
they 



may go. 



So in the other Tenses and Moods 



62 IMPERSONAL TERES. 

(2) Among Impersonal Verbs of other Conjugations are : 



Accidit, 

Contingit, 

Evenit, 

Convenit, 

Expedit, 



it happens 
it befalls 
it turns out 
it suits 
it is expedient 



I mini 

\ M, 



ei, etc. I 



Delectat, 

.Tuvat, 

Interest, 

Kefert, 

Constat, 



it delights ) eum, etc. 
it concerns ) mea, tiia, 
it imports J ejus, etc. 
it is acknowledged. 



(3) Some Impersonals express changes of season and weather : as, 



Pulgiirat, it lightens. 
Ningit, it snows. 
Plait, it rains. 



Tonat, it thunders. 
Liicescit, it dawns. 
Vesperascit, it gets late. 



§ 76. B. (1) Intransitive Verbs are used impersonally in the 
Passive Voice : as, luditur, there is playing, from ludo, I play. 





Indicative. 


Conjunctive. 


Infinitive. 


Present 


Luditur 


ludatiir 


ludl. 


Simple Put. 


ludetiir 




lusum M. 


Imperf. 


ludebatiir 


luderetur. 




Perfect 


lusum est 


lusum sit 


lusum esse. 


Put, Perf. 


lusum erit 






Pluperf. 


lusum erat 


lusum esset 


lusum fuisse 



The Persons may be expressed by an Ablative of the Agent : as, 

Present Indicative. 

Sing. Luditur a me, there is flaying by me, or / flay, 

luditur a te, „ ,, thee, thou playest, 

luditur ab eo, „ ,, him, he plays, 

Plur. luditur a nobis, ,, ,, us, we play, 

luditur a vobis ,, ,, you, ye play, 

luditur ab lis, „ ,, them, they play. 

But the Ablative is often omitted, being understood from the context. 

§ 77- (2) The Neuter Gerundive is used impersonally with esse to 
express meetness or necessity : sometimes with Dative of Person. 



Present Indicative. 






Sing. Ludendum est milii, there must be playing by me, 


or/ 


ludendum est tibi, „ ,, 


,, thee, 


thou 


ludendum est ei, „ „ 


„ him, 


he 


Plur. ludendum est nobis, „ „ 


„ vs, 


we 


ludendum est vobis „ „ 


„ you, 


ye 


ludendum est iis, „ ,, 


„ them, 


they 



Here too the Case is often omitted : nunc est bibendum, now we (or 
men) must drink. 



ANOMALOUS VERBS. 



63 



; ANOMALOUS VEBBS. 

§ 78. Anomalous Verbs do not form all their parts according 
to rule. Sometimes their Tenses are borrowed from several stems, as 
in sum, possum, fero ; sometimes their irregularities arise from mutation 
of letters, as in volo, nolo, malo, eo, queo, edo. 



/§ 79. 


CoNJUGATIO 


n-Fobm OF An< 


5MALOUS VE 


RB.* 




l 


. Be able. 


2. Wish. 3. 


Not-wish. 


4. 


Wish-rather. 


/l Pers. Pres. 


Possum 


Yolo 


Nolo 




Malo 


' 2 Pers. „ 


potes 


yIs 


nonvis 




mavis 


Infin. „ 


posse 


Telle 


nolle 




malle 


Perfect 


potii-i 


Yolu-i 


nolii-i 




malu-i 


Grer. in dam 


— 


(volend-um) 


(nolend-um) 


(malend-um) 


„ di 


— 


Tolend-T 


nolend-i 




malend-i 


„ do 


— 


volend-o 


nolend-o 




malend-o 


Part, Pres. 


— 


yolens 


nolens 




malens 


Potens, able 


powerful, is used as an Adj 


ective. 


5 


. Bear. 


6. Be made. 


7. Go. 




8. Can. 


1 Pers. Pres. 


Fero 


Flo 


Eo 




Queo 


2 Pers. „ 


fers 


fis 


is 




quis 


Infin. „ 


ferre 


fieri 


ire 




quire 


Perfect 


tiili 


factiis sum 


rvl 




quivi 


Ger. in dam 


ferend-um 


— . 


eund-um 






„ dl 


ferend-i 


— 


eund-i 






„ do 


ferend-o 


— . 


eund-o 






Supine in um 


lat-um 


— 


it-um 






u 


lat-u. 


— 


it-fi 






Part. Pres. 


fer-ens 


— 


lens (eunt- 


18) 




„ Fut. 


lat-iirus 


— 


it-urus 







5. Feror (Passive)- has Pres. Ind. 2. ferris (for fer-eris) ; 3. fertiir; 
Imperf. Conj. Sr-r-er (for fer-erer), ferreris, etc., and Inf. ferri. Other 
Present-stem forms are regular. Supine-stem forms, latiis sum, etc. 

6. Flo in the Present-stem forms is the Passive of facio, which is 
regular in the Active, and in the Supine-stem forms, of the Passive. 

8. Queo and its compound nequeo {cannot) form their tenses like eo. 

9 Edo, / eat, often changes some of its forms as follows 



Pres. 2nd Pers. 
edis or es 



3rd Pers, 
edit or est 



Infin. 
edere or esse 



Imperf. Conj. 
ederem or essem- 



Pres. Conj. edim, edis, edit, is used. Other forms are regular. 



64 






ANOMALOUS YERBS. 






§80. . 




Tense-Formation of 


1 




Indicative Mood. 








i 


Singular. 




Plural. 




1 i 


1. 


2. 3. 


l. 


2. 


3. 




Possum 


potes potest 


possumiis potestis 


possunt 




Volo 


vis vult 


voliimus 


vultis 


volunt 




Nolo 


nonvis nonvult 


noliimiis 


nonvultis 


nolunt 


+3 


Malo 


mavis ma vult 


maliimus 


mavultis 


malunt 


% 


Fero 


fers fert 


f erimiis 


fertis 


ferunt 


Ph 


Flo 


fis fit 


— 


— 


fiunt 




Eo 


is it 


imiis 


itis 


eunt 




Pot- er.am 


eras erat 


eramiis 


eratis 


erant 




Vole- ^ 












-t-S 


Nole- 












1 

S 
i— i 


Male- 
Fere- 


-bam 


bas bat 


bamiis 


batis 


bant 


Fie- 












I 


I- J 














Potii- \ 










. 


Volii- 












Nolii- - 
Malu- ( * 


isti it 


imiis 


istis 


erunt or 


p-t 


Tiil- 
Iv- J 








ere 




Potii- \ 










o 


Volii- 










s 

1 ft 


Nolii- w 
Malu-r eram 


eras erat 


eramiis 


eratis 


erant 


Tul- 












Iv- J 












Pot- ero 


eris erit 


erimiis 


eritis 


erunt 


o 


Vol- x 










: | 


Nol- 










m 


Mal- \ am 


es . et 


emiis 


etis 


ent 


I 


Fer- 










s 


Fi- J 










ft 


I- bo 


bis bit 


bimiis 


bitis 


bunt 


^J 


Potii- \ 










8 

Ph 

2 


Volu- 










Nolu- 1 w - 
Malu-f ero 


eris erit 


erimiis 


eritis 


erint 


| 


Tul- 










ft 
1 


Iv- j 

















ANOMALOUS VERBS. 






65 


Anomalous Verbs. 
















Conjunctive Mood. 








Poss- ) 


1. 


Singul 
2. 


ar. 

3. i. 


Plural. 
2. 


3. 




Vel- 


im 


Is 


it lmus 


ltlS 


int 





Mal- 
Fer- 
FI- 
E- 



at 



amus atis 



ant 



Poss- 
Vell- 
Noll- 
Mall- 
Ferr- 
Fier- 
Ir- 



em es et 



emus etis 



ent 



Potii- 

Volu- 

Nolu- 

Malu- 

Tiil- 

Iv- 



i 



y erim ens ent 



erimus eritis ennt 



Potu- 

Volii- 

Nolii- 

Malu- 

Tul- 

Iv- 



issem isses isset issemiis issetis issent 



Imperative Mood. 



Singular. 
2. 
(3) Noll 
(5) Fer 
(6)FI 
(7)1 



2. 

(3) NoJIto 

(6) Ferto 

(7) Ito 



Present. 



Plural. 

2. 
nolite 
ferte 
fite 
ite 

Future. 
3. 2. 3. 

nolito nolitote nolunto 

ferto fertote ferunto 

Ito ltote eunto 



(For the Parts 
of Verb Infi- 
nite, see Form 
of Conjugation, 
§79.) 



66 



PKESENT, PEKFECT, AND SUPINE 



81. TABLE OF VERBS, SHOWING PRESENT, INFINITIVE, 
PERFECT, AND SUPINE. (See §48; Note 2.) 

I. First Conjugation (Character A : Am A- re). 

Present. Infin. Perfect. Supine. 

Usual Form : (a-o) -5 a-vi a-tum 

Am-o -are ania-vi ama-tum. 









Exceptions. 










-in, -itum. 






Present. 


Infin. 


Perfect. Supine. 




(1)1. 

2. 


Crep5 

Ciibo 


-are 
-are 


crepui crepitum 
eubui cubitum 


creak, 
lie down 


Z. 


Dom5 


-are 


domiii domitum 


tame. 


4. 


Mico 


-are 


micui — 


glitter. 


5. 
6. 


Plico 

Sono 


-are 
-are 


-plicui -plicitum 
soniii sonitum 


fold, 
sound. 


7. 


Tono 


-are 


tonui tonitum 


thunder. 


8. 


Veto 


-are 


Yetin vetitum 
-in, -turn. 


forbid. 


(2) 


Seed 


-are 


seciii seetum 
Eedupl., -turn. 


cut. 


(3) 1. 


Do 


-are 


dedi datum 


give. 


2. 


Sto 


-are 


steti statum 
-vi, -turn. 


stand. 


(4) 1 
2. 


Juvo 
Lavo 


-are 

-are 


juvi jiitum 
lavi lotum 


help, 
wash. 



(1) 5. Also plicavi, plicatuni. 

(3) 1. Do, dare, has short a throughout ; with the compounds circumdo, surround ; 
pessumdo, ruin ; venumdo, put on sale, which form -dedi, -datum. The 
other compounds pass to the Third Conj. and form -didl, -ditum. III. 18. 
2. Comp. ad- con- ob- per- prae-sto, etc., form stiti, statum (-stitum, rare). 



II. Second Conjugation (Character £ : MonE- re). 



Usual Form : 


Mon 


-eo -ill 
-eo -ere mon-m 

Exceptions. 
-Vi, -turn. 


-itum 
mon-itum 


(1) 1. Deleo 

2. Fleo 

3. -ple5 


-ere 
-ere 
-ere 


deleyi deletum 
flevi fletum 
-pieyi -pletum 

-ill, -turn. 


blot out 

weep. 

fill. 


(2) 1. Doceo 

2. Misceo 

3. Tene5 


-ere 
-er§ 
-ere 


dociii doctum 
miscui mistum 
teniii -tentum 


teach. 
mix. 

hold. 


(1) 3. Forms thus 


described are only used in the compounds. 



SECOND AND THIRD CONJUGATIONS. 



67 









-Si, -turn 


. 






Present. 


Infiii. 


Perfect. 


Supine. 




(8) 1. 

2. 


Augeo 
Torqueo 


-ere 
-ere 


auxi 
torsi 


auctum 
tortum 


increase, 
twist 


3. 


Lugeo 


-ere 


luxi 

-Si, -sum 




mourn. 


(4) 1. 


Mulceo 


-ere 


mulsi 


mulsum 


soothe. 


2. 


Ardeo 


-ere 


arsi 


arsum 


take fire. 


3. 


Kideo 


-ere 


risi 


risum 


laugh. 


4. 


Suadeo 


-ere 


suasi 


suasum 


advise. 


5. 


Maneo 


-ere 


mansi 


mansum 


remain. 


6. 


Jubeo 


^ere 


jussi 


jus sum 


command. 


7. 


Haereo 


Jt§e 


haesi 


haesum 


stick. 


8. 
9. 


Fulgeo 
Luceo 




fulsi 

J^jUXl 


— 


glitter, 
shine. 






r 


Redupl., -sum. 




(5) 1. 


Mordeo 


-% 


momordi 


morsum 


bite. 


2. 

3. 
4. 


Pendeo 

Spondeo 

Tondeo 


-ere 

-er^ 

-ere" 


pependi 
spopondi 
Ktotondi 

k>:; - * 
-l, -Sum. 


pensum 
sponsum 
tonsum^ 
m 


hang. 

pledge, promise 

shear. 


(6) 1. 
2. 


Prandeo 

Sedeo 


-ere 
-ere 


prandi 
sedi 


pransuin* 
sessum 


lunch, dine, 
sit. 


3. 


Video 


-ere 


vidi 

-I, -turn. 


visum 

* 


see. 


(7) 1. 


Caveo 


-ere 


eavi 


cautum 


beware. 


2. 


Faveo 


-ere 


favi 


fautum 


favour. 


3. 


Foveo 


-ere 


fovi 


fotum 


cherish. 


4. 


Moveo 


-ere 


moTi 


m5tum 


move. 


5. 


Voveo 


-ere 


TOYl 

Semi-dejjon 


votum 
ent. 


vow. 


(8) 1. 


Audeo 


-ere 


ausiis sum 


— 


dare. 


' 2, 


G-audeo 


-ere 


gayisus sum 


— 


rejoice. 


3. 


Soleo 


-ere 


solitiis sum 


__ 


be wont. 



III. Third Conjugation (Character a Consonant or V). 
Form various. Keg-ere ; Indu-ere. 

A, Consonant-Verbs. 
Guttural Stems, -si, -turn {five -sum). 



(1) 1. 


Dico 


-ere 


dixi 


dictum 


say. 


2. 


Duco 


-ere 


duxi 


ductum 


lead. 


3. 


Cingo 


-ere 


cinxi 


cinctum 


surround. 


4. 


Coquo 


-ere 


COX1 


coctum 


cook. 


5. 


Figo 


-ere 


fix! 


fixum 


fix. 


6. 


Fingd 


-ere 


finxi 


fictum 


fashion. 


7. 


Jungo 


-ere 


junxi 


junctum i 


join. 



68 



PRESENT, PERFECT, AND SUPINE : 



Present. 


Infin. 


Perfect. 


Supine. 




8. Pingo 


-ere 


pinxi 


pictum 


faint. 


9. Rego 


-ere 


rexi 


rectum 


rule. 


10. Tego 


-ere 


texi 


tectum 


cover. 


11. -stinguo 


-ere 


-stinxi 


-stinctum 


quench* 


12. Tinguo 


-ere 


tinxi 


tinctum 


dye. 


13. Unguo 


-ere 


unxi 


unctum 


anoint. 


(2) 1. Traho 


-ere 


traxi 


tractum 


draw. 


2. Veho 


-ere 


vexi 


vectum 


carry. 


3. Vivo 


[-ere 


vixi 


victum 


live. 


4. Fliio 


-ere 


fluxi 


fluxum 


flow. 


5. Striio 


-ere 


struxi 


structum 


file. 


6. -lacio 


-ere 


-lexi 


-lectum 


entice. 


7. -specio 


-ere 


-spexi 


-spectum 


espy. 


(3) 1. Mergo 


-ere 


mersi 


mersum 


drown. 


2. Spargo 


-ere 


sparsi 


sparsum 


sprinkle. 


3. Tergo 


-ere 


tersi 


tersum 


wipe. 




Dental Stems, 


-Si, -Sum. 




(4) 1. Claudo 


-ere 


clausi 


clausum 


shut. 


2. Divido 


-ere 


divisl 


d!v!sum 


divide. 


3. Laedo 


-ere 


laesi 


laesum 


hurt. 


4. Ludo 


-ere 


KlSl 


lusum 


play. 


5. Plaudo 


-ere 


plausi 


plausum 


clap the hands. 


6. Rado 


-ere 


rasi 


rasum 


scrape. 


7. Rodo 


-ere 


rosi 


rosum 


gnaw. 


8. Triido 


-ere 


trusi 


trusum 


thrust. 


9. Vado 


-ere 


-vasi 


-vasum 


go. 


10. Cedo 


-ere 


cessi 


cessum 


yield. 


11. Mitto 


-ere 


misi 


missum 


send. 


12. Quat-io 


-ere 


(quassi) 


quassum 


shake. 


13. Flecto 


-ere 


flex! 


flexum 


bend. 


14. Necto 


-ere 


nex! 


nexum 


bind. 




Labial Stems, 


-Si, -turn. 




(5) 1. Carpo 


-ere 


carps! 


carptum 


pluck. 


2. Repo 


-ere 


reps! 


reptum. 


creep. 


3. Scalpo 


-ere 


scalps! 


scalp turn 


scratch. 


4. Serpo 


-ere 


(serps!) 


(serptum) 


crawl. 


5. Nubo 


-ere 


nupsi 


nuptum 


be married. 


6. Scrib5 


-ere 


scrips! 


scriptum 


write. 


Liquid Ste 


ms, -Si, - 


turn {one -sum). 


(6) 1. Como 


-ere 


compsl 


comptum 


adorn. 


2. Demo 


-ere 


dempsi 


demptum 


take away. 


3. Promo 


-ere 


promps! 


promptum 


take forth. 


4. Sumo 


-ere 


sumps! 


sumptum 


take. 


5. Temno 


-ere 


temps! 


temptum 


despise. 


6. Pre mo 


-ere 


press! 


pre s sum 


press. 


7. G-ero 


-ere 


gessi 


gestum 


carry on- 


8. U r 5 


-ere 


uss! 


ustum 


burn. 



THIRD CONJUGATION. 



69 



Stem various, -til, -turn {one -sum). 





Present. 


Infin. 


Perfect. 


Supine. 




(7) 1. 


Elicio 


-ere 


elicm 


elicitum 


entice forth. 


2. 


Ciimbo 


-ere 


cubm 


ciibituin 


lie down. 


3. 


Kapio 


-ere 


rapiii 


raptum 


seize. 


4. 


Strepo 


-ere 


strepiii 


strepitum 


roar. 


5. 


Meto 


-ere 


messui 


messum 


mow. 


6. 


Alo 


-ere 


alui 


altum 


nourish. 


7. 


Colo 


-ere 


colui 


cultum 


till. 


8. 


Consulo 


-ere 


consuliu 


consultum 


consult. 


9. 


Occulo 


-ere 


occuliii 


occultum 


hide. 


10. 


Volo 


-ere 


Yoliil 


— . 


wish. 


11. 


Fremo 


-ere 


fremiii 


fremitum 


murmur. 


12. 


Gemo 


-ere 


gemui 


gemitum 


groan. 


13. 


Tremo 


-ere 


tremiii 


— 


tremble. 


14. 


Vomo 


-ere 


Tomul 


yomitum 


vomit. 


15. 


Pon5 


-ere 


posiii 


positum 


place. 


16. 


G-igno 


-ere 


geniii 


genitum 


produce. 


17. 


Sero 


-ere 


seriii 


sertum 


join. 


18. 


Texo 


-ere 


texiii 


textum 


weave. 




Present Stem Anomalous, -Vi, -turn. 


(8) 1. 


Lino 


-ere 


lev! 


litum 


smear. 


2. 


Sino 


-ere 


sivi 


situm 


allow. 


3. 


Cerno 


-ere 


crevi 


cretum 


sift, discern. 


4. 


Sperno 


-ere 


sprevi 


spretura 


despise. 


5. 


Sterno 


-ere 


stravi 


stratum 


strew. 


6. 


Sero 


-ere 


sevi 


satum 


sow. 


7. 


Cresco 


-ere 


cre\a 


cretum 


grow. [with. 


8. 


Nosed 


-ere 


noYi 


n5tum 


become acquain ted 


9. 


Pasco 


-ere 


pavi 


pastum 


feed. 


10. 


Quiesco 


-ere 


quievi 


— 


rest. 


11. 


Sues co 


-ere 


suevi 


suetum 


be wont. 


12. 


Cupio 


-ere 


cupivi 


cupitum 


desire. 


13. 


Peto 


-ere 


petivi 


petitum 


seek. 


14. 


Quaero 


-ere 


quaesm 


quae sit urn 


seek. 


15. 


Tero 


-ere 


trivi 


tritum 


rub. 


16. 


Arcesso 


-ere 


arcessivi 


arcessitum 


send for. 


17. 


Lacesso 


-ere 


lacessivi 


lacessitum 


provoke. 






Eedupl., -turn 


or -sum. 




(9) 1 


Pendo 


-ere 


pependi 


pen sum 


weigh. 


2. 


Tendo 


-ere 


tetendi 


tensum(-tum) stretch. 


3. 


Disco 


-ere 


didici 





learn. 


4. 


Posco 


-ere 


poposci 


— 


demand. 


5. 


Curro 


-ere 


ciicurrl 


cursum 


run. 


6. 


Pungo 


-ere 


pupiigi 


punctum 


prick. 


7. 


Tundo 


-ere 


tutiidi 


tun sum 


thump. 


8. 


Fallo 


-ere 


fefeUi 


falsum 


deceive. 


9. 


Parco 


-ere 


pepercl 


parsum 


spare. 


10. 


Pario 


-ere 


peperi 


partum 


bring forth. 



70 



PKESENT, PERFECT, AND SUPINE : 



Present. 


Infin. 


Perfect. 


Supine. 




11. Cado 


-ere 


cecidi 


easum 


fall. 


12. Cano 


-ere 


cecini 


cantum 


sing. 


13. Pango 


-ere 


pepigl 


pactum 


fasten. 


14. Tango 


-ere 


tetigi 


tactum 


touch. 


15. Caedo 


-ere 


cecidi 


caesum 


cut, beat, kill. 


16. Pello 


-ere 


pepull 


pulsum 


drive. 


17. Tollo 


-ere 


sustuli 


sublatum 


take up. 


18. Compounds of do : 






Abdo 


-ere 


abdidi 


abditum 


hide. 


Addo 


-ere 


addidi 


additum 


add. 


Condo 


-ere 


condidi 


conditum 


found, hide. 


Credo 


-ere 


credidT 


creditum 


believe. 


Dedo 


-ere 


dedidi 


deditum 


give up. 


Edo 


-ere 


edidi 


editum 


give forth, titter. 


Perdo 


-ere 


perdidi 


perditum 


lose. 


Prodo 


-ere 


prodidi 


proditum 


betray. 


Eeddo 


-ere 


reddidi 


redditum 


restore. 


Subdo 


-ere 


subdidi 


subditum 


substitute. 


Trado 


-ere 


tradidi 


traditum 


deliver. 


Vendo 


-ere 


vendidi 


venditum 


sell. 


19. Eeduplicated from sto : 
Sisto -ere -stiti 


-statum 


(Stand or make 
1 to stand. 


-I with lengthen 


ed Stem-vowel, -turn 


[three -sum). 


(10) 1. Facio 


-ere 


feci 


factum 


make. 


2. Jacio 


-ere 


jeci 


j actum 


throw. 


3. Linquo 


-ere 


liqm 


-lictum 


leave. 


4. Yinc5 


-ere 


T1C1 


victum 


conquer. 


5. Ago 


-ere 


egi 


actum 


do. 


6. Frango 


-ere 


fregi 


fractum 


break. 


7. Lego 


-ere 


leg! 


lectum 


choose, read. 


8. Edo 


-ere 


edi 


esum 


eat. 


9. Fodi5 


-ere 


fodi 


fossum 


dig. 


10. Fundo 


-ere 


fudi 


fusum 


* pour. 


11. Capio 


-ere 


cepi 


captum 


take. 


12. Kumpo 


-ere 


riipi 


ruptum 


break. 


13. Emo 


-ere 


emi 


emptum 


buy, take. 






-l, -Slim. 




(11) 1. Findo 


-ere 


fidi 


fissum 


cleave. 


2. Scindo 


-ere 


scidi 


scissum 


tear. 




-i 


, -Sum (one 


-turn). 


. 


(12) 1. -cando 


-ere 


-cendi 


-censum 


set on fire. 


2. -fendo 


-ere 


-fendi 


-fensum 


strike. 


3. Pando 


-ere 


pandi 


pansum 


spread. 


4. Prehendo 


-ere 


prehendi 


prehensum 


grasp. 


5. Scando 


-ere 


scandi 


scansum 


climb. 


6. Verto 


-ere 


verti 


versum 


turn. 


7. Bibo 


-ere 


bibl 


bibitum 


drink. 


8. Velio 


-ere 


velli, vulsi 


vulsum 


rend. 



THIRD AND FOURTH CONJUGATIONS. 



71 



(13) 







B. 


TT-verbs : 


-I, -turn. 






Present. 


Infin. 


Perfect. 


Supine. 




1. 


Aciio 


-ere 


acui 


acutum 


sharpen. 


2. 


Argiio 


-ere 


argiii 


argutum 


prove. 


3. 


Exii5 


-ere 


exui 


exutum 


put off. 


4. 


Imbuo 


-ere 


imbui 


imbutum 


tinge. 


0. 


Induo 


-ere 


indiii 


indiitum 


put on. 


6. 


Liio 


-ere 


liu 


lmtum 


vjash, aton 


7. 


Metuo 


-ere 


metiii 


— 


fear. 


8. 


Miniio 


-ere 


miniii 


minutum 


lessen. 


9. 


Niio 


-ere 


niii 


— 


nod. 


10. 


Ruo 


-ere 


riii 


ruitum 


'rush, fall. 


11. 


Statuo 


-ere 


statin 


statutum 


set up. 


12. 


Tribiio 


-ere 


tribin 


tributum 


assign. 


13. 


Solvo 


-ere 


solvl 


solutum 


loosen. 


14. 


Volvo 


-ere 


voIyi 


volutum 


roll. 



IV. Fourth Conjugation (Character X : Audi- re). 

Usual Form : -15 -Ire -ivi -itum 

Audio -ire audivi audi turn. 

Exceptions. 
-Ui or ivi, -turn. 



(1) 1. Aperio 


-ire 


aperiii 


apertum 


open 


2. Salio 


-ire 


salui 


(-sultum) 


leap. 


3. Sepelio 


-Ire 


sepeliYi 


sepultum 


bury 


4. Eo 


ire 


ivi or ii 


itum 


go. 



-3i, -tum {one -sum). 

(2) 1. Fulcio -ire falsi fultum 

2. Sancio -ire sanxl sanctum 

3. Vincio -ire Yinxi Yinctum 

4. Hauri5 -Ire hausi haustum 

5. Sentio -Ire sens! sensum 



prop, 
consecrate, 
bind, 
drain. 



(3) 1. Comperio -ire 

2. Eeperi5 -ire 

3. Venio -Ire 



-I, -turn. 

comperi 
repperl 
Yen! 



compertum find. 
repertum discover. 

Yentum come. 



72 



DEPONENT VERBS. 



V. DEPONENT VEEBS. 

(1) First Conjugation (Part. Perf. -atiis). 

(2) Second Conjugation (Part. Perf. -ltus). 

Exceptions. 

Infin. Part. Perf. 

confess. 



Present. 

1. Fateor 

2. Misereor 

3. Eeor 



-eri fassiis 

eri misertus or miseritus have pity on. 

-eri ratus think. 



(3) Third Conjugation (Part. Perf. -tus or -sus). 



Present. Infin. 

(a) 1. Fungor 

2. Amplector 

3. Nitor 

4. Patior 

5. Utor 

6. Gradior 

7. Labor 

8. Morior 

9. Queror 

10. Friior 

11. Loquor 

12. Sequor 

(5) 1. Apiscor 

2. Comminiscor 

3. Expergiscor 

4. Fatiscor 

5. Iras cor 

6. Nanciscor 

7. Nascor 

8. Obliviscor 

9. Paciscor 

10. Proficiscor 

11. Ulciscor 



Part. Perf. 




functus 


'perform. 


amplexus 


embrace. 


nisus or nixiis 


strive. 


passus 


suffer. 


usiis 


use. 


gressiis 


step. 


lapsus 


glide. 


mortuus 


die. 


que s tus 


complain. 


fruitus 


enjoy. 


locutus 


speak. 


secutus 


follow. 


aptiis 


obtain. 


commentiis 


devise. 


experrectiis 


wake up. 


fessus 


grow weary 


iratus 


be angry-* 


nactiis 


obtain. 


natiis 


be born. 


oblitiis 


forget. 


pactus 


bargain. 


profectus 


set out. 


ultiis 


avenge. 



(4) Fourth Conjugation (Part. Perf. -Itus). 
Exceptions. 



1. 


Assentior 


-irl 


assensiis 


agree to. 


2. 


Experior 


-in 


expertus 


try. 


3. 


Metior 


-irl 


mensiis 


measure. 


4. 


Opperior 


-irl 


oppertus 


wait for. 


5. 


Ordior 


-irl 


orsus 


begin. 


6. 


Orior 


-Irl 


ortus 


rise. 



Note. Inceptive Verbs form the Perfect and Supine as their Primitives : as, ingg- 
misco (from gemo), ingemui, ingemUum. Many Verbs are without Perfect ; more 
still without Supine. 



ADVERBS- PREPOSITIONS. 



73 



PARTICLES. 
A. ADVERBS. 

§ 82. I. Adverbs of Place answer the questions : — 

1) Ubi, where ? (4) Unde, whence ? 

2) Quo, whither 1 (o) Qua, which way ? 

[3) Quorsuni, whitherward 1 (6) Quatenus, quousque, how far? 

II. Adverbs of Te\ie answer the questions : 

(1) Quando, ubi, when? (2) Quamdiu, how long? 

III. Adverbs of Number answer the question Quoties, how often ? 

IV. Adverbs of Description express Manner, Quality, Quantit}^ etc. 

Many are derived from Adjectives, and end in e, ter; as, pulchre, 
timely ; niisere, wretchedly ; fortiter, bravely ; sapienter, wisely. 
Note. Adverbs of Negation are non, hand, not. 



B. PREPOSITIONS. 

§ 83. The following Prepositions take the Accusative Case. 



Ad, to, at, &c. 

A , v i toward, against. 

Adversum J ' J 

Ante, before. 

Apiid, at, in, among. 

Circum, around. 

Circa,^circiter, about. 

Cis, citra, on the near side of 

Contra, against, over against. 

Erga, towards. 

Extra, outside of out of. 

Infra, below. 

Inter, between, among, amidst. 

Intra, within. 



Juxta, adjoining to, beside. 

Ob, over against, by reason of . 

Penes, in the power of. 

Per, through. jj 

Pone, behind. 

Post, after, behind. 

Praeter, beside, 

Prope, near, propiiis, proxime. 

Propter, nigh, on account of. 

Secundum^^, along, according to. 

Supra, Tibove. ^ <*• 

Trans, across. V 

Ultra, beyond. 

Versus, Yersum, towards. 



The following take thai Ablative Case. 

A, ab, abs, by, from. 

Absoue (rare), without. 

Clam, without the knowledge of. 

Coram, in the presence of. 

Cum, with. 

De, down from, from, concerning. 



fix, e, out of, from. 

Palam, in sight of. 

Prae, before, ovjingio, compared aith. 

Pro, before, for, instead of 

Sine, without. 

Teniis, reaching to, as far as. 



Note. Cum is attached to the Personal, Reflexive, and Relative Pronouns ; as, 
mecuni,nobiscum, tecum, vobiscum,secum, quocum , or quTcum, quibuscum. 



74 CONJUNCTIONS. INTERJECTIONS. 

The following take the A ccusative or the Ablative. 

In, into, against (Ace), in, upon, among (Abl.). Super, over, upon. 
Sub, up to, under (Ace), under (Abl.). Subter, lender. 

In and sub with Accusative imply motion ; with Ablative, rest. 

II. The Prepositions and Particles compounded with Verbs are :— 

A. Prepositions: — a, ab, abs, ad, ante, circum, con (for cum), de, 
ex, e, in, inter, 6b, per, post, prae, praeter, pro, siib, subter, super, trans. 

B. Inseparable Particles: — ambi- (amb-), around, about) dis-, 
di-, in different parts or ways ; re-, back, again ; se-, apart. 

Note 1. Prepositions in composition suffer various changes ; such as, combibo for 
conbibo, offendo for obfendo, traduco for transduco. 

Note 2. Many Verbs in Composition suffer vowel-change : (1) a into e, as spwrgo, 
dispergo ; (2) a into u, as qu«tio, concutio ; (3) a into i, as, ago, exigo ; (4) e 
into i, as rego, dirigo ; (5)_ae into I, as, quaero, acquiro. Add to these, clau&o, 
excludo, &c. ; pkwdo, supplodo, &c. ; and audio, obedio. 



C. CONJUNCTIONS. 

§ 84\ Conjunctions are — 

1. Coordinative, or those which join words and sentences but do 

not affect Mood : as, et, que, ac, atque (and), aut, vel, ve , 
(either, or), sed, autem (but), nam, enim (for), &c. 

2. Subordinative, or those which join sentences, influencing Mood: 

as, ut (that), ne (lest), quod, quia (because), quum (when, since), 
si (if), nisi (unless), &c, &c. 

§ 85. The Interrogative Particles cannot be rendered in English 
without the Verbs, to which they impart an Interrogative, 
force: — 

They are, the enclitic -ne, an, num, utrum (whether) : the com- ' 
pounds of the last three with -ne ; namely, anne, numne, 
utrumne : and the compounds of an, -ne, with the nega- 
tive ; namely, annon, nonne. 



D. INTERJECTIONS. 

§ 86. An Interjection is an exclamatory word, used either to draw 
attention, or to express feeling of some kind. The most usual Inter- 1 
jections are — 

0, ! oh ! Pr5 or proh, forbid it ! 

A or ah, alas I Vae, woe ! 

^ heu \ . \alas! *K I lo! behold! 

Heu, hei, i Ecce, J 

Note. Of these, 0, a, eheu, heu, pro, may be used with a Vocative Case : the same, 
as well as en, ecce, with a Nominative or Accusative : hei, vae, with a Dative, 



75 



SYNTAX. 



PREFATORY EXCURSION. 

§87. <d> A Simple Sentence is the expression of a single thought : 
Psittaciis loquitur, Psittaciis non loquitur, 

The parrot speaks. The parrot does not speak. 

B. That of which something is said, is called the Subject: as, 
Psittaciis, the parrot. 

a. The Subject must be a Substantive, or a Noun-term which can 
take its place, as an Adjective, Pronoun, Infinitive, or Clause. 

C. The Finite Verb, which declares what is said of the Subject, and 
makes a complete sense, is called the Predicate: as, Loquitur, speaks. 

a. Since Pronoun Subjects are implied in the Endings (§ 44 Obs.), a 
single Verb may be a sentence : 

Veni, Vidi, Vici, 

I came , I saw, I conquered. 

D. Any Finite part of the Verb sum (esse), to be, is usually a 
Copula, or Link; and a word linked by it to the Subject, and com- 

1 pleting the sense, is called the Complement; both together forming 
the Predicate : 

Predicate. 



Subject. 


r 

Copula. 


Complement 


Homo 


est 


mortalis, 


Man 


is 


mortal. 


Homines 


sunt 


animalia, 


Men 


are 


animals. 



Note. The Copula is often omitted : as, Ran boni, {good men are few). 

a. Other Verbs besides sum link a Subject and Complement, and are 
called Copulative Verbs: as, fio, become; nascor, am born; videor, 
seem; dicor, am said; vocor, am called; putor, am thought, &c. 

E. An Adjective agreeing with any Noun-term is said to be in 
Attribution, and may be (1) Epithet; (2) Attributive Complement. 

(1) Docti virl, (2) Hi viri sunt docti, 

Learned men. These men are learned. 

2. A Substantive agreeing with any Noun-term is said to be in 
Apposition, and maybe (1) Epithetic; (2) Appositive Complement. 
(1) Rex Croesus, (2) Croesus fuit rex, 

King Croesus. Croesus was king. 

e2 



; 



76 



STNTAXIS MEMOEIALIS PEIMA. 



DE CONGRUENTIA. 

Regulae Quattuor Generales. 

§ 88. I. Verbum Finitum cum Nommatlvo Subjectp^ongruit 
numero et persona: 

Ma g i s t e r docet. T u. doces : n 6 s disci m us. 

Libri leguntur. Discere est utile. 

§ 89. II. Adject! vum genere, numero, et casu congruit cum 
eo cui attrlbuitiir : 

Vir bonus ille bonam hanc uxor em liabet. 
Hirundo pullis s ills orbata queritur. 
Carl sunt parentes; card est patria. 
Piieri discendo fiunt docti. 

§ 90. III. Substantlvum casu congruit cum eo cui appo- 
nitur : 

N o s pueri patrem L o 1 1 i u m lmitabimur. 
Effodiuntiir opes, irritamenta malorum. 
Spes est exspectdtw boni. 
Syllaba longa brevi subjecta Yocatur Iambus. 

§ 91. IV. Relativum cum Antecedente congruit genere, 
numero, et persona ; sed casu spectat siiam clausidam : 

Deuni veneramur qui nos creavit. 
Amidfiis est, quern amamus, a quo amamur. 
Amoxe, mater, quae me am as. 

De Subjecto Composito. 

§ 92. Cum Subjecto Composito. pluralia congriiunt : 

Veneno absumptl sunt Hannibal et Philopoemen. 

1. In divers! tate personarum Verba congruunt cum Priori! 
Persona : 

Situ et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus. 



DE CASICUS. 77 

2. In diversitate generum Adjectiva congriiunt cum Masciilo 
p'jtms quam cum Femmlno : 

Pater rnihi et mater mortui sunt. 

a. Rebus inanimis attribiiitur saepe geniis Neutrum : 
Divitiae, deciis, gloria in oculis sita sunt. 



DE CASIBUS. 

De Casibus Subjecti et Complements. § 87. 

§ 93. (1) Finiti Verb! Subjectum Nommatlvus est: 
Anrii fugiunt. 

(2) Finiti Yerbl Complementum plerumque Nommativus 
est: 

Vita est sommum. Kemo nascitur sapiens. 

§ 94. (1) Infmitivi Subjectum m Accusativo pomtiir : 
Constat annos fugere. | Scimus annos fugere. 

(2) InfinitiYi Complementum plerumque in ~ Accusativo 
pomtiir : J^ 

Aiunt Yitam esse somnium. 
Constat neminem nasci sapientem. 

a. Accusatlvi cum Infinltivo constructio vocatur Enun- 
ciatio Obliqua. 



DE ACCUSATIVO. 

§ 95. Accusativus est Casus Propioris Objectl. Necnon 
lmiltandi vim habet. 



I. Accusativus Objecti. 

§ 96. Verba Transitiva regunt Accusativum Objectl: 

Mater al it pullds. | In primis venerare Dtum. 

§ 97. Intr.msitiva capiunt Accusativum vi cognata : 
Duram servit servitutem. 

Claudius a! cam lusit. 



78 SYNTAXIS MEMORIALIS PRIMA. 

§ 98. Verba quaedam, rogandi praesertim et docendi, binos 
admittunt Accusativos, hunc Eel, ilium Personae : 

Nunquam dtvzttds deos rogavi. 
Quid nunc te litter as d 6 c e a m ? 

§ 99. Verba Factitiva, scilicet faciendi, vocandl, putandi, 
similia, binos habent Accusativos, nunc Objectl, ilium Com- 
plement! : 

Te facimus, Fortuna, deam. 

Romulus urbem suam Bomam vocavit. 

II. Accusativus Limitations. 

§ 100. Accusativus Eespectus adjungitur Verbis et Adjec- 
tlvls, praesertim apiid poetas : 

T remit artus. Nudae sunt lacertos. 

§ 101. Locus, Quo Itiir, in Accusatlvo ponitur, idque sme 
Praepositione, si vel oppidi nomen est, vel domus, rus : 

Kegulus Carthaginem r e d i 1 1. 
Vos ite domum\ ego rus Ibo. 

§ 102. (1) Diiratio Temporis in Accusatlvo ponitur : 
Pericles quadraginta annos praefuit Athenis. 

(2) Mensura Spatii in Accusatlvo ponitur : 
Erant muri Babylonis ducenos pedes alti. 

§ 103. Accusativum regunt multae Praepositiones : § 83. 

Ante, apiid, ad, adversus, rrope, propter, per, secundum, 

Circum, circa, extra, cis, Supra, versus, ultra, trans; 

Contra, inter, ergd, extra, His super, subter, addito, 

Infra, intra, juxtd, 6b, Et in, sub, si fit motio. 
Penes, pone, post, et praeter, 



DE DATIVO. 



§ 104. Datlvus est Casus Eecipientis seu EemotiorTs Object!. 

§ 105. Trajectiva, quae sensum trajlciunt ad Eemotms 
Objectum, sunt multa Adjectlva, Adverbia, et Verba, rarius 
Substantlva, quibiis indicator 

JPropinqmtds et Demonstratw, 

Gratificatio, Dominatw, 

Et his contraria quaeque notio. 






DE DATIYO. 79 



§ 106. I. Trajectiva capiunt Datlvum, quum signiiicantiir : 

(1) Propinquity et contraria : 

Est finitimiis ordtori poeta. 

Nil fu.it unquam sic impar sibi. 

Congriienter naturae vivenduni est. 

Praesentia confer praeteritis. 

Nee tamen ignorat quid distent aera lupinis. 

(2) Demonstratio et contraria : 

I Die mihi, Danioeta, crijnni pedis ? 

Anguis Sidlae apparu.it inimolanti. 

Hand cuiquam in diibio erat bellnni imminere. 

(3) Gratificatio et contraria : 

Patriae sit ldoneiis, iitilis agris. 

Tnrba gravis pact placidaeqne lnimica qiiieti. 

Quod alii donat sibi detrahit. 

Lucem redde tiiae, dnx bone, patriae. 

Nobis spondet fortuna salfitem. 

Ne libeat tibi qnod neraini licet, 

Parce pio generi. 

Suceensere nefas patriae. 

Resistendum est appctitibus. 

(4) Dominatio et contraria : 

Sapiens, sibi qui imperiosus. 

Omnibus supplexest. 

Imp erat ant servit collecta pecunia cinque. 

Mundus Deo p a r e t , et hu ic 6 b e d i u n t maria t erraeque. 

§ a. Inter Trajectiva sunt multa Verba composita cum 
Particulis, quale s sunt 

Bene, male, satis, re, 

Ad, ante, con, in, inter, de, 

Oh, sub, super, post, et prae : 

Ceteris satisfacio semper, mihi nunquam. 
Sicilia quondam ItciUae adhaesit. 
G-Tgantes bellnm dis intulerunt. 
Anatuni ova gallinis supponimus. 

§ 107. II. Dativus Eecipientis ubivls adjungl potest cum 
notione quadam Commodi vel Incommodi : 

Esto, nt nnnc multi, dives tibi, pauper amicis. 
Niima virgmes Vestae legit. 
Venus nupsit Vulcdno. 
Philosophiae semper vaco. 

a. Hue refer Dativum Pronominis, qui vocatur ethi- 
eils : 

Quid mihi Celsns agit? 



80 SYNTAXIS MEMOBIALIS PRIMA. 

b. Sum cum conipositis, praeter possum, capit Dativum : 

Sum tibi Mercurius. 
Vir rnihi semper abest. 

c. Est, sunt, cum Dativo, habere saepe significant : 

Est homini cum Deo similitudo. 
Sunt nobis mitia poma. 

cl. Adjungitur idem Dativus Participiis et Participialibus 
Passlvae Vocis, praesertim Gerundivis : 

Magnus cms obit et formidatus Othom. 
Midtis ille bonis flebilis occidit. 
Legendae sunt jpueris Aesopi fabulae. 

§ 108. III. Dativus Eel pro Complemento ponitiir, ad- 
juncto saepe Dativo Kecipientis : 

Nimia f Iducia calamitdti solet esse. 
Emtio est ayidum mare nautis. 

§ 109. IV. Dativus Complement! per Attractionem po- 
nitur, praesertim in nominandi formulis : 

Licuit Themistocli esse otwso. 
Huic ego die! nomen Trinumo faciam. 



DE ABLATIVO. 

§ 110. Ablativiis est Casus rerum quae circu instant et 
adverbial! more limitant actionem. Deflnit etiam Tempus 
et Locum. 

§ 111. I. Ablativiis Causae : 

Oderunt peccare boni virtutis amove. 
Cocpfis immanibus eff era Dido. 

§ 112. II. Ablativiis Instrument! : 

Hijaculis, ill! certant defendere saxis. 

§ 113. Ill, Ablat!vus Mod! : 

Injuria fit ditobus modis, aut vi ant fraitdv. 

§ 114. IV. Ablativus Condi tionis : 

Pace tua cum Thaide colloquar. 

Homo mm sententia prudentissimus est. 



DE ABIATITO. 81 

§ 115. V. Ablativus Qualitatis, cum Epitlieto : 

Qua facie fu.it, cui dedisti symbolum ? 
Senex promissa barba, horrenti capillo. 

§ 116. VI. Ablativus Kespectus : 

Angor ammo. 

Enniiis ingenw maximus, arte rudis. 

§ 117. VII. Ablativus Pretii : 

Ego spem pretw non emo. 

Quod non opus est, asse carum est. 

§ 118. VIII. Ablativus Mensurae : 

Longum sesquipede, latum pede est. 
Sol multis par tibus major est quam luna. 
Tan to pessimus omnium poeta, 
Qua/ito tuoptimiis omnium patroniis. 

§ 119. IX. Ablativus Materiae : 

Cibus eorum lacte, cased, came constat. 

a. Ablativum regunt: (1) Verba fung6r,fruor, utdr, vescor, 
potior, dignor; (2) Adjectiva digniis, indignus, contentiis, 
fretus, praeditus ; (3) Substantiva opus, ilsus : 

(1) Fungar vice cotis. 

Hannibal, cum victoria posset uti, friii malurt. 
Rex impiiis auro ti potitur. § 133. 

(2) Dignum laud.e virum Musa vetat mori. 

(3) Ubi res adsunt, quid opiis est verbis* 
Usus est filio v'igintl minis. 

b. Ex Adjectivis et Verbis abundandi vel egendi, dltandi 
vel privandi, pier a que Ablativum capiunt, multa etiam GenT- 
tivum : 

Amor et melle etfelle est fecundissimiis. 

Nunquam animus motu vacuus est. 

Vis consili expers mole riiit sua. 

Mancipiis locu.pl es eget aeris Cappadocum rex. 

Vac are culpa maximum est solatium. 

§ 120. X. Ablativus Temporis respondet, si rogatiir Quart do ? 
Intra quantum tempus ? Quanta tempore ante vel post ? 

Hie me omnia bell a conquiescunt. 

Quidquid est hiduo sciemiis. 

Homeriis annis multis fuit ante Eomulum. 

§ 121. XI. A. Ablativus Loci ponitur sine Praepositione, 
cum rogatiir, Qua via ? 

lb am forte Via Sacra. 
e 3 



82 SYNTAXIS MEMORIALIS PRIMA. 

B. Ablativus saepe caret Praepositione, cum rogatiir Ubil 
maxime, si oppidi nomen est, vel si stat cum Epitheto : 

Philippiis Nedpoli est, Lentuliis Puteolis. 
Tabernae tota urbe clauduntur. 

a, Oppidorum nomina singularia ex Declinatione prima et 
secunda locum stationis def iniunt per casus in ae, l : 

Quid Bomae faciam ? Is habitat Mileti. 

b. Similia sunt humi, domi, belli, militiae, run : 

Caesaris virtus domi miUtiaeque cognita est. 

C, Ablativus oppidi Praepositione caret, cum rogatiir Undel 

Demaratus fugit Corintho. 
a. Ita domo, rure. (De Accusativo Loci Quo Itur, v. § 101.) 

§ 122. XII. Ablativum regunt variae Praepositiones : 



A, ab, absque, coram, de, 
Pdlam, clam, cum, ex, et e, 
Sine, tenus, pro, et prae : 



His super, subter, sub adde- 

miis, 
fit in, de statu si dicemiis. 



a. Praepositiones etiam compositae regunt Ablativum, prae- 
sertim db, de, ex : 

Quinctius dictdturd se abdicavit. 
Detrudunt naves scopulo, 

b. Ablativus Agentis expetit Praepositionem a, db : 

Laudatur ab Ms, eulpatur ab tills, 

§ 123. XIII. Ablativiis Separationis et Originis etiam sine 
Praepositione Verbis et Participiis adjungitiir : 

Cedes coemptis saltibus et domo. 
Pelope n a t ii s , Tantcilo p r o g n a t u s est. 

§ 124. XIV. Ablativiis Rei Comparatae : 

(1) Pro quam cum Nominativo : 

Nihil estamabiliiis virtute. 

Vilius argentum est auro, virtiriibus aurum. 

(2) Pro quam cum Accusativo : 

Piito mortem dedecore leviorem. 

Neminem Lycurgo utiliorem Sparta genuit. 

§ 125. XV. Substantivum cum Participio coalescit in 
Ablativo, qui vocatiir Absolutiis : 

Begibus exaetis consiiles creati sunt. 



DB GENITIVO. 83 

a. Pro Participio saepe suppletur alteram Substantivum 
vel Adjectivum : 

Nil desperandum Teucro ditce et auspice Teucro. 
Natiis est Augustus consulibus Cicerone et Antonio. 
Jam que cinis, vlvis fratribiis, Hector erat. 
Quid dicam , hcic j il v e n t 11 t e ? 



DE GENITIVO. 

§ 126. Genitrvus, Casus Possidentis, nomina plerumque 
defmit vel subjective vel objective. 

A. Genitivus Subjectivus. 

§ 127. I. Genitivus Auctoris et Possessors. 

Polycleti sign a plane perfecta sunt. 
Singulorum opes sunt diyitiae civitdtis. 
Omnia, quae mulieris filer unt, viri fiunt. 
Ea statua dicebatiir esse Myroms. 

a. Interdum Genitivus pendet a suppressa voce : 

Hectoris Andromache (supple uxor). 
Ventura erat ad Vestae (supple tern/plum). 

b. Genitivus ita stat, iit suppler! possit 
Indoles, indicium, 

Munus aut offtdum : 

Cujusvis hominis est errare. 

Est adolescents majores natu vereri. 

Tempori ceder e h a b e t ii r sapien tts. 

§ 128. II. Genitivus Qiialitatis, cum Epitheto : 
Ingenul vultus puer ingenuique pudoris. 
Claudius erat somnl brevissimi. 

a. Notentur elliptic! Genitivi, jj&ryi, minoris, minimi, magm, 
plilris, pliirimi, tantl, quanti, maximi, quibiis supple pretii : 
Voluptatem virtus minimi facit. 
Emit hortos tanti qaanti Pytliius Yoluit. 

§ 129. III. Interest, refert, Genitivum admittunt: 
Interest omnium recte facere. 
Refert convposiiionis quae quibus anteponas. 

a, fiadem pro Genitivis Pronominum usurpant casus Pos- 
sessivos med, tua, sua, nostra, vestrd, cujd, cum re congriientes : 

Et tua et med interest te valere. 
Quid nostra id refert? 



/ 

/ 



84 SYNTAXIS MEMOBIALIS PRIMA. 

§ 130. IV. A. Genitivus Eel Distributae Partitivls adjun- 
gitiir, quae, quantum licet, Genitivi sumunt genus : 

Elephanto beluarum est nulla prudentior. 

Homini uni dnimantium luctiis est datiis. 

Sulla centum viginti suorum amisit. 

Major Neronum mox grave praelium commisit. 

Gallorum fortissimi suntBelgae. 

Nemo mortdlium omnibus horis sapit. 

Pise) um f e m i n a e majores sunt quam mares. 

Sequimur t e, s a n c t e deorum. 

Hoc ad te minime omnium pertinet. 

a. Nostrum, vestrum, Parti tiva sequuntur : 
Te venire uterque nostrum ciipit. 

§ 131. B. Genitiviis Eel Demensae Vocabula Quantitatis 
et Neutra Adject! va sequitur: 

Satis eloqicentiae, scipientiae parum est. 
A liquid pristini rdbdris conservat. 
Quantum numorum, t an turn fidei est. 



B. Genitivus Objectivus. 

§ 132. I. Genitivus objective jungitiir Substantivls, Adjec- 
tlvls, ant Partlcipils, qnibus transitiva quaedam vis est, 
praesertim si significant 

Perltiam, curam, desiderium, 
Vel quidquid erit his contrarium : 

Insitus est menti cogmtionis amor. 

Difficilis est cur a rerum dUendrum. 

Tempiis edax rerum est. 

Corpus patiens mediae fiiit. 

Conscia mens recti est. 

lumper it us morum fiiit. 

Avid a est jperwull virtus. 

Animus fiiit cdieni appetens, sui profiisus. 

a. Mel, till, sul, nostrl, vestri, objective ponuntur; subjec- 
tive, meils, tuils, situs, noster, vesicr : 

Nicias tua sill memoria delectatnr. 

(a) Genitivus Subiectivus in Possesslvo latens Genitlvum 
sibi congruentem recipit : 

Respublica meet unius opera salva erat. 

Aves fetus adultos suae ipsorum fiduciae permittunt. 



DE GENITIVO. 85 

§ 133. II. Genitivus adjungitur Verbis et Adjectivls, a 
quibus significatur 

Potentia et impotentict, Damndtw, absolutw, 
Crimindtw, innocentid, Memorid et oblivw : 

(1) Roman! signovum potiti sunt. § 119 a. 
Ira est imp o tens sici. 

(2) Fraterni est sanguinis i n s o n s . 
Reus est injuvidvum. 

( 3 ) PetilHus furti absolutiis est. 
Condemnamus haruspices stultitiae. 

(4) Res adversae admonent nos veligwnam. 
Omnes immemorem beneficii oderunt. 

a. Memmi, reminiscdr, recorddr, obliviscor, Genitlvum vel 
Accusativum admittunt : 

Jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. 
Dulces moriens reminiscitur Argos. 

§ 134. III. Piget, pudet, paenitet, taedet atque miseret, Ira- 
personalia, Genitlvum capiunt cum Accusativo : 

Mi ser et te alior um : till nee miseret nee piidet. 
Eos partim scelerum, partim in&ptidrum paenitet. 

§ 135. IV. Miser eor, miser esco Genitlvum capiunt; miser or, 
commiseror, Accusativum : 

Arcadii, quaeso, raise rescite regis. 
Sovtem miseratur iniquam. 

§ 136. V. Genitivus a poetis libere usurpatur. Sed aegSr 
animi, dnimi pendeo, similia, etiam in soluta oratione corn- 
parent. 



DE CASIBUS EXTRA SENTENTIAM. 

§ 137. Vocativus extra sententiam stat vel sine Interjec- 
tione vel cum Interjectione : § 86. 

Oro te,fili (vel fill). 

§ 138. Nominativiis et Accusativus in exciamando usur- 
pantiir vel sine Interjectione vel cum Interjectione : 

(1) Infandum I Ecce nova tuvha ! 

(2) Me miserum ! En quattuov drdsf 

§ 139. Ita Dativus ponitur cum hei ! vae ! : 
Hei misevo mikif V a evict 'is! 



86 SYNTAXIS MEMORIALIS PRIMA. 

DE VERBO INFINITO. 

§ 140. I. Infinitivum stat — 

1. Substantive, pr5 Nommativo vel Accusatlvo : 

(1) Invidere non cadit in sapientem. 
Dulce et decorum est pro patria mori. 

(2) Mori nemo sapiens nriserum dixerit. 

2. Praedicative, in narrando, pro Verbo Finite : 

Mnlti seqm, fugere, occidi, capi. 

8. Oblique, cum Accusativo Subject!. § 94. 

4. Prolata constructione Yerbi vel Adjectivi : 

Solent diu c 5 git are qui magna Yolunt gerere. 

Patriae dicer is esse pater. 

Ludum insolentem luclere p e r 1 1 n a x . 

§ 141. II. Infimtivi Casus sunt G-erundia et Siipina. 

1. Accusativiis Gerund.il Praepositionibiis adjungitur : 

Ad bene vivendum breve tempiis satis est. 

2. Genitiviis Gerundii Substantivis et Adject! vis addltur : 

Ars scrlbendl discitur. Ciipidus audiendi est. 

3. Dat!viis Gerundii Nominibus et Verbis additiir : 

P a r est disserendo. D a t operam legendo. 

4. Ablativus Gerundii causae vel modi est aut Praepositioni 
junctus : 

Fugiendo vincimus. Be pugnando deliberant. 

5. Supinum in um Acciisativus est post Verba m5tus : 

Lusum it Maecenas, dormitum ego. 

a: Iri cum Siipino efficit Infinitivum Futuri Passivi : 
Audierat non datum iri filio uxor em siio. 

6. Supinum in u pro Ablativo Respectiis est : 

Foedum dictu est. Nefas visit est. 

§ 142. III. Infinitivum, cum Gerundio, Participils, et Siipino 
in um, eosdem casus regit ac Verbum Finitum : 

Cupio satis fa cere reipublicae. 
Ciipidus sum satis fa ciendi reipublicae. 
Ausi omnes immane nefds ausoque potiti. 
Ast ego non Grails servitum mdtribus ibo. 



DE VERBO INFINITO. 87 

§ 143. In Gerundils Transitivis usitatior est At tr actio 
Ge run diva; cujiis constructioms regiila est haecce : 

Trahitiir Objectum in Gerund!! casum, Gerundium in nii- 
tnerum et genus Object! : 

Brutus in liber anda f atria est interfectus. 
Hi septemviri fuerunt agris dividendis. 

§ 144. IV. 1. Necessitatem signiflcat Gerund! va constructio 
impersonalis, in Verb!s potissimum intransitlvis : 
Bibendum est. ttundum erit. 

a, Huic add! potest Dativiis, rarius Ablatlviis cum a, ah : 
Bibendum est nobis. Vobis eunduni erit. 

b. Et si quis alius casus a Verbo regitiir : 

Civibus est a vobis consiilendum. 

Su5 culque judicio est utendum. 

Eudoxus oplnatiir Chaldaeis minime esse credendum, 

2. Necessitatem sigmficat attribut!va constructio Gerun- 
dlvl, in Verbis transitivis : 

Deiis et diUgendus est nobis et timendus. 
Non tang end a rates transiliunt vada. 



DE PBONOMINIBUS. 

§ 145. Se, situs, Renexlva Pronomina, referuntur ad sen- 
ten tiae principalis Subjectum, modo tertiae personae sit: 
Sentit animus se vi sua mover!. 

a. Reflexlva ad Objectum referr! possunt, si ea relatio 
nihil habet ambigiil : 

Seipionem impellit ostentatio sui. 
Apibus fructum restitiio suum. 
Mors sua quern que manet. 



DE PAHTICULIS NONNULLIS. 

§ 146. Multae Conjunctiones similla similibus annectunt : 

Miratur portas strepitum^ et strata viarum. 
Virtus nee eripi nee surrip! potest. 
Neminem sapientiorem piito qitam Soeratem. 
Omne solum fort! patria est, ut piseibiis aequor. 



88 SYNTAXIS MEMORIALIS PBIMA. 

§ 147. Ne prohibitive, cum Imperativo Modo vel cum Con- 
junctivo usurpatur : nedwn, utinam, si, ilt pro utinam, 
cum Conjunctivo : 

Ne qua meis esto dictis mora. 
Ne culpam in me contuleris. 
Neu desint epiilis rosae. 

Mortalia facta peribunt, 
Nedwn sermonum stet honos et gratia vivax. 
t[tinam rniniis vitae cupidi fiiissemus. 
6 si urnam argent! fors quae mihi monstret. 
tft ilium di deaeque perdant. 



COMPENDIUM REGULARUM DE 
SUBJU3STCTIVO. 

§ 148. Modus Conjunctiviis varus sensibiis pure usur- 
patur : quum subjungitur alter! Verbo, Subjunctiviis appel- 
lator. 

§ 149. Pronomina et Particulae, quae oblique interrogant, 
Subjunctivum postulant: 

Ipse quis sit, Strum sit, an non sit, id quoque nescit. 

Talia sunt : 

Quantus, uter, qiudis, quis, quot, quotus, uncle, ubi, quando, 
Cur, quoties, quare, quam, quomodo, num, ne, ut, an, utrum. 

§ 150. Eelativum qui, cum Particulis siils, unde, iiM, 
ceteris, simplici sensu capit Indicatlvum : si contlnetiir in eo 
quum, quamvis, ut, vel talis ut, Subjunctivum : 

Miseret tin me, qui hunc facias inimicum tibi. 
Litteras mis! quibiis et flacarem eum et ononerem. 
Quis est qui non oderit protervam pueritiam? 
Digna res est ubi nervos intendas. 

§ 151. Eelativum vel Conjuncti5, si subordmatur oration! 
obllquae vel re vel potestate, Subjunctivum postulat : 

Ennius non censet lug en dam esse mortem, quam im- 

mortalitas consequatur. 
Socrates accusatiis est quod corrumperet juventutem. 

a. Conjunctivo saepe siibordinatur Subjunctiviis: 
Clamant omne s : praestaret quod recepisset. 



DE MODO SUBJUNCTIYO. 89 

§ 152. Conjunctioimm Modos regentium Classes sunt tres. 
I. Prima Classis est earuni, quarum proprms est Sub- 



junctivus : 

(1) Coxsectjtiva : 
Ut (so that) 



(2) Finales: 

Ut (in order that) 
Ne (lest, that . . . not) 
Quo (in order that) 
Quommus (but that) 
Q.uin {but that) 



(3) Causalis: 

Quum (since) 



(4) Coxdittoxales : 
Dum \ 

Modo \ (provided that) 

Dummodo > 

(5) Coxcessiyae : 
Licet \ 
Quamvis [ (although) 
Ut ) 

(6) COZJTPARATIVAE : 

Tanquam 

Velut, ceu [■ (as if) 

Quasi, &c. 



II. Altera Classis est earuni quarum proprms est Indica- 
tives, nisi subordmentiir orationi obliquae vel re vel po testate : 



(1) Catjsales: 

Quod, quia (because) 
Quoniam (since) 
Quandoquidem (since) 
Siquidem (inasmuch as) 

(2) Te^ipoeaees: 

Quando, quum, ubi (when) 
Ut (when, since) 
Quoties (as often as) 



Simul (as soon as) 
Post-quam (after that) 
Dum \ 

Donee I (whilst, as long as) 
Quoad J 

(3) Coxcessitae: 

Quamquam (although, how- 
ever) 
Utiit (however) 



III. Tertia Classis est earum, quas aut Indicatives sequitur 
aut Subjunctives, prout res aut vera aut cogitata proponitiir. 



(1) Temporales : 

Dum, donee, quoad (until) 
AntS-tfUffiil {he fore that) 



(2) Coxditioxales et Coxces- 
sitae : 

Si (if) 
Nisi (unless) 

Etsi, etiamsi, {although, 
even if) 



§ 153. Idiotismi sunt Latin! sermonis : 

(1) Quum (when) sequente Subjunctivo Imperfect! vel 

Pluperfectl : 

Zenonem, quum Athenis cssem, audiebam frequenter. 
Decessit Agesilaus quum in portum venisset. 



90 SYNTAXIS MEMOMALIS PRIMA. 

(2) Dum {whilst) sequente Indicativo Praesentis, etiam 
in obliqua subordination^ et de re praeterita : 

Quern ardorem stiidii censetis fuisse in ArchimedS, qui, 
dum in pulvere quaedam describtt attentms, ne patriam 
quidem eaptam esse senserit? 

§ 154. Conjunctio excidit aliquand5 : 

Philosophiae servias oportet (supple ut). 

Quaeram justum sit necne poema (supple utrum). 

Partem opere in tanto, sineret dolor, Icare, haberes (supple si). 

§ 155. De Consecutione Temporum ea est regula, iit Prl- 
maria Primariis subordinentur, Historica Historicis. 

Exempla ex Syntax! repetantiir. 



Eegulae Subsidtariae de Congruentia. 

§ 156. (1) Adjectiva pro Snbstantivls pommtur : 

Multa pauperl desunt, avaro omnia. 

(2) InfTnitiva pro SubstantivTs ponuntiir : 

Vivere est valere. 

(3) Clansiilae pr5 SubstantivTs ponuntur : 

Credibile est omraa consiMo fieri. 

§ 157. Impersonalis Yerbi Nominativiis non exstat, nisi si 
Infmitivum vel Clausula est : 

Piidet eum facti (i.e. fudor piidet). 
Quid agitiir? Statur (i.e. stdtio fit). 
Taedet eadein aud/lre millies. 
Magni interest ut te videam. 

§ 158. Vox intelligitiir omissa per Ellipsin : 

Nihil bonum nisi quod honestum (bis intellige est). 
Perfundor gelid a (intellige aqua). 

§ 159. Congruentia variatiir per Attraction em : 

Non omnis error stultitia est dicenda. 
Thebae, quod Boeotiae caput est. 

§ 160. Congruentia cum sensu fit per Synesin, praesertim 
apud poetas : 

Subeunt Tegeaea jiiventus . . . auxilio tardt. 
Ubi est is sceliis, qui me perdidit? 



91 



PEOSODIAE COMPENDIUM. 

§ 161. De Syllabarum Quantitate disserit, 
Et de Metrorum legibus, Prosodia. 



DE SYLLABAEUM QUANTITATE. 

Eegulae Quantitatis Generales. 

§ 162. 1. Omnis Diphthongus contractaque Syllaba longa est. 

2. Dant Derivatis proprium Primaria tempus. 

3. Praevia vocali vocalis corripietur. 

4. Vocalis fit longa situ, cui consona substat 

Altera post imam ; ut tristis : seu voce in eadem 
J subit, x, aut z ; sic Ajdx, axis, Amazon. 

a. Vocalis dubia est, quamvis brevis ipsa sua vi, 
Quam sequitur, liquid a subjuncta, consona muta : 
Sic recte lugubre melos vel lugubre dices. 

b. N post g longam dat semper : ut agnus et Ignis. 

Nee minus m post g; tegmen quod monstrat et cigraen. 

De Quantitate Syllabarum Finalium. 

§163. 1. Pleraque produces Monosyllabic, qualm me, ver. 

2. Producuntiir in A ; frustrd, contrdque, pdrdque. 
a. Accusativos et casus excipe Rectos : 

Carmina Musa canit ; resonant AmcirylUdd silvae. 

3. E brevis in fine est : sic lege, timete, car ere. 

4. Producuntiir in I : diet, plebique, dolique. 

5. Pr5ducuntiir in : virgo, mw toque, juvoque. 

6. Producuntiir in U: sic tu, dtctilque, dzuqae. 

7. Y brevis in fine est : sic dant chely, Tipliy, poetae. 

8. In C producuntiir, ut illlc (excipe donee). 

9. Corripe in L, D, T : sic Hannibal, illud, amdvit. 
10. N brevis in fine est : sunt testes Ilion, agmen. 



92 PROSODIAE COMPENDIUM. 

11. R brevis in fine est: ceu calcar, dmdbttur, Hector. 

12. Producuntiir in As: ut terras atque Menalcas. 

13. Producuntiir in Es, tit secies atque videres. 

14. Is brevis in fine est : ceu diceris, iitilis, ensis. 
a. Obliqui casus plurales excipiuntur, 

Ut terns, vobis ; etiam persona secunda 

In prirno lmmero Quartae Praesentis, ut audis: 

Composita a vis, sis : malls, noltsque, velzsqiie. 

15. Producuntiir in Os : ut ventos atque sacerdos. 

16. Us brevis in fine est : testes oliis, intus, amamus. 
a. Hinc Quartae casus contractus excipe, iit artus : 

Et quels erescentis longa est penultima casus, 
Ut tellies incilsque, juvenilis atque sencctus. 

17. Ys brevis in fine est: testes chelps, Otlirys, Erinijs, 
Obs. Mos regit Auctorum tempus, si regiila dent. 



DE METEORUM LEGIBUS. 

Definitiones. 

§ 164. Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus . . . v - 
Quod si longa brevi praecesserit, ille Trocheus . . - v 

Spondeus binis fertur consistere longis — 

Dactyltis efficitnr longa brevibusque dtiabus . . - ^ ^ 

De Scansions et Figuris Scansionis. 

§ 165. 1. Scansio, | quam vari|a con|cinnant | arte Fi|gurae, 
Distribu|it Ver|sum | pro ratijone Pe|dum. 

2. A. Vocalem elidet Synaloepha in limite vocis, 

Si Vocalis erit subnexae in limine vocis ; 

l PhyllkV aivi! \ ant'' ali\as. 
(pro Phyllkld, amo, ante.) 

3. B. Ecthlipsis Vocalem atque m de limite trudet, 

Si Vocalis erit subnexae in limine vocis ; 
1 cu\rds lwmirf \ quant 1 \ est in \ rebus in\dne. 
(pro hominum, quantum.) 

a. Extrema in diibiis censettir syllaba versus. 



DE VOCUM DIFFERENTIA. 93 



§ 1G6. Versus Memoriales de Vocum Differentia. 

I. In siluis deer est : equiis deer Olympia vincit. 
Voce canes; due eja canes, nisi tempera canes. 
Cldvd ferit : cldvus firmat ; cldvisque recludit. 
Ut placeas comiti, mores comes indtie comes. 
Comoedi scenam, comedones quaerite cenam. 
Consule doctor^ ; sic tu tibi consults ipsi. 
Bellandi cupido nociiit sua saepe cupido. 
Carmina dicuntur, Domino dum templa dicantur. 
Solvere diffidit, nodum qui cliff idit ense. 
Uxorm dilcit vir ; nubit sponsa marito. 
Educdt hie catulos, ut mox educdt in apros. 
Si tibi non est aes, es mops, et pinguia non es. 
Fallit saepe f return placido nimis aequore/n?^???. 
Sol nubes fiigdt, etfugit irreparabile tempus. 
Per quod quis peccat, per idem mox plectitiir idem. 
Difficilis labor est, cujus sub pondere labor. 
Frons piieri est levis, levis autem lingua piiellae. 
In cam pis lepores, in libris quaere lepores. 
Non licet asse mihl, qui me n5n asse licetur. 
Mdlo ego mala mea bona quam mala frangere maid, 
Merx venit, mercesque venit quaes! ta labore. 
Mulcet amans placidam, dum mulget, Silvia vaccam. 
Feceris officium, miserls si mlseris aera. 
Nitere, parve puer, ciipies quicumque niter e. 
Oblita quae fuco riibet, est oblltd decoii. 
Occidit ille dolo turpi, quern occidit amicus. 
Os (oris) mandatj sed os (ossis) manditur ore. 
Uxoris pdrere et pdrere, pdrare mariti est. 
Pdrentes piieri faciunt gaudere pdrentes. 
~Lu.de pild : pllum torque tur : pild columna est. 
Pro reti et regione pldga est ; pro verbere plaga. 
Sunt elves urbis populus ; sed populiis arbor. 
Prord prior, puppns pars postera, at ima carina. 
Spondet vas {yadis), at vds (vdsis) continet escam. 
Vas caput, at nummos tantum praes praestat amice. 
Si citiis ire veils, veils opus omnibus uti est. 



94 PROSODIAE COMPENDIUM. 

II. Fide, sed ante vide : qui fidit, nee bene vidit, 

Fallitur : ipse vide ne capiare fide. 
Consortes fortuna eadem, soews labor idem, 

Unum collegds efficit officium : 
At car5s faciunt schola, ludus, mensa, soddles ; 

Sulcus agri lira est : dat lijrd tacta modos. 
Ne sit securus, qui non est tutus ab hoste ; 

Ad flumen ripds, ad mare litus habes. 
Sunt aetate senes ; veteres vixere piiores : 

Quod n5n est simulo dissimuloque quod est. 
Anne novl quid habes ? Alium pete : nil ego nam. 

Quod minime refert garrulus ille refert. 
Si qua forte sedes, atque est tibi commoda sedes, 

Ilia sede sede ; nee mill! cede loco. 



(ENGLISH OF NOUNS, § 25—30.) 

[§ 25.] (1) Silver, gold, iron, plebeian-order, justice, spring, time, 
death, blood, childhood. (2) Ghosts, purse, household-gods, riches, cradle, 
trifles, thanks, arms, functions, huts, feast of Flora. 

[§ 26.] (5) Artificer, worker, guest, seer, new-comer, witness, citizen, 
inhabitant, parent, priest {or priestess), guardian, avenger, young man (or 
woman), infant, informer, judge, heir, companion, guide, chief, burgess^ 
husband (or wife), hostage, bird, interpreter, author, exile, ox (or cow), 
deer, mole, tiger, crane, dog, snake, serpent, swine. 

[§ 28.] Paunch, bear-constellation, canvas, distaff, ground, vine-leaf, 
winnowing -fan, pear-tree, sapphire, sea, poison, common-folk. 

[§ 29.] I. (1) Spade, order, pirate, hinge, margin. (2) Weevil, bat, poniard, 
staff, butterfly, ternion, sice. (3) Echo, flesh. (4) Tree, surface (or sea), 
marble (or sea), heart. (5) Whetstone, dowry. {6) Osier, maple, stripe, 
spring, truffle, teat (or fertility), carcase, pepper, journey, poppy. 
(7) Fetter, mat, reward, sheaf, rest, crop, copper. II. (1) Biver, axle, 
stalk, hill, hind-leg, hair, bundle, bellows, bludgeon, fire, circle (or world), 
sword, bread, fish, doorpost, month, brand, talon, canal, lever, worm, 
birthday, stone, blood, cucumber, dust, nets, ghosts, dormouse. (2) 
Path, thorn, rope, end, collar, cinder. (3) Adamant, elephant, male, 
giant, as, bail, vessel. (4) Shears, law, death, furniture, pumice, tile, bolt, 
basalt, sorrel. (5) Arch, phoenix, cup. (6) Fountain, mountain, iron, 
dropsy, griffin, bridge, cable, torrent, tooth, client, one-third-part, trident, 
west, east. (7) Boar-pig, scimetar. III. (1) Bran, turtle-dove, vulture, 
thief. (2) Slavery, youth, virtue, safety, old-age, land, anvil, marsh. 
(3) Beast. (4) Hare, mouse. (5) Mullet, consul, salt, sun, boxer. (6) Kid- 
ney, spleen, comb, dolphin, woodcock. (7) Gorgon, linen, kingfisher. 

[§ 30.] Tribe, needle, porch, house, daughter-in-law, mother-in-law, 
old-woman, Ides, hand. 



95 



FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

ON AGREEMENT. 

The Four General Eules. 

[§ 88.] I. A Verb Finite agrees with the Nominative of 
its Subject in Number and Person: 



Magister docet. 
The master teaches. 

Libri leguntur. 
Books are read. 



Tu. daces: nos discimus. 
Thou teachest: we learn. 

Discere est utile. 
To learn is useful. 



[§89.] II. An Adjective agrees in Gender, Number, and 
Case with that to which it is in attribution : 

Vir bonus ille bonam hanc uxorem habet. 
That good man has this good wife. 

Hirundo pullis silts orbdta queritur. 
The swallow bereft of its young complains. 

Cart sunt parentes; car a est patria. 
Dear are parents, dear is country. 

Piieri discendo fiunt docti. 
Boys by learning become learned. 

[§ 90.] III. A Substantive agrees in Case with that to 
which it is in apposition : 

Nos pueri pair em Lo Ilium imitabimur. 
We boys will imitate our father Lollius. 

Effodiuntiir opes, irritamenta malorum. 
Biches are dug out, incentives of evil. 

Spes est expectatio boui. 
Hope is the expectation of good. 

Syllaba longa brevi subjecta vocatur Iambus. 
A long syllable following a short is called Iambus. 



96 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

[§ 91.] IV. A Eelative agrees with its Antecedent in 
Gender, Number, and Person ; but in Case belongs to its 
own clause : 

Deum veneramur qui nos creavit. 
We worship God, who created us. 

Amicus est, quern amamus, a quo amamiir. 

A friend is one whom we love, by whom we are loved. 

Am5 te, mater, quae me am as. 
Hove you. mother, who love one. 

On the Composite Subject. 

[§ 92.] With a Composite Subject Plural words agree : 

Venen5 absumpti sunt Hannibal et Philopoemen. 
Hannibal and Philopoemen were cut off by poison. 

1. If the Persons differ, Verbs agree with the Prior 
Person : * 

Si tii et Tullia valetis, ego et Cicero valemus. 
If you and Tullia are well, land Cicero are well. 

2. When the Genders differ, Adjectives agree with the Mas- 
culine rather than with the Feminine : 

Pater mihi et mater mortui sunt. 
My father and mother are dead. 

a. If the things are lifeless, the Attributes are often 
Neuter : 

Divitiae, decus, gloria in oculis sitcc sunt. 
Miches, honour, glory, are placed before our eyes. 



ON CASES. 

On the Cases of Subject and Complement. 

[§ 93 C 1 ) The Subject of a Finite Verb is a Nomi- 
native : 

Anni fiigiunt. 
Years flee. 

(2) The Complement of a Finite Verb is generally a 
Nominative : 

Vita est somnium. Nemo nascitiir sapiens. 

Life is a dream. Nobody is born wise. 

[§ 94.] (1.) The Subject of an Infinitive is put in the Ac- 
cusative : 

Constat annos fug ere. Scimus annas fug ere. 

It is agreed that years flee. | We know that years flee. 

* The First Person is considered Prior to the Second, the Second to the Third. 



THE ACCUSATIVE. 97 

(2) The Complement of an Infinitive is generally put in 
lie Accusative : 

Aiunt vitaiiL esse somnium. 
They say that life is a dream. 

Constat neminem nasci sapientem. 
It is agreed that nobody is born wise. 

a. The Construction of Accusative with Infinitive is called 
Oblique (Indirect) Statement. 



ON THE ACCUSATIVE. 

[§ 95.] The Accusative is the Case of the Nearer Object, 
[t has also the power of limiting. 



I. The Accusative of the Object. 

[§ 96.] Transitive Verbs govern an Accusative of the 
Object : 

Mater alit guilds. 

The mother nourishes the young ones. 

In primis venerare JDeum. 
In the first place worship God. 

[§ 97.] Intransitive Verbs take an Accusative of kindred 
neaning : 

Duram servit sermtutem. | Claudius aleam lusit. 

He serves a hard slavery. Claudius played hazard. 

[§ 98.] Some Verbs, especially those of ashing and teach- 
ing, admit two Accusatives, one of the Thing, the other of 
he Person : 

Nunquam diwtms deos rogavi. 
Never asked I of the gods riches. 

Quid nnnc te litter as doc earn? . 
Why now should I teach you letters ? 

[§ 99.] Factitive Verbs, that is, of making, calling, ihinh- 
ng, and the like, have two Accusatives, one of the Object, 
he other of the Complement : 

Te facimus, Fortuna, deam. 
We make thee, Fortune, a goddess. 

Komulus urbem suain Romam vocavit, 
Romulus called his city Rome. J , 

F 



98 FIKST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

II. The Accusative of Limitation. 

[§ 100.] The Accusative of Respect is joined to Verbs 
and Adjectives, especially in poetry : 

T remit artus. Niidae sunt lacertos. 

He trembles in his limbs. They are bare as to the arms, 

[§ 101.] The Place, Whither one goes, is put in the Accu- 
sative ; and without a Preposition, if it is either the name of 
a town, or domus (home), rus (country) : 

Regulus Carthaginem rediit. 
Begulus returned to Carthage. 

Vos ite domum: ego rus Ibo. 

Go ye home: I will go into the country. 

[j§ 102.] (1) The Duration of Time is put in the Ac- 
cusative : 

Pericles quddragintd annos praefiiit Athenis. 
Pericles led Athens forty years. 

(2) The Measure of Space is put in the Accusative : 

Erant mini Babylonis ducenos pedes alti. 

The walls of Babylon were two hundred feet high. 

[§ 103.] Many Prepositions govern an Accusative Case 
(see the list, § 83). 



ON THE DATIVE. 

[§ 104.] The Dative is the Case of the Recipient or Re- 
moter Object. 

§ 105. Words which throw their action over to the Re- 
moter Obj ect are called T r a j e e t i v e, and include many Adj ec- 
tives, Adverbs, and Verbs, more rarely Substantives, by which 
is implied (1) Nearness or (2) Demonstration, (3) Gratifi- 
cation or (4) Dominion ; and any notion contrary to these. 

§ 106. I. Trajective Words take a Dative when the mean- 
ings implied are 

(1) Nearness and its contraries : 
Est finitimiis ordtori poet a. 
A poet is near akin to an orator. 

Nil fiiit imqiiam sic impar sibi. 
r Nothing was ever so unequal to itself. 

Congruenter naturae vivendum est, 
We should live agreeably to nature. 



THE DATIVE. 99 

Praesentia confer praeteritis. 
Compare present things with past. 

Nee tamen ignorat quid distent aera lupinis. 

And yet he is not ignorant how coins differ from lupins. 

(2) Demonstration and its contraries : 
Die mihi, Damoeta, cujum peciis? 
Tell me, Damoetas, whose flock (is this) ? 

Anguis Sullae apparu.it immolanti. 

A snalce appeared to Sulla while sacrificing. 

Haud cidqueim in diibio erat bellum imnimere. 

It was not doubtful to any one that war was imminent. 

(3) Gratification and its contraries : 

Patriae sit ldoneiis, utilis agris. 

Let him be serviceable to his country, usefid to the lands. 

Turba gravis pact placidaeque in i mica quietl. 

A crowd oppressive to peace and unfriendly to calm rest. 

Quod alii don at sibi detrahit. 

What he gives to another, he withdraws from himself. 

Lucem redde tuae, dux bone, patriae. 
Bestore light to thy country, good chief 

Nobis spondet fortuna salutem. 
Fortune guarantees safety to us. 

Ne lib eat iibi quod nemini licet. 

Let not (that) please thee which is lawful to no man. 

P a r c e pio generi. 
Spare a pious race. 

Succensere nefas patriae. 

It is impious to be wroth with one's country. 

Eesistendum est appetitibiis. 
We should resist our passions. 

(4) Dominion and its contraries : 
Sapiens, sibi qui imperiosus. 
The wise man (is he) who (is) lord over himself. 

Omnibus supplex est. 
He is suppliant to all. 

Imperat aut servit collecta pecunia, cuiqiie. 
Amassed money sways or serves every man. 

Mundus Leo paret, et hide obediunt niaria terraeque. 
The universe obeys God, and seas and lands hearken to Him. 

a. Among Trajective words are many Verbs compounded 
with Particles, sucn as bene (icell) ) male (ill), satis {enough). 

f2 



100 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

re, ad, ante, con, in, inter, de, 6b, sub, super, post, and j 
prae: 

Ceteris satis fa cio semper, miki nunquam. 
I satisfy others always, myself never. 

Sicilia quondam Italiae adhaesit. 
Sicily once was attached to Italy. 

Gigantes belliim dis i n t ii 1 e r u n t. 
The giants waged war on the gods. 

Anatum ova gallinis supponimiis. 
We place eggs of ducks tender hens. 

§ 107. II. A Dative of the Recipient can be added any- 
where with a certain notion of Advantage or Disadvantage. 
Esto, ut nunc multi, dives tibi, pauper amicis. 
Be, as many are now, rich for thyself, 'poor for friends. 

Niima virgines Testae legit. 
Numa chose virgins for Vesta. 

Venus n up sit Vulcano. 

Venus wedded Vulcan (lit. veiled herself for Vulcan). 

Philosophiae semper vaco. 

/ always am at leisure for philosophy. 

a. Eefer here the Dative of the Pronoun, which is called 
the Ethic Dative : 

Quid mihi Celsus agit ? 
What .(is) my Celsus doing? 

b. Sum with its compounds, except possum, takes a Dative : 

Sum tibi Mercurius. 
I am to thee Mercury. 

Vir mihi semper abest. 

My husband is always absent from me. 

c* Est, sunt, with a Dative, often imply having : 

Est homini cum Deo similitudo. 
Man has a resemblance to God. 

Sunt nobis mitia poma. 
We have mellow apples. 

d. The same Dative is joined to Participles and Participials 
of the Passive Voice, especially to Gerundives : 

Magnus civis obit et formidatiis dthom. 

A great citizen is dead,, and one dreaded by Otho. 

Multis ille bonis flebilis occidit. 

He died a cause of weeping to many good men. 

Legendae sunt pueris Aesopi fabulae. 
The fables of Msop are to be read by boys. 



THE ABLATIVE. 101 

§ 108. III. A Dative of the Thing is used as a Comple- 
ment, a Dative of the Recipient being often added : 

Nimia fiducia calamitdti solet esse. 

Too much confidence is wont to be a calamity. 

Exitio est avidiim mare nautis. 

The greedy sea is a destruction to sailors. 

§ 109. IV. A Dative of the Complement is used by At- 
traction, especially in expressions of naming : 

Licuit Themistocli esse otwso. 

It was lawful for Themistocles to be at leisure. 

Huic ego cliei nomen Trinumo faciani. 

To this day I will give the name Trinumus. \ 



ON THE ABLATIVE. 

[§ 110.] The Ablative is the Case of circumstances which 
attend action, and limit it adverbially. It defines also Time 
and Place. 

[§ 111.] I. Ablative of Cause : 

Odernnt peccare boni virtutis amore. 
The good hate to sin from love of virtue, 

Coeptis irnmanibus effera Dido. 
Dido wild with horrid purposes. 

[§ 112.] II. Ablative of the Instrument: 

Hi jacillis, ill! certant defender e saxis. 

These strive to defend with javelins, those with stones. 

[§ 113.] III. Ablative of Manner: 

Injuria fit diiobus modis, ant vi ant frauds. 

Wrong is done in two manners, either by force or by fraud. 

[§114.] IV. Ablative of Condition : 

Pace tied enm Thaide colloquar. 

With your leave I will converse with T/iais. 

Homo mea sententid prndentissimiis est. 
He is a man in my opinion very prudent. 

[§ 115.] Y. Ablative of Quality, with Epithet : 

Qua facie fu.it, cni dedisti symbolnm ? 

Of what aspect was he to whom you gave the ticket? 

Senex promissa barbd, horrenfi capUlo. 

An old man with long beard and rough hair. 



102 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

[§ 116.] VI. Ablative of Eespect : 

Angor animo. 

I am distressed in mind. 

Enniiis ingenio maximus, arte rudis. 
Ennius, mighty in genius, in art (is) rude. 

[§ 117.] VII. Ablative of Price: 

Ego spem pretw non emo. 
/ buy not hope at a cost. 

Quod non opus est, asse earum est. 
What is not needful is dear at a penny. 

[§ 118.] VIII. Ablative of Measure: 

Longum sesqinpede, latum pede est. 
It is a foot and a half long, a foot wide. 

Sol multis partibus major est quam luna. 
The sun is many times larger than the moon. 

Tanto pessimus omnium poeta, 
Quanto tu optimiis omnium patroniis. 

By so much the worst poet of all, 
As you (are) the best patron of all. 

[§ 119.] IX. Ablative of Matter: 

Cibiis eorum lacte, cased, came constat. 
Their food consists of milk, cheese, and flesh. 

{a) These words govern an Ablative: (1) The Verbs fungor 
(perform\ friior {enjoy), utor (use), vescor (eat), potior (get 
possession of), dignor (deem worthy). (2) The Adjectives 
digniis (ivorthy), indigniis (unworthy), contentiis (content), 
fretiis (relying), praeditiis (endued). (3) The Substantives 
opiis (need), tisus (use) : 

(1) Fungar vice cotis. 

/ will perform the function of a whetstone. 

Hannibal, cum victoria posset uti, friii malu.it. 
Hannibal, when he might have used his victory, preferred to 
enjoy it. 

Eex impiiis auro vi potitur. § 133. 

The impious king gets possession of the gold by force. 

(2) Dignum laude virum Musa vetat mori. 

A man worthy of praise the Muse forbids to die. 

(3) "Obi res adsunt, quid opiis est verbis ? 

When things are present, what need is there of words ? 

Usiis est filio viginti minis. 
My son needs twenty minas. 



THE ABLATIVE. 103 

1. Most Adjectives and Verbs of abounding or wanting, en- 
riching or depriving, take an Ablative ; many also a Genitive : 

Amor et melle et felle est fecundissimus. 
Love is very fruitful both in honey and gall. 

Nunquam animus motii vacuus est. 
The mind is never void of motion. 

Vis consili expers mole ruit sua. 

Force devoid of counsel falls by its own weight. 

Mancipiis lociiples eget aeris Cappadocum rex. 
The king of the Cappadocians, rich in slaves, lacks coin. 

Vac are culpa maximum est solatium. 

To be free from blame is a very great comfort. 

§ [120.] X. The Ablative of Time answers the questions : 
When ? Within what time ? How long before or after ? 

Hieme omnia bella conquiescunt. 
In winter all wars rest. 

Quidquid est bidilo sciemus. 

Whatever there is we shall know in two days. 

HSmerus annis midtis fiiit ante KomuLum. 
Homer was many years before Romidus. 

§ [121.] XI. A. The Ablative of Place is put without a 
Preposition, when the question is, By ivhat road ? 

lb am forte Via Sacra. 

I was going by chance on the Sacred Road. 

B. The Ablative is often without a Preposition when the 
question is, Wliere ? especially if it is the name of a town, 
or if it stands with an Epithet. 

Philippiis NeclpoU est, Lentuliis Tuteolts. 
Philippus is at Naples, Lentulus at Puteoli. 

Tabernae tot a urbe clauduntiir. 

The shops are closed in the whole city. 

a. Singular names of towns of the first and second Declen- 
sion define the place of station by cases in ae, i : 

Quid Romae faciam ? Is habitat Mileti. 

What can I do at Rome ? j He dwells at Miletus. 

b. Like these are humi (on the ground), doml (at home), 
belli, militiae (at the wars), run (in the country) : 

Caesaris virtus domi oniUtiaeque cognita est. 
Caesar's virtue was known at home and at the wars. 



104 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

C. The Ablative of a town is without a Preposition, when 
the question is, Whence ? 

Demaratiis fugit Corintho. 
Demaratus fled from Corinth. 

a. So domo (from home), rure (from the country). 

On the Accusative of Place Whither, see § 101. 

§ [122.] XII. Various Prepositions govern an Ablative. 
(See the list, § 83). 

a. Prepositions, even when compounded, govern an Abla- 
tive, especially ab, de, ex : 

Qninctms dictdturd se abdicavit. . 
Quinctius resigned the dictatorship. 

Detrudunt naves scopulo. 

They thrust off the ships from the rock. 

b. The Ablative of the Agent takes the Preposition a, ab : 

Laudatur ab his, culpatur ab Hits. 

He is praised by these, he is blamed by those. 

[§ 123.] XIII. The Ablative of Separation and Origin is 
joined also without a Preposition to Verbs and Participles : 

Cedes coemptis saltzbus et domo. 

You will retire from purchased glades and mansion. 

Pelope n at iis, Tantdlo prognatiis est. 

He was born of Pelops, descended from Tantalus. 

[§ 124.] XIV. Ablative of the Thing Compared : 

(1) For quam (than) with Nominative : 
Nihil est amabiliiis virtute. 

Nothing is more amiable than virtue. 

Viliiis argentum est auro, virtutibus aurum. 
Silver is less valuable than gold, gold than virtues. 

(2) For quam with Accusative : 

Puto mortem dedecore leviorem. 
/ think death easier than disgrace. 

Nemin em Lycurgo fitiliorem Sparta geniiit. 

Sparta produced no man more serviceable than Lycurgus. 

[§ 125.] XV. A Substantive combines with a Participle 
in the Ablative which is called Absolute : 

Begibus exactis consules creati sunt. 

Kings having been driven out, consuls were elected. 



THE GENITIVE. 105 

a. For the Participle is often supplied another Substan- 
tive, or an Adjective : 

Nil desperandum T e u c r o duce et auspice T e u c r 6. 
There must be no despair with Teiccer for leader, and Teucer 
for omen-giver. 

Natiis est Augustus consulibus Cicerone et Antonio. 
Augustus was bom when Cicero and Antonius were consuls. 

Jamque cims, vims fratribiis, Hector erat. 
And now Hector was ashes, his brothers being alive. 

Quid dicam, hac juventute? 

What can I say, when our young men arc of this stamp? 



ON THE GENITIVE. 

[§ 126.] The Genitive, the Case of the Proprietor, gene- 
rally defines Nouns, either subjectively or objectively. 

A. The Subjective Genitive. 

§ 127.] I. Genitive of the Author and Possessor : 

Polycleti sign a plane perfecta sunt. 
Polycletus' s statues are quite perfect. 

Singulorum opes sunt divitiae civitatis. 

The resources of individuals are the riches of the state. 

Omnia, quae mulieris filer unt, viri f lunt. 

All things, which were the woman's, become the husband's. 

Ea statua dicebatiir esse Myronis. 
That statue was said to be Myro's. 

a. Sometimes the Genitive depends on a word omitted. 

Hectoris Andromache (supple u xor). 
Hector's Andromache (supply wife). 

Ventum erat ad Vestae (supple templum). 
We had come to Vesta's (supply temple). 

h. A Genitive so stands that nature, tol en, function, or duty, 
can be supplied. 

Cujusvis hominis est errare. 
It is in any man's nature to err. 

Est adolescentis majores natu vereri. 

The young man's duty is to reverence elders. 

Tempori cedere habetiir sapientis. 
To yield to occasion is held a wise man's function. 
f3 



106 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

[§ 128.] II. Genitive of Quality, with Epithet. 

Ingenui vultus p u e r ingeniiique pudoris. 

A boy of high-bred countenance and high-bred modesty. 

Claudius erat somni brevissimi. 

Claudius vjcls (a man) of' very brief slumber. 

a. The Elliptic Genitives may be remarked : parvi {of 
small worth), minoris (of less value), minimi (of very little 
icorth), magni (of great price), pluris (of more value), plurimi, 
(of high value), tanti (of so great price), quanti (of what 
price), maximi (of very great price), to which supply pretii: 

Voluptatem virtus minimi facit. 

Virtue makes pleasure of very small account. 

Emit hort5s tanti quanti Pythius voliiit. 

He bought the pleasure-ground at such price as Pythius wanted. 

[§ 12 9. J III. Interest (it imports), refert (it concerns), 
admit a Genitive : 

Interest omnium recte faeere. 
It imports all men to act rightly. 

Refert composifionis quae quibiis anteponas. 

It concerns arrangement what things you place before what. 

a. The same Verbs instead of the Genitives of Pronouns 
use the Possessive Cases, mea, tua, sua, nostra, vestra, cuja, 
agreeing with re : 

Et tua et mea interest te valere. 

It imports both your weed and mine, that you be well. 

Quid nostra id refert? 
What (does) that concern lis ? 

[§ 130.] IV. A Genitive of the Thing Distributed is joined 
to Partitive words, which, as far as may be, take the Gender 
of the Genitive : 

Elephanto beluarum est nulla prudentior. 

Of beasts, none is more sagacious than the elephant. 

Homini uni animaniium luctus est datiis. 

To man alone of animals sorrow has been given. 

Sulla centum yiginti suorum amisit. 
Sidla lost a hundred and twenty of his men. 

Major Neronum mox grave praelium commisit. 
The elder of the Neros ere long fought a severe battle. 

Gallorum fortissimi sunt Eelgae. 
The Belgce are bravest of the Gaids. 



THE GENITIVE. 107 

Nemo mortalium omnibus horis sapit. 

Of mortals nobody is wise at all hours. 
Piscium feminae maj ores sunt quam mares. 

Of fishes the females {are) larger than the males. 

Sequimur te, sancte deorum. 
We follow thee, holy one of gods. 

Hoc ad te minime omnium pertinet. 
This belongs to thee least of all men. 

a. Nostrum (of us), vestriun (of you), follow Partitives : 

Te venire iiterque nostrum cupit. 
Each of us desires that you come. 

[§ 131.] V. A Genitive of the Thing Measured follows 
Words of Quantity and Neuter Adjectives : 
Satis eldquentiae, scipientiae parum est. 
He has enough eloquence, too little wisdom. 

All quid pristini roboris conservat. 
He keeps something of his old strength. 

Quantum numorum, tan turn fidei est. 
There is the same amount of credit as of money. 



B. The Objective Genitive. 

[§ 132.] I. A Genitive is joined objectively to Substan- 
tives, Adjectives, or Participles, which have a certain tran- 
sitive force, especially if they signify skill, care, desire, or 
whatever is contrary to these. 

Insitiis est menti cognitioms amor. 

Love of knowledge is implanted in the mind. 

Difficilis est cur a rerum aliendrum. 
Hard is the care of other people's affairs. 

Tempus edax rerum est. 
Time is consumer of things. 

Corpus patiens mediae fuit. 

His body was capable of enduring inanition. 

Conscia mens recti est. 

The mind is conscious of rectitude. 

Imperitus morum fuit . 
He teas unskilled in manners. 

Avida est periculi virtus. 
Valour is greedy of danger. 

Animus fuit alienl appetens, sui profusus. 

His mind was desirous of another's (wealth), lavish of his own. 



108 FTEST MEMOEIAL SYNTAX. 

a. Mel, tiii, siii, nostri, vestri, are put objectively ; meus, 
tiius, suiis, noster, vester, subjectively: 
Nicias tua sui memoria delectatiir. 
Nicias is charmed with your recollection of him. 

(a) A Subjective Genitive understood in a Possessive Pro- 
noun admits a Genitive agreeing with it : 

Respublica mea unius opera salva erat. 
The state was saved by my single exertion. 

Aves fetus adultos suae ipsorum f Iduciae permittunt. 
Birds entrust grown nestlings to their own self-reliance. 

[§ 133.] II. A Genitive is joined to Verbs and Adjectives 
which signify power and impotence, inculpation, innocence, 
condemnation, acquittal, memory and forgetfulness : 

(1) Roman! signorum potiti sunt. § 119 a. 
The Bomans gained the standards. 

Ira est imp o tens sm. 

Anger is incapable of self-restraint. 

(2) Fraterni est sanguinis in sons. 
He is innocent of a brother's blood. 

Reus est injuriarum. 

He is arraigned of injurious acts. 

(3) Petillius furti absolutiis est. 
Petillius was acquitted of theft. 

Condemnamiis haruspices stultitiae. 

We condemn soothsayers (as guilty) of folly. 

(4) Res adversae admonent nos reUgwnum. 
Adversity reminds us of religious duties. 

Omnes immemorem beneficii oderunt. 
Ml men hate one unmindful of a kindness, 

a. Memini, reminiscor, recordor, (/ remember), obliviscor (I 
forget), admit Genitive or Accusative : 

Jubet mortis te meminisse Deus. 
God bids thee remember death. 

Dulces moriens reminiscitiir Argos. 
Dying he remembers sweet Argos. 

[§ 134.] III. Piget (it irks), piidet (it shames), paenitet 
(it repents), taedet (it disgusts), and miseret (it moves pity), 
Impersonal Verbs, take a Genitive with an Accusative : 

Miseret te aliorum: tui nee miseret nee piidet. 
Thou pitiest others, for thyself without pity or shame. 

Eos partim scelerum, partim ineptidrum paenitet. 
They repent, some of their crimes, others of their follies. 



THE VERB INFINITE. 109 

[§ 135.] IV. Misereor, miseresco (I pity), take a Genitive; 
miseror, commiseror (/ compassionate), an Accusative : 

Arcadu, quaeso, miser escite regis. 
Pity, I pray, the Arcadian king. 

Sortem miseratur iniquam. 
He compassionates the unjust fate, 

[§ 136.] VI. The Genitive (is) freely used by poets. But 
aeger animl {sick at heart), animi pendeo (/ waver in mind), 
and the like, appear even in prose. 



On Cases out of the Sentence. 

[§ 137.] The Vocative stands out of the Sentence either 
without an Interjection or with an Interjection : 

Orote, fili(Yel fffi). 
I pray thee, son (or, son). 

[§ 138.] The Nominative and the Accusative are used in 
Exclamations either without an Interjection or with an In- 
terjection : 



(1) Infandum! 
Unutterable ! 

(2) Me rniserum ! 
Wretched me ! 



Ecce nova turba! 
Lo, a new disturbance I 

E n quattuor arcis ! 
Lo, four altars ! 



[§ 139.] So the Dative is put with hei (alas!), vae (ivoe!) , 
Hei miserd mihi f Vae victisf 



Alas wretched me ! Woe to the vanquished .' 



ON THE VERB INFINITE. 

[§ 140.] I. The Infinitive stands— 

1. Substantively, for Nominative or Accusative: 

(1) Invidere non cadit in sapientem. 
Envying happens not to a wise man. 

Dulce et decorum est pro patrfa morl. 
Dying for country is sweet and comely. 

(2) Mori nemo sapiens rniserum dixerit. 
No wise man will call it miserable to die. 



110 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 

2. Predicativelyyin narration, for a Finite Verb : 

Multi sequi, fiigere, occidi, capi. 

Many were following, flying, being slain, being captured. 

3. Obliquely, with Accusative of the Subject. See § 94. 

4. Carrying on the construction of a Verb or Adjective : 

Solent dm cogitdre qui magna Yolunt gerere. 

They are wont to reflect long who wish to perform great things. 

Patriae dicer is esse pater. 

Thou art said to be father of thy country. 

Ludum insolentem liidere pertinax. 
Persisting to play an insolent game. 

[§ 141.] II. Gerunds and Supines are the Cases of the In- 
finitive. 

1. The Accusative of the G-erund is joined to Prepositions : 

Ad bene vivendum breve tempiis satis est. 
For living well a short time is sufficient, 

2. The Genitive of the Gerund is joined to Substantives and 
Adjectives : 

Ars scribendi discitur. Ciipidiis audiendi est. 

The art of writing is learnt. | He is desirous of hearing. 

3. The Dative of the Gerund is joined to Nouns and Verbs : 
Par est disserendo. Dat operam legendo. 

He is competent for arguing. | He pays attention to reading. 

4. The Ablative of the Gerund is of cause or manner, or 
joined to a Preposition : 

Fiigiendo vincimns. De pugnando deliberant. 

We conquer by flying. They deliberate about fighting. 

5. The Supine in um is an Accusative after Verbs of mo- 
tion : 

Lusum it Maecenas, dormitum ego. 
Mmcenas goes to play, I to sleep. 

a. Iii with the Supine forms the Infinitive of the Future 
Passive : 

- Audierat non datum iri filio uxor em sno. 
He had heard {that there zvas) no intention (non Iri) to give 
a wife to his son. 

6. The Supine in u is for an Ablative of Eespect: 

Poednm dictu est. Nefas vzsu est. 

It is horrible to state. It is impious to view. 



THE VERB INFINITE. Ill 

[§ 142.] III. The Infinitive, with Gerund, Participles, and 
Supine in nm, governs the same Cases as the Verb Finite : 

Cupio satisfacere reipublicae. 
I desire to satisfy the commonwealth. 

Cupidus sum satis fa ciendi reipublicae. 
1 am desirous of satisfying the commonwealth. 

A u si omnes immane nefds ausoqiie potiti. 

All dared monstrous impiety, and achieved their daring. 

Ast ego non Grails servitum matribus Ibo. 
But I will not go to be a slave to Greek matrons. 

[§ 143.] In Transitive Gerunds the Gerundive Attrac- 
tion is more usual; the rule for which construction is the 
following : 

The Object is attracted to the Case of the Gerund, the 
Gerund to the Number and Gender of the Object : 

Brutus in liberandd pdtrid est interfectus. 
Brutus was slain in freeing his country. 

Hi septemTiri fuerunt dgris dlvidendis. 

These were the seven commissioners for dividing lands. 

[§ 144.] IV. 1. The Impersonal Gerundive construction 
implies necessity, principally in Intransitive Verbs : 

Bibendum est. Eundum erit. 

One must drink. One will (have) to go. 

a. To this may be joined a Dative, more rarely an Ab- 
lative with a, ab : 

Bibendum est nobis. Vobis eundum erit. 

We must drink. Yoic will (have) to go. 

b. And whatever other Case is governed by the Verb : 

Cimbus est a, yobis consiilendum. 
You must consult for the citizens. 

Siio cuique jiidicio est utendum. 
Each must use his own judgment. 

Eudoxus opinatur Chaldaeis minime esse credendum. 
Eudoxus thinks that astrologers should by no means be believed. 

2. The Attributive construction of the Gerundive implies 
necessity, in Transitive Verbs : 

Deiis et diligendus est nobis et timendus. 
God is both to be loved and feared by us. 

Non tangenda rates transiliunt vada. 

Barks o'erleap the shallows (which should) not be meddled with. 



112 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 



ON THE PRONOUN. 

[§ 145.] Se, suiis, Reflexive Pronouns, are referred to the 
Subject of the principal Sentence, provided it be of the third 
Person : 

Sentit animus se vi sua mover!. 

The mind feels (that) it is moved by its own force. 

a. Reflexives can be referred to the Object, if that reference 
involves no ambiguity : 

Scipionem impellit osfcentatio sin. 
Ostentation of self sivays Scipio. 

A p lb iis fructum restifriio suum. 
I restore to the bees their produce. 

Mors sua quemque manet. 
His death awaits every man. 



ON SOME PARTICLES. 

[§ 146.] Many Conjunctions annex like words to like : 

Miratur portas strepitumgw^ et strata viarum. 

He marvels at the gates and the noise and the pavements of the 

streets. 
Virtus nee eripi nee surripi potest. 
Virtue can neither be torn away nor stolen. 

Neminem sapientiorem piito quam So era tern. 
/ deem no man wiser than Socrates. 

Omne solum forti patria est, ut piscibiis aequor. 
Every soil is a country to the brave man, as the sea to fishes. 

[§ 147.] Ne prohibitive is used with an Imperative or 
Conjunctive Mood : nedum {not to say, much less), utinam 
(0 that), O si, ut for utinam, with a Conjunctive : 

Ne qua meis esto dictis mora. 
Let there be no delay to my orders. 

Ne culpam in me contiileris. 
Lay not the fault on me. 

Neu desint epulis rosae. 

And (let) roses not be wanting to the feast. 



RULES ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 113 

Mortalia facta peribunt, 
Nedum sermonum stet honos et gratia vivax. 
Mortal deeds will perish, much less (can) the honour and popu- 
larity of literary works stand permanent. 

tltinam minus vitae cupidi fiiissemus. 
Would that we had been less fond of life. 

si urnam argent! fors quae mihi monstret! 

if some chance would show me a pot of silver! 

tit ilium di deaeque perdant. 

1 wish that the gods and goddesses may destroy him. 



OUTLINE OF RULES ON THE SUBJUNCTIVE. 

[§ 148.] The Conjunctive Mood is used, purely, in various 
senses : but, if it is subjoined to another Verb, it is called 
Subjunctive. 

[§ 149.] Pronouns and Particles, which interrogate ob- 
liquely, require a Subjunctive : 

Ipse quis sit, utrum sit, an non sit, id quoque nescit. 

He knows not even this, who himself is, whether he is, or is not. 

Such Interrogatives are : 



Quantus (how great) 

Uter (which of two) 

Qualis (of what sort) 

Quis (vjho or what) 

Quot (how many) 

Quotas (which, in order of number) 

Unde (whence) 

Ubi (where or when) 

Quando (.when) 



Cur (why) 
Quoties (how often) 
Quare (vjherefore) 
Quam (how) 
Qu5rn6do (how) 
Num, ne (whether) 
Ut (how) 
An, utrum (whether). 



[§ 150.] The Relative qui, with its Particles, ubi {where, 
when, &c), unde (whence), and the rest, in i£s simple sense, 
takes an Indicative ; if there is implied in it since, although, 
in order that, or such that, a Subjunctive : 

Miseret tiii me, qui hunc facias mimicum tibi. 
/ pity you, since you make this man your foe. 

Litteras misi quibiis et placdrem eum et monerem. 

I sent a letter wherewith I might pacify and admonish him. 

Quis est qui non oderit protervam pueritiam? 
Who is there that hates not saucy boyhood? 

Digna res est ubi nervos intend as. 

The matter is worthy (that) you devote your energies to it. 



114 



FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 



[§ 151.] A Eelative or Conjunction, if it is subordinate to 
Oration actually or virtually oblique, requires a Subjunctive. 

Ennius non censet lug en dam esse mortem, quam im- 

mortalitas consequdtur. 
Ennius considers that death {ought) not to be mourned, which 

immortality succeeds. 

Socrates accusatus est quod corrumperet juventutem. 
Socrates was accused (on the charge) that he corrupted youth. 

a. To a Conjunctive Mood a Subjunctive is often sub- 
ordinated. 

Clamant omnes : praestaret quod recepisset. 

All cry out, he should perform what he had undertaken. 

[§ 152.] Of Conjunctions governing* Moods there are three 

Classes : 

I. The First Class consists of those Conjunctions, to which 
the Subjunctive is appropriate : 



(4) Conditional: 
Dum | 

Modo I (provided that) 

Dummodo J 

(5) Concessive: 
Licet \ 
QuamvTs I (although) 

L tJt j 

(6) Comparative: 
Tanquam ] 
Yeliit, ceu I (as if) 
Quasi, &e. j 

II. The Second Class consists of those Conjunctions, to 
which the Indicative is appropriate, unless they are sub- 
ordinate to oration actually or virtually oblique. 
(1) Causal: 

Quod, quia (because) 



(1) Consecutive: 
Ut (so that) 



(2) Final: 

Ut (in order that) 
Ne (lest, that . . . not) 
Quo (in order that) 
Quominiis (but that) 
Quin (but that) 



(3) Causal: 
Quum (since) 



Quoniam (since) 
Quandoquidem (since) 
Siquidem (inasmuch as) 

(2) Temporal: 

Quando, quum, ubi (when) 
Ut (when, since) 
Quoties (as often as) 



Simul (as soon as) 
Post-quam (after that) 
Dum \ 
Donee Y (whilst, as long as) 
Quoad J 



(3) Concessive: 

Quamquam (although, how- 
ever) 

Utiit (however) 

* When we speak of Moods being governed by Conjunctions, we mean only that 
certain Conjunctions are used, always or in certain senses, with certain Moods. The 



LATIN IDIOMS. 115 

III. The Third Class consists of those Conjunctions which 
sither the Indicative or the Subjunctive follows, according as 
:he matter put forth is real or imagined. 

(1) Temporal: 



Dum, donee, quoad (until) 
AntS-qaam \ {before that) 

Prius-quam J v J J 



(2) Conditional and Conces- 
sive: 

si (if) 

Nisi (unless) 

Etsi, etiamsi (although, 
even if) 



a. [§ 153.] Idioms of the Latin language are: 

(1) Quum (when) followed by a Subjunctive of the Im- 
perfect or Pluperfect. 

Zenonem, quum Athenis essem, audiebam frequenter. 
I of ten used to hear Zeno, when I was at Athens. 

Decessit Agesilaus quum in portum venisset. 
Agesilaus died, when he had come into harbour. 

(2) Dum (whilst), followed by an Indicative Present, even 
in oblique subordination, and concerning a past circumstance : 

Quern ardor em studii censetis fuisse in Archimede, qui, 
dum in pulvere quaedam descrlbit attentius, ne pafriam 
quidem cap tarn esse senserit? 

What ardour of study think ye there was in Archimedes, who, 
whilst drawing some figures in the dust with peculiar at- 
tention, did not perceive even that his country was 
captured ? 

b. [§ 154.] A Conjunction is sometimes understood. 

PhHosophiae servias oportet. 

It behoves (that you) be a servant to philosophy (supply ut). 

Quaeram justum sit necne poema. 

/ will inquire (whether) it be a true poem or not (supply 
utrum). 

Partem opere in tanto, sin ere t dolor, Icare, haberes. 
Thou, Icarus, wouldst have a share in this great work, did 
grief allow (supply si). 

c. [§ 155.] The Rule for the Consecution of Tenses is, 
that Primary Tenses are subordinated to Primary, Historic 
to Historic. (§ 48). 

Examples may be looked out from the Syntax. 



reason of Mood is independent of Conjunctions ; but Conjunctions distinguish the 
relations of Clauses more fully, as Prepositions distinguish the relations of Nouns. 



116 FIRST MEMORIAL SYNTAX. 



Supplementary Eules of Agreement. 

[§ 156.] (1) Adjectives are put for Substantives : 

Multa pauperi desunt, clvdro omnia. 

Many things are wanting to the poor man, to the miser all things. 

(2) Infinitives are put for Substantives : 

Vivere est valere. 
To live is to be well. 

(3) Clauses are put for Substantives : 

Credibile est omnia consiUo fieri. 

It is probable that all things happen by design. 

[§ 157.] The Nominative of an Impersonal Verb is not 
apparent unless it be an Infinitive or a Clause : 

Pudet eum fact! (i. e. pudor pudet). 
He is ashamed of the act. 

Quid agitiir ? Statur (i. e. statio fit). 
What is being done ? There is a standstill. 

T a e d e t eadem audire millies . 

To hear the same things a thousand times is tedious. 

Magni interest utte videam. 

It is of great importance that I should see you. 

[§ 158.] A Word is understood when omitted by the 
figure Ellipsis : 

Nihil bonum nisi quod honestum (understand est twice). 
Nothing is good but ivhat is morally right. 

Perfundor gelid a (understand aqua). 
I bathe myself with cold water. 

[§ 159.] Agreement is varied by the figure called Attrac- 
tion : 

Non omnis error stultitia est dicenda. 
Not every error mast be called folly. 

Thebae, quod Boeotiae caput est. 
Thebes, which is the capital of Bocotia. 

[§ 160.] Agreement with the meaning takes place by the 
figure called Synesis, especially in poetry : 

Siibeunt Tegeaea jiiventus auxilio tardi. 
The youth of Tegea come slow to the succour. 

Ubi est is scelus, qui me perdidit? 
Where is that villain, who has ruined me? 



117 



OUTLINE OF PROSODY. 



[§ 161.] Prosody treats of the quantity of syllables and of the laws 
f metre. 

ON THE QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 

GENUAL RULES OF QUANTITY. 

[§ 162.] 1. Every diphthong and contracted syllable is long. 

2. Primitives give their own quantity to their derivatives. 

3. A vowel coming before a vowel will be short. 

4. Any vowel becomes long by Position, which two consonants follow, 
is tristis : or which in the same word j follows or x or z : so Ajax, axis, 
imdzon. 

5. A vowel, though short by its own power, is doubtful if a mute 
•onsonant with a liquid after it follows ; thus you will say rightly 
lugubre melos) a mournful melody, or lugubre. 

a. Grn always makes a long syllable, as dgnus and ignis : and like 
vise gm; which tegmen and agmen shew. 



ON THE QUANTITY OF FINAL SYLLABLES. 

[§ 163.] 1. Most words of one syllable are long, as me y ver. 

I 2. "Words ending in A are long : fntstrd, and contra, and para. 

I a. Except Accusative and Nominative Cases : (Musa) the Muse sings 

' carmind) songs : the woods resound {Amaryllida) Amaryllis. 

3. E final is short : as lege, timete, carere. 

[§162.] i. Examples: lieu ; c5igo = cogo. Except prae before a vowel, as 
praSeuntem. 

z. Examples : p5mum, pomarium ; salix, salicetum. Exceptions are numerous, 
is homo, humanus ; nubo, pronuba. 

3. Examples: principium, prohibe. (H is regarded as a breathing only, and 
aot taken into account in Prosody.) Many G-reek exceptions ; as Chaonis, Aeneas, 
Jlio, Myrtous, Enyo. Some Latin, as, diei, Pompei ; aulai, eheu ; f io (except before 
3 r, as fieri) ; Common : fidei, Diana ; Gen. in ius, as illius. 

[§ 163.] 1. Exceptions : words in 1, b, d, t, as vel, sub, id, et, stet. Also es and 
its compounds, as, ades ; que, ve, ne interrogative ; nee, an, in, per, ter, vir, c5r, 
Cac, fer, bis, is, cis, quis. 

2. a. Most Vocatives in a are short ; as Oresta ; also eja, ita, quia. 

3. Except Cases of the 1st and 5th Declension, as Thisbe, specie ; their Deri- 
vatives, as quare, hodie; Imperatives Sing, of the 2nd Conj., as aude (but cave is 
doubtful). Adverbs derived from Adjectives ; as, misere : also ferme, fere, ohe, fame. 



118 COMPENDIUM OF PROSODY. 

4. Words in I are long ; diet and plebl and doll. 

5. Words in are long ; virgo and multo and juvd. 

6. Words in U are long, so tu and dictii and diu. 

7. Y final is short ; thus poets have chely, Tiphy. 

8. Words in C are long, as illlc, except donee. 

9. Shorten words in L, D, T ; thus Hannibal, illud, amavit. 

10. N final is short, Eton, agmen, are instances. 

11. B final is short; as calcdr, amabitur, Hector. 

12. Words in As are long; as terras and Menalcds. 

13. Words in Es are long; as sedes and videres. 

14. Is final is short ; as diceris, utiUs, ensis. 

a. The Oblique Cases Plural are excepted, as terris, vobls ; also the 
Second Person Singular, Present Tense, of the Fourth Conjugation, as 
audis ; the compounds of vis, sis ; malls, noils, and veils. 

15. Words in Os are long, as ventos and sacerdos. 

16. Us final is short: olus, intus, amamus, are instances. 

a. Except from this rule the contracted cases of the Eourth Declen- 
sion, as artus ; and words which, increasing, have long penult ; as tellus 
and incus, juvenilis and senectus. 

17. Ys final is short : chely s, Othrys, Erinys, are instances. 

a. The custom of Authors governs Quantity, if a rule is wanting. 

ON THE LAWS OF METEE. 

[§ 164.] 2. A long syllable following a short is called Iambus 
(v -) : but if a long syllable goes before a short one, that is a Trochee 
(- ^) : a Spondee will consist of two long syllables ( — ) ; a Dactyl 
is formed by a long and two short syllables (- o ^). 

ON SCANSION AND FIGURES OF SCANSION. 

[§ 165.] 1. Scansion, which Figures adjust by various art, distri- 
butes a Verse according to Feet. 

4. Exceptions are : Greek Datives and Vocatives, as Thyrsidi, Chlori ; also 
sicubi, necubi, nisi, quasi. But mini, tibi, sibi, ubi, ibi, are doubtful. 

5. The quantity of words in 0, especially Verbs and Proper Names, fluctuates in 
different authors, and at various eras. Oblique Gases, and nearly all Adverbs in 0, 
are long always. 

10. Exceptions : many G-reek words, as Hymen, Amnion. 

11. Exceptions : many G-reek words, as crater, aer. 

12. Exceptions : Greek cases of Third Declension, as Areas, lampadas. Also 
anas, a duck. 

1 3 . Exceptions : G-reek Plurals increasing ; as, Troades : also penes ; and some 
Singular Nouns which increase short, as seges. 

14. a. Gratis, foris, are long : and Substantives which increase long, as Samnis, 
Simois. Ris of the Future and Perfect in Verbs is doubtful, as feceris. 

15. Some Greek words in os (0?) are short, as Argos, epos. 

16 .6 .Some words from the Greek in us are long, as Sapphus, Melampus, Iesus. 



T 



LAWS OF METRE. 119 

2. Synaloepha (Elision) will cut off a Vowel at the end of a word, 
i there be a vowel at the beginning of the next word : Thyllitf am 1 
%nf alias, for Phyllida amo ante alias. 

3. Ecthlipsis will cut off a Vowel and m from the end, if there 
be a Vowel at the beginning of the next word : curas homing 
quant' est in rebus inane, for hominum, quantum. 

a. The last syllable of a verse is counted doubtful. 



[§ 166.] I. The maple is in the woods; the spirited horse wins the 
Olympia. You will sing with your voice : up, lead dogs, unless you 
are white on the temples. A club strikes ; a nail holds firm, and a 
key opens. To please a companion, put on, as a companion, affable 
manners. Comedians, seek the stage ; messmates, seek supper. Con- 
sult teachers, so you consult for yourself. Often has his own desire 
injured one desirous of war. Songs are recited, while temples are 
dedicated to the Lord. He trusted not to untie, who severed the 
knot with a sword. The man leads a wife ; the bride veils for a husband. 
This man trains dogs to take them out soon against boars. If you have 
not money, you are destitute, and eat not delicacies. The sea often de- 
ceives one who relies too much on the clear surface. The sun chases 
the clouds, and irrecoverable time flies. By what a man sins, by the 
same the same man is soon punished. It is a difficult labour under the 
weight of which I sink. The boy's forehead is smooth, but the girl's 
tongue light. Seek hares in plains, elegancies in books. I bid not a 
penny for him who bids not a penny for me. I had rather break with 
my jaw good apples than bad. Merchandise is sold, and reward comes 
gained by toil. Silvia strokes lovingly, while she milks, her gentle cow. 
You will have done a duty, if you have sent coins to the wretched. Strive, 
little boy, whoever shalt desire to shine. She who is red, smeared with 
paint, is forgetful of decency. He fell by base treachery, whom a friend 
killed. A mouth commands, but a bone is eaten with the mouth. It is 
a wife's part to bring forth and obey, a husband's to procure. Obedient 
children make parents rejoice. Play at ball : a javelin is hurled ; jplla is 
a pillar. Plaga is for a net and a country ; yplaga for a blow. People 
are the citizens of a city : but poplar is a tree. The prow is the front 
(of a ship), the stern the hind part, and the keel the lowest. A bail 
promises, but a vessel contains food. A bail kindly assures the person, 
but a surety money only. If you wish to go quick, you have need to 
use all the sails. 



II. Trust, but first .see; he who trusts, and has not well seen, 
is deceived : see lest you be inveigled by trust. The same fortune 
makes partners ; the same toil comrades ; one duty colleagues : but school, 
play, the table, make dear companions. Lira is the furrow of a field : 
lyra (the lyre) touched utters notes. Let him not be secure, who is not 
safe from the enemy : you have banks by a river, shore by the sea. Men 
are old by time ; ancients lived formerly : I feign what is not, and dis- 
semble what is. Have you any news ? Seek another : I know nothing. 
That chatterer relates what matters little. If perchance you sit any- 
where, and the seat is convenient to you, sit in that seat : nor give up 
the place to me. 



120 



APPENDIX. 



I. NOTES ON ETYMOLOGY. 
I. NOUNS. 

A. Substantives : — 

First Declension. 

a. The old Genitive ending as remains in familias : as, pater- (mater-) 
familias, father (mother) of a family, 

b. The Gen. in ai is found in epic and comic poetry : as, aquai. 

c. Nouns which form Gen. PI. in urn, instead of arum, are (1) Pa- 
tronymics : as, Aeneades ; (2) Some names of people, as Lapitha ; (3) 
Compounds with -cola, -gena, as caelicola, terrigena ; (4) Drachma, 
amphora. 

d. Nouns like Dea, with Dat. Abl. PI. abus, are some of those which 
correspond to Masculine Nouns in us : as, filia, nata, liberta, mula, &c. 

Second Declension. 

a. Nouns declined like filius are genius, familiar spirit, and Latin 
Proper Names in ius, as Mercurius, Laelius. 

b. The Gren. nwas contracted into I by writers as late as Cicero, Virgil, 
and Horace. Ovid writes ii. 

c. The Gen. PI. in urn for orum appears in (1) names of coins, 
weights, measures, and trades : as, numus, sestertius, medimnus, modius, 
talentum, faber. So, denum talentum ; praefectus fabrum. (2) Some 
names of people : as, Argivus, Danaus. Poets often use it in words of 
short penult, as virum for virorum. 

d. Greek Nouns in os, m. and /., have Ace. on or um : as, Delos ; 
Ace. Delon or Delum. Nouns in on, n., are like bellum in all but 
N. V. A. Sing. ; as, Pelion. 

e. Pelagus, sea, virus, poison, being Neuter, have Ace. and Voc. the 
same as Nom. Vulgus, common people, is Masculine or Neuter, and 
has -um or -us in Ace. These three Nouns have no Plural. 

Third Declension. 
a. Variant Consonant Nouns : 

Old man, Swine, Ox or cow, Jupiter, 



a) N. V. 


Senex 


Sus 


Bos 


Juppiter 




Ace. 


Sen- 


Su- 


Bov- 


Jov- 


em 


Gen. 


Sen- 


Su- 


Bov- 


Jov- 


is 


Dat. 


Sen- 


Su- 


Bov- 


Jov- 


I 


Abl. 


Sen- 


Su- 


Bov- 


Jov- 


e 


N. V. A. 


Sen- 


Su- 


Bov- 





es 


Gen. 


Sen- 


Su- 


— 


— 


um 


D. Abl. 


Sen- 


— 


— 


— 


xbus 



NOUNS. 121 

Sus lias Dat. ALL PL subus or suibus : bos has Gen. PI. bourn, 

Dat. Abl. bobus or biibus. 
Iter, journey, n. ; Gen. itiner-is, etc. 
Jecur, liver, n. ; Gen. jecoris or jecinor-is, etc. 
Supellex, furniture, f. ; Ace. supellectilem, etc. 
(b) Parisyllable Nouns, declined like Consonant Nouns, are : 

(1) the syncopated words, pater, mater, frater, accipiter; 

(2) canis, juyenis, vates, volucris. 

b. Variant I-Nouns : 

(a) Impari syllable I-Nouns, like dens, are : (1) Nouns with Stem 

en ling in two Consonants, except lynx ; (2) the words, glis, 
lis, mas, mus, nix (nivis), strix, with faux and vis. 

(b) Nouns like tussis are: sitis, thirst, f. ; amussis, carpenter's 

rule, f. ; with a few more. Also names of rivers, as Tiberis, 
Tiber, m. ; of towns, as Hispalis, Seville, f. 

(c) Like clavis : classis, fleet, f. ; febris, fever ; messis, har- 

vest; navis, ship, f . ; puppis, stern, t, and a few others. 
Eestis, rope,/., Abl. e; securis, axe,/., Abl. i only. 

(d) Like canal is are Adjectival Nouns: as, aedilis, m. 

(e) Like imber are : liter, bladder; venter, belly, m. 



c. Greek Consonant-Nouns form Ace. 


Sing. in 


-a or em; Ace. Plur 


isually in as : 








Gigas, giant, m. 


gigant- 


a, em 


as, es 


Lampas, torch, f. 


lampad- 


a, em 


as 


Crater, bowl, m. 


crater- 


a, em 


as 


Aer, air, m. 


aer- 


a, em 


as 


So, Nais, Naiad, f. 


Naid- 


a, em 


as, es 


Heros, hero, m. 


hero- 


a, em 


as, es 


Erinys, fury, f. 


Eriny- 


a 


as 



(a) Greek Nouns in is, ys, have Voe. i, y : as, Pari, Nai, Eriny. 

(b) Greek LNouns have Nom. is, f. ; Voc. i ; Ace. in or im ; Gen. eos ; 
Dat. Abl. I : as, poesis, poetry. 

{c) The following are Heteroclite Masculine forms of Proper Names : 

Nom. Voc. Ace. Gen. Dat. Abl. 

1. eus eu eum, ea el, eos ei, ei, eo eo 

2. es, eiis e, eu em, en, ea is, ei, T, eos I e 

3. es e, es em, en is, I l e, e 

4. es es em, ea is, I I e 

5. es e, es em, en, eta is, etis I, eti e, ete 

Examples.- — 1. Orpheus, Peleus. 2. Achilles, Ulixes (eus). 3. So- 
•rates, Thucydides. 4. Eteocles, Pericles. 5. Chremes, Thales. 

Fourth Declension. 

a. The Nouns which prefer ubiis to lbus in Dat. Abl. PI. are Di- 
sables in eus : as, arcus, bow : also, tribus, tribe; partus, birth; artus 
Tlur.), limbs ; and veru, spit, N. 

b. Poets often contract ui into u : as, Parce metu. — Virg. 

G 



122 NOTES ON ETYMOLOGY. 

Fifth Declension. 

a. Dies, day, and res, thing, are the only Nouns which, form the in- 
creasing Cases in the Plural. Most have no Plural at all. 

b. Poets contract ei into e : as, Constantis juvenem fide. — Hor. 

c. Fidei generally has e short : so rei, spei. 

d. Respublica, commonwealth, declines both elements : Ace. rempubli- 
cam, Gen. reipublicae, etc. So jusjurandum, oath; Gen. jurisjurandi, etc 

Anomalous Substantives. 
a. The chief Nouns, Plural only (besides those named § 25), are : 



Decl. 


1. 


/. Deliciae, delight 


Nonae, Nones 






'E^vHae, feast 


Nundinae, market-day 






'Exseqaisie,funeral rites 


Nuptiae, bridal 






Feriae, holidays 


Eeliquiae, remnant 






Insidiae, ambush 


Tenebrae, darkness 






Kalendae, Calends 


Athenae, Athens 






Minae, threats 


Thebae, Thebes 


Decl. 


2. 


Fasti, annals 


Delphi 






Liberi, children 


Gabii 


Decl. 


3. 


Fores, door, f. 


Moenia, town walls, n. 


Decl. 


4. 


Artus, limbs, m. 


Idus, Ides, f. 



b. The most important Nouns which change meaning in Plural are :- 
Decl. 1. Copia, plenty, f. Copiae, forces 
Decl. 2. Ludus, play, m. Ludi, public games 

Castrum, fort, n. Castra, camp 

c. Add to Defective Nouns : 

b. Mane, morning, Nom. Ace. Abl. Sing. 

c. Fas, right-, nefas, wrong-, instar, likeness-, nihil, nothing ; necesse, 
necessity ; opus, need : Nom. Ace. Sing. 

d. Fors, chance ; Abl. S. forte, by chance. 

e. Sponte, by one's own choice. 

B. Adjectives: — 

a. Like melior are declined Comparatives; and vetus (veteR-), 
ancient. 

b. Like felix, Adjectives in ax, ix, ox, ux. 

c. Like ingens, Adjectives in -ns, -rs, -ex; also locuples (locuplet-), 
wealthy; par (par-) with its compounds. Present Participles have Abl. 
S. i, when used as Epithets ; otherwise e : with occasional exception. 

d. Like acer, Adjectives of the Second Class in -cer, -ster; also 
celeber, renowned ; saluber, healthful. 

e. Abl.S. i, Gen. Thum; no Neut. PL Nom. Ace. : inop-s, desti- 
tute; vigiL, wakeful; mernon, mindful; degeneR, degenerate; ubeR, 
fruitful; anceps (ancipit-), dubious; praeceps (praecipit-), headlong. 

f. Abl. S. e, Gen. PL urn ; no Neut, PL : ales (alit-), winged ; dives 
(divit-), rich ; sospes (sospit-), safe; superstes (superstit-), surviving; 
compos (compot-), possessing; impos (impot-), not possessing; deses, 
reses (desid-, resid-), inactive ; paupeR, poor ; pubeR, of age. 



NOUNS. 123 

C. Pronouns : — 

a. The suffixes -met, -te, -pte, -ce, strengthen various Pronouns. 

(a) Met may be joined 1. to ego and its cases, except G-en. 

Plur. : as, egomet, L myself ; 2. to the cases of tu, except 
Nom. Sing.: as, yosmet, ye yourselves] 3. to se and its 
cases, except sui: as, sibimet; 4. to the cases of suus : as, 
suamet facta. 

(b) Te is joined to tu : as tute; also, tutemet, thou thyself. 

(c) Pte is joined to the Abl. Sing, of the Possessive Pronouns : 

as, meopte consilio, by my advice. 

(d) Ce is joined to the Demonstratives : as, huncce, hujusce. For 

illece, istece, are written illic, istic, which may be declined, 

Sing. Plural. 

M. F. n. si. F. K. 

N. istic istaec istuc istice istaece istace 

Ace. istunc istanc istuc istosce istasce istace 

G-en. istiusce, etc. istorumce, etc. 

b. From the Possessives noster, vester, cujus, are derived : 

Nostr-as (at-), of our country. I Cuj-as (at-), of what country. 
Vestr-as (at-), of your country. J 

D. Derived Nouns. 
1. Substantiva Mobilia have a Feminine as well as a Masculine form: 

a. Many O-Nouns have a Feminine A-Noun formed by changing us 
into a : agnus, lamb ; asinus, ass ; cervus, stag ; deus, god ; dominus, 
lord; equus, horse; famulus, house-servant; films, son; libertus, f reed- 
man; lupus, wolf; maritus, husband; mulus, mide; natus, son; servus, 
slave ; sponsus, bridegroom ; ursus, bear, &c. Fern, agna, asina, &c. 

Avus, grandfather, has avia; gallus, code, gallina; caper, he-goat, 
capra and capella ; puer, boy, puella ; magister, minister, change ter 
into tra ; poeta, poet, poetria ; citharista, harper, citharistria. Taurus, 
bull, has vacca, cow ; verna, born-slave, has ancilla, maid-servant. 

b. Consonant-Nouns, verbal, in tor, sor, often have a Feminine trix: 
, as ultor, avenger, ultrix; victor, conaueror, victrix; tonsor, barber, ton- 
1 strix. The forms in trix are often used as Adjectives : as, arma vic- 
! tricia, victorious arms. 

c. Caupo, vintner (3), has Fern, copa (1); cliens, client (3), clienta 
, (1); fidicen, lute-player (3), fidicina (1); tibicen, flute-player (3), tibi- 
i cina (1) ; leo, lion (3), leaena or lea (1). 

d. Gentile names : as, Cres, Cretan (3), Cressa (1); Laco, Lacedae- 
monian^), Lacaena (1); Libys, Libyan (3), Libyssa (1); Phoenix, 
Phoenician (3), Phoenissa (1); Thrax, Thracian (3), Threissa(l); Tros, 
Trojan (3) Troas (3), &c. 

e. Nepos, grandson (3), has Fern, neptis (3); aries, ram (3), ovis, 
ewe (3) ; vir, man (2), mulier, woman (3) ; gener, son in-law (2), nurus 
(4); socer, father-in-law (2), socrus (4); senex, old man{Z), anus (4). 

Note. Nouns having only one Gender for both sexes are called Epicoena 
(k-niKoiva) : as, passer, sparrow, m. ; vulpes,/o#, f. Sex must be expressed, if need- 
| .ful, by the words mas, femina : as, vulpes mas, a dog-fox, 

g2 



124 NOTES ON ETYMOLOGY. 

2. Deminutives are Derived Nouns which express smallness. 
Deminutives are formed, chiefly, in 



M. 




F 


N. 


1. -tilus 




-ula 


-ulum 


2. -olus 




-ola 


-olum 


3. -ellus 




-ella 


-ellum 


4. -cuius 




-cula 


-ciilum 


1. riv-ulus, streamlet 


cist-ula, small chest 


scut-nlum, small shield 


2. fili-olus, 


little son 


capre-ola, young roe 


savi-olum, kiss 


3. ag-ellus, 


small field pat-ella, saucer 


lab-ellum, lip 


4. iios-cwlus, floweret 


parti-cula, particle 


mimus-cuhim, little pre- 








sent. 


Adjectives 


are also diminished : as, parvulus, pallidulus, misellus. 


3. Patron;) 


^mica are 


Personal Names, derived from a parent or 


ancestor. 




Masc. 






ades, 


Aeneades, son of 


Aeneas. 




ides, 


Tyndarides „ 


Tyndarus. 




ides, 


Nelides „ 


Neleus. 




lades 


Thestiades „ 

Fern. 


Thestius. 




is, 


Tyndaris, daughter 


of Tyndarus. 




eis, 


Neleis, ,, 


Neleus. 




as, 


Thestias, „ 
And some others. 


Thestius. 



II. COMPOSITION OP VEKBS. 

A. Changes of Pbepositions in Composition. 

(1) A, ab = 

A before,?;?, v : as, amitto, avoco. 

Abs before c, t: as, abscedo, absterreo. 

A s before p : as, asporto. 

Au before/: as, aufero, aufugio. But abfui, abfore. 

Ab before other letters : as, abeo, abdo. 

(2) Ad remains before b, d, h,j, m, v, and vowels: as, adbibo, addo, 

adhibeo, adjicio, admitto, advoco, adeo. 
becomes a- before gn, sc, sp : as, agnosco, ascendo, aspicio. 
is assimilated before other letters: as, affero, appono, assisto. 

(3) Con- (for cum), in-, are written com-, im-, before p, b, m: as, 

comparo, combibo, immitto. 
are assimilated before /, r : as, colludo, irruo. 
Con- becomes co- before vowels, h, and gn\ as, coeo, coheres, 

cognosce So ignosco. Note comedo, comburo. 
Con-, in-, remain before other consonants: as, cenfero, induco. 

(1) Ob, sub, are assimilated before c,g,p,f\ as, occurro, oppono, 
suppono. So summoveo. 
Except suscipio, suscito, suspendo, suspicio. 
They remain before other letters. 

Except ostendo, sustineo, sustollo, sustuli, surripio. 
Note obsolesco, omitto. 



COMPOSITION OF VEKBS. 125 

(5) E, ex, are assimilated before/: as, effero. 

Ex before vowels, h, c, q, p, s, t: as, exeo, exhibeo, excedo, 

exquiro, expello, exstruo,* extraho. 
E before others: as, educo, evoco. 

(6) Trans becomes tra before d,j, n: as, trado, trajicio, trano. 

Tran- before s : as, transcribo. 

(7) Dis- is assimilated before/: as, differo. 

Kemains before gutturals, labials, t, j, and s with vowel : 
as, discerpo, dispello, distraho, disjicio, dissero. But 
dijudico. 
Di- before s with consonant, and before other consonants: as, 
distringo, diruo. 
Not used before vowels. But dir-ibeo for dis-hibeo, dir- 
rmo for dis-imo. 

(8) Re- se- add d in reddo, redeo, redhibeo, redimo, redoleo, seditio. 

B. Vowel-Change in Composition. 

a. Verbs weakening a into e in all forms of their compounds : 

(1) damnare, jactare, lactare, patrare, sacrare, tractare ; 

(2) arcere; (3) -candere, carpere, scandere, spargere, gradi, 
pati ; (4) farcire, partiri. 

b. Verbs weakening a into u in all forms: (1) calcare, saltare; 

(3) quatere, (-cut ere, -cussi, -cussum). 

c. Verbs weakening ae into i in all forms : (3) caedere (-cidi, 

-cisum), laedere (-lidere, -lisi, -lisum), quaerere (-quirere, -qui- 
sivi, -quisitum). 

d. Verb weakening au into il in all forms : (3) claudere (-cludere, 

-clusi, -clusum). 

e. Verb weakening au into 5 in all forms : (3) plaudere (-plodere, 

-plosi, -piosum). Exc. applaudere. 
. Verbs weakening a into i in all forms : (2) habere, latere, placere, 
tacere; (3) sapere, statuere. Exc. complacere, perplacere. 
g. Verbs which vary the Vowel in the forms of compounds : — 

(a) axi, e, a: (3) agere (-igere, -egi, -actum), frangere (-frin- 

gere, -fregi, -fractum), pangere (-pingere, -pegi, -pactum). 
Exc. circum-, peragere (-egi, -actum), cogere (co-egi, 
-actum), degere (degi), satagere (sategi), repangere. 

(b) a x ?', i, a: (3) cadere (-cidere, -cidi), tangere (-tingere, -tigi, 

-tactum). 

(c) axi, i, e: (3) canere (-cinere, -cinui, -centum), rapere 

(-ripere, -ripiii, -reptum). 

(d) a xi, e, e: (3) capere (-cipere, -cepi, -ceptum), facere 

(-ficere, -feci, -fectum), jacere (-jicere, -jeci, -jectum), 
lacere (-licere, -lexi, -lectum). Exc. benefacere and 
many other compounds of facere (-facere, -feci, -factum), 
elicere, elicuT, elicitum. 

(e) a x i, i, u : (4) salire (-silire, -silui, -sultum). 

(/) axi, e: (2) fateri (-fiteri, -fessus) ; (3) apisci (-ipisci, 
-eptus). 

* The Greek form ec (ck) must be assumed when expecto, exul, &c., are written 
for ec-specto, ec-sul, &c. 



126 



NOTES ON ETYMOLOGY. 

(g) e x i, i, e : (2) tenere (-tinere, -tinui, -tentum). 

(h) e x i, e, e : (2) sedere (-sidere, -sedi, -sessum) ; (3) regere 
(-rigere, -rexi, -rectum), specere (-spicere, -spexi, -spec- 
turn), premere (-primere, -pressi, -pressum), emere (-imere, 
-emi, -emptum), legere (-ligere, -legi, -lectum). Exc. 
circumsedere, pergere (perrexi, perrectum), surgere (sur- 
rexi, surrectum) ; co, per-, inter- (-emere, -emi, -emp- 
tum). Also sublegere (-legi, -lectum), di-ligere, neg-, in- 
tellegere (-lexi, -lectum). These four last are from 
legere, to choose. The compounds of legere, to read, are 
per-, prae-, re- (-legere, -legi, -lectum). 

Examples of Compound Vekbs. 



a. (1) Condemno, condemn 


Conticeo, be silent 


Objecto, cast forward 


(3) Desipio, be silly 


Delecto, delight 


Kestituo, restore 


Impetro, obtain (by ask- 


g. {a) (3) Abigo, drive away 


ing) 


Refringo, beat back 


Consecro, consecrate 


Impingo, knock against 


Obtrecto, disparage 


(b) (3) Occido, die 


(2) Coerceo, confine 


Attingo, reach 


(3) Incendo, set on fire 


(c) (3) Succino, sing low 


Excerpo, cull 


Diripio, tear asunder 


Ascendo, climb 


(d)(3) Decipio, deceive 


Dispergo, disperse 


Efficio, effect 


Progredior, go forward 


Ejicio, cast out 


Perpetior, endure 


Allicio, allure 


(4) Infercio, stuff in 


(e) (4) Circumsilio, leap round 


Dispertior, distribute 


(f) (2) Diffiteor, disown 


b.(l) Proculco, trample down 


(3) Adipiscor, acquire 


Insulto, insult, leap on 


(g) (2) Abstineo, abstain 


(3) Decutio, shake down 


(h) (2) Praesideo, preside 


c.{2>) Occido, kill 


(3) Porrigo, stretch 


Collido, dash together 


Transpicio, look through 


AcquTro, acquire 


Opprimo, weigh down 


d. (3) Includo, shut in 


Eximo, take out 


e. (3) Explodo, stamp off 


Colligo, collect 


f (2) Prohibeo, prohibit 


Diligo, love 


Displiceo, displease 


Perl ego, read through 



III. CORRELATIVE PRONOUNS AND PARTICLES. 

The Correlation of Pronouns and Particles should be carefully noted. 
The full series comprises — 1 Interrogativum ; 2 Demonstratiya ; 3 Re- 
lativum ; 4 Indefinita ; 5 Universalia. These latter again contain 
a. Universalia Relativa et Indefinita ; b. Univ. Alternativa ; c. Univ. 
Distributiva et Inclusiva ; d. Univ. Exclusiva. Alius and alter are De- 
monstrativa Partitiva. The dual series (uter, &c.) is marked *. 

Pronouns. 

1 Quis ? qui ? who ? what ? Idem, the same 
*Uter ? which of two ? Alius, another 

2 Is, ille, iste, that *Alter, the one, the other 
Hie, this 3 Qui, who 



CORRELATIVE PARTICLES. 



127 



\any < 



4 Quis, qui, any one 
Aliquis, aliqui 
Quispiam 

Quisquam, ullus, any at all 
Quidam, a certain one 
*Alteruter, one or other 
5 a. Quisquis, quicumque, whoso- 
ever, whatsoever 
*Uteruter, utercumque, which- 
soever 



b. Quivis, quilibet, any you will 
*Utervis, uterlibet, which you 

will 

c. Quisque, each (of several) 
Omnes, universi, all 

*Uterque, each (of two) 
*Ambo, both 

d. Nemo, nullus, no one^none 
^Neuter, neither 



Adverbs of Place Where. 



1 Ubi? where? 

*Utrobi ? in which place ? 

2 Ibi, illic, istic, there 
Hie, here 

Ibidem, in the same place 
Alibi, elsevjhere 

3 Ubi, where 

4 Ubi, alicubi, uspiam, anywhere 
Usquam, anywhere at all 



5 a. Ubiubi, ubicumque, where- 
soever 

b. Ubivis, ubilibet, where you 

will 

c. Ubique, everywhere 
*Utrobique, in both places 

d. Nusquam, nowhere 
*Neutrobi, in neither place 



Adverbs of Place "Whither. 



1 Quo? whither? 
*Utro ? to which place ? 

2 Eo, illuc, istuc, thither 
Hue, hither 

Eodem, to the same place 
Alio, to another place 

3 Quo, whither 

4 Quo, aliquo, quopiam, any- 

vjhither 



Quoquam, anywhither at all 
5 a. Quoquo, quocumque, whither- 
soever 
b. Quovis, quolibet, whither you 
will 

c. *Utroque, to each place 

d. *Neutro, to neither place. 



Adverbs of Place Whence. 



1 Unde, whence? 

2 Inde, illinc, istinc, thence 
Hinc, hence 

Indidem, from the same side 
Aliunde, from another side 

3 Unde, whence 

4 Unde, alicunde, from some 

side 



5 a. Undeunde, Undecumque 
from whatever side 

b. Undevis, undelibet, from 

what side you will 

c. Undique, from every side 
* Utrinque, from each side f 



Adverbs of Time When. 



1 Quando? ubi? when? 

2 Turn, tune, then 
Nunc, jam, now 
Simul, at the same time 
Alias, at another time 

3 Quum, ubi, when 



4 Quando, aliquando, ever 

Unquam, ever at all 
a. Quandocumque, whensoever 

c. Quandoque, at any time 
Semper, always 

d. Nunquam, never 



f So qua, in what direction ? ea, hac, alia, qua, aliqua, quaqua, &c. 
quorsum, whitherward ? iUorsum, aliquorsum, &c. 
See the series of qualis, quantus, quot, § 38 (g). 



! 



128 NOTES ON ETYMOLOGY. 

Adverbs of Number. 

1 Quoties ? how often ? 4 Aliquoties, several times 

2 Toties, so often 5 a. Quotiescumque, how often 

3 Quoties, (as often) as soever 

Adverbs of Manner. 

1 Quomodo ? quemadmodum ? 3 Quomodo, quemadmodum, 

ut ? quani ? how 1 ut, as 

2 Ita, sic, tam, so Ac, atque, quam, as, than 
Item, itidem, in like manner 5 a. Utnt, utcumque, quam- 
Aliter, secus, otherwise quam, however 

Adverbs of Cause. 

1 Cur ? quare ? why ? wherefore ? 

2 Ideo, propterea, idcirco, on that account 

3 Cur, quare, why ; quod, quia, because 

Correlation between a Demonstrative Adverb and a 
Conjunction appears also in 

(1) Consecutive Construction : 2 Usque, eo, &c, so long, §c. 

2. Adeo, ita, sic, tam, tan- 3 Dum, donee, quoad, until 

turn, &c. , so, so much, §c. (4) Conditional Construction: 

3. Ut, ut non, ut nihil, ut 2 Modo, tantum, tantummo- 

nemo, &c, that, §c. do, only, $c. 

(2) Final Construction : 3 Si, if (or omitting si) 

2. Idcirco, ideo, &c.,for the (5) Concessive Construction: 

purpose, Sf'c. 2 Tamen, yet } nevertheless 

3. Ut, ne, ut ne, nequis, &c, 3 Etsi, etiamsi, quamquam, 

that, §c. quamvis, &c, although, §c. 

(3) Temporal Construction : (6) Comparative Construction : 

2. Turn, tunc, then 2 Ita, perinde, proinde, simi- 

3. Quum, when liter, iti&em, just so, §-c. 

2. Interea, meantime 3 Quasi, ac si, ut si, &c, as 

3. Dum, whilst if, dfr. 



IV. NUMERALS, MONEY, TIME. 
A, Numerals. 

a. The Cardinal Numbers are those on which the other Numerals 
hinge (cardo, hinge). Unus is used in the Plural with Substantives 
'Plural only' : as, una castra, one camp. But for higher numbers the 
Distributives are used : as, bina castra, two camps. 

b. Ordinal N u m e r a 1 s denote numerical rank (ordo) : primus, 
first, &c. 

c. Distributive Numerals denote so many each or at each tJme: 
. as, Sexageni caedunt singulos, sixty men beat each (centurion). — Tac. 

Poets often use them for the Cardinal Numbers. 

d. Numeral Adverbs denote the number of times that any tiling 
happens or is done: semel, once ; bis, twice ; &c. 



NUMERALS. 



129 



e. The General Rules for writing Compound Numbers, Cardinal, Or- 
dinal, and Distributive, are as follows : — ■ 

(1) In Compound Numbers less than 20, either the smaller number 
without et precedes the larger, or the larger with et precedes the smaller: 
as, Nos Tyndaritani in septemdeaim populis Siciliae numeramur, we 
of Tyndaris are reckoned among the i7 nations of Sicily. — Cic, Roscius 
fundos decern et tres reliquit, Roscius left 13 farms. — Cic. Licet 
dicere decimus et Septimus pro Septimus decimus. — Prisc. 

(2) In Compound Numbers above 20, either the smaller number 
with et comes first, or the larger without et : as, Romulus septem et 
triginta regnavit annos, Romulus reigned 37 years. — Cic. Dentes 
triceni bini viris attribuuntur, to men are assigned 32 teeth. — Plin. 

(3) In Compound Numbers above 100, the larger with or without et 
generally precedes the smaller: as, Leontinus Gorgias centum et septem 
complevit annos, Gorgias of Leontini completed 107 years. — Cic. Olym- 
piade centesima quarta-decima, Lysippus fuit, Lysippus lived in 
the llkth Olympiad. — Pun. 

(4) The thousands are expressed either by prefixing the numerical 
Adverbs bis, ter, &c, to mille (chiefly in poetry), or by prefixing the 
Cardinal Numbers to millia . as, duo millia, tria millia, &c. 

Millia is generally followed by a Genitive : but if smaller numbers 
intervene between millia and the Substantive, the latter will often stand 
in the same case as the Numeral : as, Tria millia et septingenti 
pedites ierunt, 3700 infantry marched. — Liv. 

(5) The Numbers above 100, 000 are expressed by the Numeral Adverbs 
joined to centum millia or centena millia, as stated in the following 
passage : Non erat apud antiquos numerus ultra centum millia ; itaque 
et hodie multiplicantur haec, ut decies centena millia aiit saepius 
dicantur. — Pun. 

/. Unus is often used in Compound Numbers for primus. 

g. The Numbers compounded with 8 and 9 are commonly expressed 
by a subtraction of duo and unus from the next multiple of 10 : as, 
duodeviginti (duodevicesimus), 18; undeviginti (undevicesimus), 19; 
duodetriginta (duodetricesimus), 28 ; undetriginta (undetricesimus), 29 ; 
&c, &c: duodecentum (duodecentesimus), 98; undecentum (unde- 
centesimus), 99. 



Roman 










Symbols. 


Cardinalia. 


Ordinalia. 


Distributiva. 


Adverbia, 


I. 


unus 


primus 


singuli 


semel 


II. 


duo 


secundus or alter 


bini 


bis 


III. 


tres 


tertius 


terni or trini 


ter 


IV. 


quattuor 


quartus 


quaterni 


quater 


V. 


quinque 


quintus 


quini 


quinquies 


VI. 


sex 


sextus 


seni 


sexies 


VII. 


septem 


Septimus 


septeni 


septies 


VIII. 


octo 


octavus 


octoni 


octies 


IX. 


novem 


nonus 


noveni 


novies 


X. 


decern 


decimus 


deni 


decies 


XI. 


undecim 


un decimus 


undeni 


undecies 


XII. 


duodecim 


duodecimus 


duodeni 


duodecies 


XIII, 


tredecim 


tertius decimus 
g3 


terni deni 


tredecies, 



130 



NOTES ON ETYMOLOGY. 



Boman 

Symbols. 

XVIII. 

XIX. 

XX. 

XXI. 



XXX. 

c. 

cc. 

DorlQ. 

MorClQ. 

MM. 



Cardinalia. 

duodeviginti 

undeviginti 

viginti 

unus et vi-] f 

ginti or vi- f j 

ginti unus 
triginta 
centum 
ducenti 
quingenti 
mille 
duo millia 



Or din alia. 
duodevicesimus 
undevicesimus 
vicesimus 
[primus et vice- 



Distributiva. 
duodeviceni 
undeviceni 
viceni 

L viceni singuli t 



simus or vice- 
simus primus j 

trigesimus triceni 

centesimus centeni 

ducentesimus duceni 

quingentesimus quingeni 

millesimus singula millia 

bis millesimus bina millia 

B. Money. 
The As, or pound of 12 ounces (unciae), was thus divided: 



Adverbia. 
duodevicies 
undevicies 
vicies 

semel et vi- 
cies 

tricies 

centies 

ducenties 

quingenties 

millies 

bis millies 



Uncia 

Sextans 

Quadrans 

Triens 

Quincunx 

Semissis 



= 1 oz. or 
= 2 
= 3 
= 4 
= 5 
= 6 



i of the As. 



Septunx 

Bes 

Dodrans 

Dextans 

Deunx 



7 oz. or ^ of the As. 
- 8 a 

• ° )> 4 )» 

•io I 

■ 11 ii 



6. Unciae usurae =-L- per cent, per month = 1 per cent, per annum. 



Sextantes 
Quadrantes 

etc. 
Asses usurae 



_ l —0 

— TF " >> — * " »» 

_. 1 _ Q 

— 4 J) JJ — ° >> ») 

etc. etc. 

= 1 per cent, per month = 12 per cent, per annum. 



Asses usurae were also called centesimae ; and binae centesimae = 2 
per cent, per month = 24 per cent., &c. Unciarium fenus was 1 uncia 
yearly per as = 8| per cent, per annum. 

c. Heres ex asse . „ . means heir to the whole estate. 
Heres ex deunce . . „ heir to ^| of the estate. 
Heres ex semisse, or .1 heir to § of the estate. 
Heres ex dimidi a parte .J 2 

etc. etc. 

d. The Sestertius (Numus), or Sesterce, was a silver coin equal to 2J 
asses, being \ of the Denarius (coin of 10 asses). Its symbol is HS. 

The Sestertium ( = 1000 sestertii) was not a coin, but a sum, and is 
only used in the Plural Number. 

Sestertia, in the Plural (also represented by HS.) joined with the 

Cardinal or Distributive Numbers, denotes so many 1000 numi sestertii. 

The Numeral Adverbs, joined with (or understanding) sestertii 

(G-en. Sing.), sestertium numum, or HS., denote so many 100,000 numi 

sestertii : 

Thus HS.X= Sestertii decern, 10 sesterces. 

HS.X == Sestertia decern, 10,000 sesterces. 
HSXT=-.Sesterthun decies, 1,000,000 sesterces. 

C. Time. — The Koman Calendar. 

Every Eoman month had three chief days : Kalendae (Calends), 
Nonae (Nones), Idus (Ides). The Calends were always the 1st day of 



TIME. 



131 



the month ; the Nones were usually on the 5th; the Ides on the 13th; 
but in four months the Nones were on the 7th, the Ides on the 15th. 

March, May, July, October ; these are they 
Make Nones the 7th, Ides the loth day. 

These three days, the Calends, Nones, and Ides, were taken as points, 
from which the other days were counted backwards. That is, the 
Eomans did not say, such and such a day after, &c, but such and such 
a day before the Calends, or Nones, or Ides. The rules are: (1) For 
days before the Calends subtract the day of the month from the number 
of days in the month increased by two ; (2) For days before the Nones 
or Ides subtract from the day on which they fall, increased by one. 

Examples. — May 31, Pridie Kalendas Junias. 

,, 30, Ante diem tertium (a.d. III.) Kal. Jun. 
,, 29, ,, „ quartum (a.d. I V.) Kal. Jun. 
„ 11, ,, „ quintum (a.d. V.) Id. Mai. 
„ 2, ,, „ sextum (a.d. VI.) Non. Mai. 











H g Martius, Maius, 


Jaxttabius , Augus- 


Aprtlis, Justus, 


Februarius, 28 


'g g ! JULIUS, OCTO- 


tus, December, 


Septejiber, No- 


Days — in every 


a> h : ber, 31 Days. 

ft- 


31 Days. 


ye^iber, 30 Days. 


fourth Year 29. 


1 Kalendis 


Kalendis , iKalendis <J>! Kalendis 


2 a.d. VI. ^ 




a.d. IV. 1 g 


Ja.d. IV. ) § 


^ j a.d. IV. 1 § 




3 a.d. V. g 


§ a.d. III. J- § 


g ; a.d. III. [• g 


* | a.d. III. } § 




4 a.d. IV. ^§ 


3- Pridie j £ 


• 


Pridie J £j 


tJ Pridie J £ 




5 a.d. III. £ 


1 Noni s 




Nonis 


2 Xonis 




! 6 


Pridie ) 


g a.d. VIII. i 




a.d. VIII. N 


' a.d. VIII. : \ M 


t 7 


X o n i s 


H a.d. VII. ) i £ a.d. VII. 


/ro 1 a.d. VII. ) /§■ 


! 8 


a.d. VIII. , 


)* i a.d. VI. 
Ja.d.V. \* 
e a.d. IV. w 


<P a, 


.§ a.d. VI. 

r a.d. V. ^ 




9 


a.d. VII. ) 
a.d. VI. I m 




a.d. V. Y £ 




10 




a.d. IV. 1 m 


.. a.d. IV. »h 
? a.d. III. 




11 


a.d.V. yg 


H a.d. III. 


ti 


a.d. III. 




12 


a.d. IV. >- 


Pridie } 


p 


Pridie ' j 


^ . Pridie y 




13 


a.d. III. 


g. Idibns 


Idibus (Idibus 




14 


Pridie J 


• a.d. XIX. ^ 






a.d. XVIII. \ \ ! a.d. XVI. \ 




15 


Idibus 


a.d. XVIII. 






a.d. XVII. 




►J a.d. XV. 
§' a.d. XIV. 






16 


a.d. XVII. 




! a.d. XVII. 






a.d. XVI. 








17 


a.d. XVI. 




a.d. XVI. 






a.d. XV. 




q a.d. XIII. 






18 


a.d. XV. 




t a.d. XV. 




g a.d. XIV. 




a.d. XII. 






19 


a.d. XIV. 




P a.d. XIV. 




p 1 a.d. XIII. 




A a.d. XI. 


m 




20 


a.d. Xin. 




a.d. XIII. 






a.d. XII. 




H a.d. X. 


-§ /M* 


21 


a.d. XII. 




y a.d. XII. 






a.d. XI. 


_d 


n a.d. IX. )g 


et- 


22 


a.d. XI. 


-t 


& a.d. XI. 




a.d. X. ) 2 ; | a.d. VIII. 


oa 




23 


a.d. X. 


>*§ 


" a.d. X. 




>3 


a.d. IX. 


■S 


a.d. VII. 


^ 




24 


a.d. IX. 


JE3 


> a.d. IX. 


■a 




a.d. VIII. 


M 


gj a.d. VI. 






25 


a.d. VIII. 


<jj 


g a.d. VIII. 
•la.d. VII. 


M 




a.d. VII. 




• | a.d. V. 






26 


a.d. VII. 


~ 




5-! 


a.d. VI. 




1 a.d. TV. 






27 


a.d. VI. 




v a d. VI. 
£ a.d. V. 




P 


a.d. V. 




b ! a.d. III. 






28 


a.d. V. 








a.d. IV. 




s> i Pridie 


29 


a.d. IV. 




< 


a.d. IV. 






a.d. III. 


! * j 


30 


a.d. III. 






a.d. III. 






Pridie S 


31 


Pridie / 


> 




Pridie 






[In Leap-year, Feb. 24th (a.d. VI. Kal. Mart.) was twice reckoned, — 




hence this day was called dies bissextus, and leap-year itself 




ANNUS BISSEXTUS.] 



132 



NOTES ON SYNTAX. 



Gaius 



A. Aulus 

C. 

G-. 

Cn. 
Gn 
D. Decimus 



} 



Gnaeus 



V. ABBREVIATIONS. 
(1) Praenomina. 
K. Kaeso 
L. Lucius 
M. Marcus 
M'. Manius 
Mam. Mamercus . 
P. Publius 



Q. Quintus 

S. (Sex.) Sextus 

Ser. Servius 

Sp. Spurius 

T. Titus 

Ti. (Tib.) Tiberius. 



Note. — A Roman of distinction had at least three names: the Praenomen, 
individual name ; the Nomen, name showing the G-ens or clan ; and the Cogno- 
men, surname showing the Familia or family. Thus, Lucius Junius Brutus expres- 
sed Lucius of the G-ens Junia and Familia Brutorum. To these were sometimes 
added one or more Agnomina, titles either of honour (as Africanus, Macedonicus, 
Magnus, &c), or expressing that a person had been adopted from another Gens. 
as Aemilianus, applied to the younger Scipio Africanus, who was the son of L. 
Paulus Aemilius, but adopted by a Scipio. The full name of the emperor Au- 
gustus (originally an Octavius) after he had been adopted by his uncle's will 
and adorned by the Senate with a title of honour, was G-aius Julius Caesar 
Octavianus Augustus. 



A. D. Ante diem 

A. U. C. Anno urbis 

conditae 
Aed. Aedilis 
Cal. (Kal.) Calendae 
Cos. Consul 
Coss. Consules 
D. Divus 
Des. Designatus 
Eq. Rom. Eques Ro- 

manus 
F. Eilius 



(2) Varia. 

HS. Sestertius, Ses- 

tertium 
Id. Idus 
Imp. Imperator 
L. Libra 
LL. Dupondius 
Non. Nonae 
0. M. Optimus Ma- 

ximus 
P. C. Patres (et) Con- 

scripti 
P. M. Pontifex Ma- 



P. R. Populus Roma- 

nus 
PI. Plebis 
Proc. Proconsul 
S. Senatus 
S. P. Q. R. Senatus 

Populusque Roma- 

nus 
S. C. Senatusconsultum 
S. D. P. Salutem dicit 

plurimam 
Tr. Tribunus. 



II. NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

I. Agreement. § 88-92. § 156-160. 

A. The Subject (§ 88) may be any Noun-term, § 87. 

B. (1) The term Adjective (§ 89) includes Participles and Adjectival 
Pronouns. 

(2) An Adjective agrees as Epithet with a Substantive : as Comple- 
ment with any Noun-term. 

. (3) Adjectives are used as Substantives (§ 156) : 1. In the Masc. Sing, 
and PL, man or men being implied: as, amicus, a friend; sapiens, a 
wise man ; stultus, a fool ; boni, good men ; multi, many ; pie- 
rique, most. 2. In the Neut. Sing, abstractly: as, Hones turn et 
utile, morality and expediency.— Q\q.. Triste lupus stabulis, the wolf 
is a bane to the stalls.— Yirq. 3. In the Neut. PL, things being im- 
plied : as, multa, many things ; omnia, all things. 



AGREEMENT. 133 

C. The term Substantive (§90) includes all Noun-terms. A Sub- 
stantive may be in Apposition to any Noun-term, as Appositive Epithet 
or Complement. An Apposite usually agrees in Number also with its 
Noun, sometimes in Gender: as, Usus magister egregius. — Plin. 
Vita rustica parsimoniae magistra est. — Cic. 

D. 1. The Eelative (§91) may refer to any Noun-term of any Person, 
as ego, nos, tu, vos, &c. 2. It may be explained as standing between 
two Noun-terms, with the former of which it agrees in (render, Number, 
and Person, with the latter in Case : as, 

(1) Vir quern virum vides rex est (Pull Form). 

(2) Vir quern vides rex est (Usual Form). 

(3) ... quern virum vides rex est. 

(4) ... quern vides rex est. 

E. Figures varying Agreement (§ 158-160) are: — 

1. Ellipsis, which omits words : (1) Pronouns, as Aiunt, they say: 
(2) Substantives, as Falernum, Falernian (vinum, wine), gelida (aqua) 
cold water ; Ad Junonis, to Juno's (templum, temple). (3) Verbs, espe- 
cially the Copula est, sunt. See § 158. 

The opposite of Ellipsis is Emphasis, which throws stress on words : 
as, Ego reges ejeci, vos tyrannos introducitis, 1 expelled kings, ye are 
bringing in tyrants. — Liv. 

2. Attraction, which removes Agreement from the usual word to 
some other : as, Amantium irae amoris integratio est, the quarrels of 
lovers are the renewal of love. — Ter. ; where est agrees with the Com- 
plement integratio, not with the Subject irae. 

3. Synesis, which occurs when words have one (render or Number in 
form, another in meaning, and when the construction is made to agree 
with the meaning : as, Capita conjurationis securi percussi sunt, the 
heads of the conspiracy were decapitated. — Liv. Pars epulis oner ant 
mensas, part load the tables with viands. — Virg. Singular Nouns with 
Plural sense, as pars, juventus, turba, multitudo, nobilitas, plebs, 
populus, civitas, vulgus, etc., are called Collectiva, Collective 
Nouns, or Nouns of Multitude. 

F. 1. A Composite Subject (§ 92) is one which contains two or more 
Noun-terms. The rule holds good, whether the Nouns are linked by 
Conjunctions, or without Conjunctions (by Asyndeton), or united by the 
Preposition cum. So, Eemo cum fratre Quirinus jura dabunt, Quirinus 
with his brother Bemus will give laws. — Virg. 

2. A Singular Verb may be used with a Composite Subject when the 
Nouns form one notion : as, Senatus populusque intelligit. — Cic. 

3. The Verb may agree with one of the Nouns, and be understood 
with the others : as, Convicta est Messalina et Silius, Messalina was con- 
victed, and Silius. — Tac. 

4. As the first Person is prior to the second, and the second to the 
third, so the Masculine Gender is hold in Grammar superior to the 
Feminine. (1. 2.) 

G. Uponjhupersonal Verbs, see § 157, also § 75, &c. 



134 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

II. Cases of Subject and Complement. § 93-94. 

A. It is commonly stated that ' Copulative Verbs, Finite or Infinite, 
have the same Case after as before them ; ' but this is true only of an 
Attributive or Appositive Complement. The Complement may be a 
Phrase in an Oblique Case with or without a Preposition, or it may be 
an Adverb, and then the rule here cited will fail. Eule § 93 (2) may 
be given for every Nominative Complement ; and the use of the term 
Complement always implies that the Verb of the sentence in question 
is either esse or some other Copulative Verb, Finite or Infinite. See 
§ 87 D. Eules § 94 refer to the important construction of Accusative- 
and-Infinitive in Enunciatio Obliqua, on- which see X. (1). 

B. The Verb sum may be complet^BHBjjfetive, ug& Copulative, if 
it denotes absolute existence: as, JamsH| JJKt, ubi Troja fuit, now 
corn is, where Troy was. — Ov. 



III. The Accusative Case. § 95-103. 

A. When the Verb is Transitive (§ 96), the construction is often 
without sense until a word is added to express that on which the Verb 
acts. This is called the Object (or Nearer Object), and stands in 
the Accusative Case. Thus Romulus condidit, Bomidus founded, is 
incomplete in sense until we add Romam, Borne. Transitive Verbs may 
be called Quid-Verbs. How to change a Transitive Active Sen- 
tence into Passive form, see XIV. E. 1. 

B. (1) Transitive Verbs are sometimes used intransitively; as, Jam 
verterat fortuna, fortune had now turned. — Liv. (2) More often In- 
transitive Verbs become transitive : as, Flet necem fili, he weeps for 
his son's death. (3) The Compound of an Intransitive Verb is often 
transitive: as, Hostes urbem circumsedent, the enemies surround the 
city. (4) Passive Verbs used reflexively sometimes become transitive, 
like Deponents : as, Exuitur cornua, she puts off her horns. — Ov. Hence 
such constructions as Nodo sinus collecta fluentes, having gathered up 
in a knot her flowing folds. — Vieg. 

C. The Verbs which take double Accusative (thing and person) (§98) 
are doceo (and its compounds), rogo, interrogo, ore, exoro, posco, flagito, 
percontor, and, in Horace, lacesso. Sometimes celo, conceal. They may 
be called Quem-Quid Verbs. In Passive construction the Accusa- 
tive of the thing remains : Quid tu docearis a me litteras ? why should 
you be taught letters by me? .^^fct 

D. Factitive or Quid-Quale Verbs i^M BFsiich as may be said 
to make (facere) a thing to be of a cej^B(Bmter, by deed, word, or 
thought: as, (l)facio, effixgo, red^gjpraesto, . creo, lego, eligo, &c; (2) 
dico, voco, mjsmpro, praedjBtt|||^5o, nuncupo, declaro, usurpo, appello, 
saluto, &c.';3Bfip es timcj^B^^ro, credo, existimo, pnto, duco, judico, 
habeo, eense6jP5 10SC0 >^BP^°> reperio, deprehendo, &c, &c. They are 
the Active forms oftM^rwnich in the Passive are Copulative Verbs. In 
their construction esse may be mentally supplied between the Object and 

jComplemejat Factitive Construction in the Passive becomes Copulative : 
^Fis de^gp$i§bis, Fortuna : A Romulo urbs sua Roma vocata est. 



THE ACCUSATIVE CASE. 135 

E. The Accusative of Kespect or Nearer Definition (100) is seldom 
ised in prose, except when it contains Pronominal or semi-adverbial 
xpressions : as, Illud doleo; Hoc laetor; Cetera assentior Crasso, 
n other things I agree with Crassus. — Cic. 

F. (1) Many Grammarians deem the original force of the Accusative 
>ase to be, that it marks the limit or object of motion. § 101. (2) The 
Prepositions in, ad, are generally used by prose writers, if motion to 
>ther places than towns or small islands is mentioned. 

IV. The Dative Case. § 104-109. 

A. "Words whose sense is incomplete without reference to a Eecipient 
105) are called Trajective. Thus carus, dear, necessarily implies, dear 
'o some one ; dare, to give, necessarily implies not only a thing given, but 
i person to whom it is given. Trajective words take a Dative of this 
)bject of reference. Verbs of this sort, if they take a Dative only (as 
oarco, faveo, irascor, &c), are purely Trajective or Cui-Verbs: if they 
:ake an Accusative also, they are T raj ective-Tr ansitive, or Cui- 
(|uid Verbs, as do, narro, spondeo, &c. 

B. The fundamental notion of the Dative (§ 106) seems to be Nearness, 
with its opposite Remoteness. ThePirst Class, then, of Trajective words 
is composed of those which contain the ideas of nearness and remoteness, 
presence and absence, affinity and non-affinity, custom and strangeness, 
fitness and unfitness, likeness and unlikeness, agreement and disagree- 
ment, union and disunion, comparison and contrast. Next, showing and 
being shown is the bringing near or being brought near to the eye, 
ear, or (generally) to the mind. Herein we include the Second Class, 
words of utterance and silence, narration and concealment, affirmation 
and denial, evidence and obscurity, persuasion and dissuasion. We are 
hence led on to the Third Class, a large body of words which express 
application or exhibition with the attendant notion of favour or dis- 
favour. These comprise words which express profit and harm, kind- 
ness and unkindness, bounty and stint, indulgence and grudging, help- 
and obstruction, pleasing and displeasing, pardon and resentment, flat- 
tery and reviling, blessing and malediction, compliance and resistance, 
promise and menace, gift, loan, present, payment, dedication, and re- 
fusal ; delivery and withdrawal ; faith and infidelity, trust and distrust, 

I lawfulness and unlawfulness, ease and difficulty. There are yet a few 
words, which share something of the character of both the two last- 
mentioned classes, and may conveniently form a Fourth Class. These 

| are words which express ride and subservience, command and obedience. 

C. The reason why many Verbs compounded with Particles (106 a.) 
become Trajective, is, that f he Particle confers upon them one or other 
of the notions enumerated above : most frequently that of Nearness. 

D. The reason why a Dativus Conftnodi vel Incommodi (107) may be 
attached to almost any predication, is "evidently because almost any 
action or state may be attended with something of advantage or disad- 
vantage to some one; it may be for or against some one's interest ; it 

\ may be in some way interesting to some one. Thus nubere means ' to 
take the bridal veil,' and a bride is said, ' nubere viro,' ' to take the veil 
for her husband,' that is, ' to marry him.' Vacare means ' to be void,' 
or ' empty:' hence, ' to be disengaged for,' that is, ' to have leisure for :' 



I 



136 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 



as, vacare philosophiae. Such constructions are far-fetched examples of' 
the Trajectiva Gratiae. Here, too, may be ranked the Dativus Ethicus, 
the Dative with sum and its compounds, with Participles, Gerunds, &c. 
and perhaps the Dativus Eei pro Complemento. 

E. Some Adjectives in the classes named prefer the construction of 
ad with Accusative to that of the Dative : such are natus, aptus, utilis, 
idoneus, paratus, rudis, &c. as, Ad laudem et ad decus nati sumus, we 
are born to praise and glory. — Cic. Others use in, erga, adversus : as, 
Acer in hostem, spirited against the foe. — Virg. Benignus erga te fui, 
I was kind towards you. — Piaut. Communis, proprius, affinis, similis, 
par, and some other Adjectives, take a Dative or a Genitive Case. 

F. Some Verbs belonging in sense to the classes named above (B) 
are Quid-Verbs, not Cui-Verbs, and take Accusative and not Dative: 
as, juvo, jubeo, laedo, rego, guberno. Multos castra juvant, the camp 
delights many. Animum rege, rule the temper. — Hon. Others use 
Dative or Accusative : as, tempero, moderor. The construction of 
Verbs varies considerably, owing to the use of Prepositions and other 
causes. Thus we find donare alicui munus and donare aliquem mu- 
nere, invidere alicui, invidere rem alicui, invidere re aliquem. These 
varieties must be observed in reading. 

G. The English Prepositions chiefly used in rendering the Latin Da- 
tive are to and for. Put after some Adjectives and Verbs (iratus, suc- 
censeo, &c.) with must be used ; after some Verbs (disto, aufero, &c), 
from; after many Compound Verbs, upon, into, or against. Others, as 
parco, placeo, displiceo, medeor, &c, are rendered without introducing 
an English Preposition. 

H. The Dative after a Finite Passive Verb is rare : as, Non intelligor 
ulli, I am not understood by anybody. — Ov. So is the Dative after a 
Verb of motion : as, It clamor caelo, a cry ascends to heaven. — Virg. 

V. The Ablative Case. § 110-125. 

A. "When the Ablative stands without a Latin Preposition, it is ren- 
dered with the help of various English Prepositions ; namely, I. Cause, 
by, for, from, through, with, at. II. Instrument, with, by. III. Manner : 
in, with, by. IV. Condition : with, in, upon. V. Quality : of, with. 
VI. Respect, in, by, with. VII. Value or Price : at, for, of, with. VIII. 
Measure : by, or no Preposition. IX. Matter: of, in, with, from, upon, 
for, or no Preposition. X. Time : at, in, within, or no Preposition. XL 
A. Place by which: by, along, upon, through. B. Place where : at, in, 
upon (humi). Gr. Place from which: from. XII. (See Prepositions). 
XIII. Separation and Origin : from, of. XIV. Thing compared : than. 

B. The use of the Simple Ablative in most of these meanings is 
varied considerably by the introduction of Latin Prepositions. Thus 
Cause may be expressed by a£, de, ex, prae ; also by ob, per, propter, 
with Accusative. Agent requires a, ab; while Instrument is with- 
out Preposition. Manner without an Epithet requires ' cum,' (except 
in a few phrases, such as, vi, fraude, jure, injuria, ritu, silentio, arte, 
ordine, &c). Thus, 1 speak with grief, or he writes with diligence, 
cannot be rendered clolore loquor, diligentia, scribit, but cum dolore 
loquor (or dolens loquor), cum diligentia scribit (or diligent er scribit). 



THE ABLATIVE CASE. 137 

If an Epithet is joined to this Ablative, the Preposition is often used, 
often omitted; and observation must determine the choice of con- 
struction : as, Cato summa contentione dixit, Cato spoke with the utmost 
energy. — Cic. Magna cum cura atque diligentia scripsit, he wrote with 
great care and diligence. — Cic. 

C. The Case of Quality, whether Ablative or Genitive, requires an 
Epithet. 

D. The Ablative of Price is used with Verbs and Adjectives implying 
sale, purchase, clearness, cheapness, cost, &c. Muto, I change, may 
have Accusative of what is left, and A.blative of what is taken, or 
(in poetry) the converse. Thus mutare urbem exilio, and mutare urbe 
exilium may equally mean 'to quit the city and go into banishment' 
Pretio is often dropt : as, magno, dear ; parvo, vili, cheap. 

E. The Ablative of Measure defines Verbs and Adjectives of Extent 
and Degree, especially Comparative and Superlative Words : and for 
this purpose in particular are used the Pronominal Ablatives hoc, eo, 
quo, altero, tanto, quanto, aliquanto : also paulo, multo, duplo, dimidio, 
nihilo, nimio, &c. : as, Quo plus habent, eo plus cupiunt, the more they 
have, the more they desire, 

F. The use of Prepositions in defining Time (§ 120) is frequent: as, 
Sol binas in singulis annis reversiones facit, the sun makes two turns in 
each year. —Cic. De die, before the close of day. De nocte, before the 
close of night. De multa nocte, long before the close of night. Sub ves- 
perum, on the approach of evening. Diem ex die expecto, / wait day 
after day. In is usually prefixed to an Ablative of time when a nume- 
ral Adverb is annexed: as, Quidam oves in anno bis tondent, some 
shear sheep twice a year. — Vaer. 

G. 1. Generally Place where (§ 121 B.) is expressed with in: as, In 
portu navigo, I am sailing in harbour. — Sen. In is omitted in certain 
phrases : as, loco (in the stead), multis locis, pluribus locis, &c. ; hoc 
libro, alio libro, &c. ; terra marique ; or where totus is used : as, tota 
Asia, in all Asia, dextra, (parte), on the right hand, laeva, sinistra, on 
the left hand. The poets are more free in the omission : as, Silvisque 
agrisque yiisque corpora foeda jacent, in forests and fields and roads, 
lie revolting corpses. — Ov. But this licence needs discrimination. When 
a work is quoted in is used : as, in Iliade Homeri ; in Andria Terentii ; 
in Gorgia Platonis; but when the author only is cited, apud ; apud 
Homerum ; apud Terentium ; apud Plat on em (in Homer, &c). 

2. That the seeming Genitive, Komae, Corinthi, &c, (§ 121 B. a.) is 
not strictly such, was perceived by ancient Grammarians, who call it an 
Adverb. But if we notice that it ends in i, Romai (Eomae), militiai 
(militiae) Mileti, domi, humi, belli ; and compare the old forms of place 
in the Third Declension ending in i, ruri, Lacedaemoni — Nep. ; Cartha- 
gini — Liv. ; Tiburi — Cic, &c. ; we cannot doubt the original existence 
in the Latin language, as in the Sanskrit, of a Locative Case ending 
in i Singular, in s Plural. 

3. Prepositions are much used with names of towns : as, In Epheso 
est. In Ephesum abii. Ex Epheso hue litteras misi, / sent a letter to 
this place from Ephesus. — Plaut. Has litteras a Brundisio dedit, this 
letter he dated from Brundisium. — Cic. 



138 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

H. The usage of Verbs and Participles of Separation and Origin 
(§ 123) must be carefully observed, some of them taking or omitting the 
Preposition in prose : as, arceo, cedo, moveo, pello, prohibeo, summoveo, 
removeo : others requiring a Preposition in prose, but not in poetry ; as, 
alieno, discedo, disjungo, dispello, disto, diyello, repello, reporto, rejicio, 
segrego, secerno, separo, &c. The chief Participles are natus, prognatus, 
satus, cretus, creatus, editus, oriundus, &c. 

K. 1. The Case of the word with which the Ablative is compared ; 
(§ 124) is much often er a Nominative than an Accusative. In com- 
parispn with other cases quam must be used : as, Nulli flebilior quam 
tibi, Vergili, to none more a cause of weeping than to thee, Vergilius. — 
Hob. Plagiti magis nos pudet quam erroris, we are more ashamed of the 
crime than of the blunder. — Cic. And, in general, for the sake of per- 
spicuity : as, Segnius homines bona quam mala sentiunt, men feel bless- 
ings less keenly than evils. — Liv. 

2. After pins, amplius, minus, an ellipse of qnam often occurs before 
Numerals : as, Eomani paulo plus sexcenti ceciderunt, of the Romans 
rather more than 600 fell.—Liv. Unus is omitted : as, Quinctius tecum 
plus annum vixit, Quinctius lived with you more than a year. — Cic. 

L. 1. The Ablative Absolute (§ 125) being an abridged Clause, the 
Participle may often be transformed into a Finite Verb with Con- 
junction. Thus, in the example, Kegibus exactis = postquam reges 
exacti sunt. 

2. A common instance of Substantive put Absolutely with Substan- 
tive is that of consule or consulibus: as, Caninio consule scito 
neminem prandisse, in the consulship of Caninius you must know that 
nobody dined. — Cic. 

VI. The Genitive Case. § 126-136. 

A. 1. The Genitive is Subjective when it limits a Noun like an 
Attribute ; Objective when it limits it like an Object. It is the same 
thing to say, Sullanus exercitus, or Sullae exercitus, the army of Sidla ; 
flamen Martialis, or flamen Martis, the priest of Mars ; on the other 
hand, cupido pecuniae is nearly the same as cupere pecuniam. But 
Adjectives are even used for the Objective Genitive : as, bellum regium 
for bellum contra regem ; timor externus for timor exterorum. So the 
Possessive Pronouns; as, Desiderium ve strum -ferre non possum,/ 
cannot bear the want of you. — Cic. 'Native of a place'' is expressed 
by an Adjective derived from the place : as, Dionysius Halicarnas- 
seus, for Dionysius Halicarnassi natus, Dionysius of Halicarnassus. 

2. The Possessive Genitive is rendered in English either by of or 
the Genitive in 's : as, Philippi films, ' son of Philip] or ' Philip's son.' 

3. Instar (an undeelined Substantive meaning likeness) stands (with 
a Genitive) in apposition to a Substantive : as, Instar montis equum, a 
horse resembling a mountain, — Vlrg. 

B. (1) Some suppose interest to be for inter rem est, refert for rem 
fert, and mea, &c, to be corruptions of meam, &c. (§ 129). (2) These 
Verbs may be qualified by the Genitives of Value, magni, parvi, pluris, 
tanti, quanti: as, Utriusque nostrum magni interest ut te videam, 
it is of great importance to both of us that I see you. — Cic. 



THE GENITIVE CASE. 139 

C. 1. The Grenitivus Kei Distributae (§ 130) and Genitivus Eei De- 
aensae (§ 131) are so far the same, as that each is a divided whole; 
>ut the former is numerically or quotatively divided, the latter quanti- 
atively : the former is Plural unless it be a Collective Noun ; the 
atter usually, but not always, Singular. The Partitive words which 
listribute the former Genitive are (a) Pronominals : as, alius, alter, 
iter, uterque, utervis, uterlibet, ullus, nullus, nemo, plerique, multi, 
)auci, ceteri, reliqui, solus, qui, quis, quicumque, quisquis, quisque, unus- 
juisque, tot, quot, quctcumque, quotusquisque, quisnam, quisquam, ali- 
_}uis, quidam, quispiam, &c. ()8) Numerals, Cardinal and Ordinal : 
inus, primus : duo, secundus, &c. ; also princeps, medius. (7) Com- 
oarative and Superlative Adjectives ; the former distributing two things : 
.is, Major Neronum; or one class into two parts: as, Avium loquaciores, 
.the noisier sort of birds. — Pun. Also Superlative Adverbs, in which 
Gender cannot appear. (5) Any Adjective, Participle, or Substantive 
which can imply a distributive meaning : as, Sancte deorum ; lecti 
juvenum ; piscium feminae. 

2. Partitives are sometimes attracted in Gender from the Genitive to 
the Subject: as, Indus est omnium fluminum maximus, the Indus 
is the largest of all rivers. — Cic. Or varied by Synesis : as Dulcissime 
rerum, dearest of beings. — Hon. 

3. A Collective Noun is distributed: as, Plato totius Graeciae 
doctissimus fuit, Plato was the most learned man of all Greece. — 
Cic. 

4. This Genitive forms a Complement: as, Fies nobilium tu quoque 
f ontium, thou too shalt become one of the renowned fountains. — Hoe. 

5. Adverbs of Place, ubi, quo, eo, nusquam, &c. are Partitively used 
with the Genitives gentium, locorum, terrarum, &c. : as, Nusquam 
gentium, nowhere in the world. — Lrv. 

6. Primus, ultimus, summus, imus, extremus, and other like Ad- 
jectives are used as Epithets with Partitive force: as, Prima luce 
summus mons a Labieno tenebatur, at break of day the top of the 
mountain was occupied by Labienus. — Caes. 

J). Among Quantitative words governing a Genitive (§131) are, nihil, 
satis, affatim, abunde, nimis, partim, minus, minimum, parum, aliud, id, 
illud, hoc, idem, quod, quid, aliquid, quidquid, quidquam, multum, plus, 
plurimum, tantum, quantum, aliquantum, nimium, dimidium. They 
are usually rendered in English as agreeing with the thing measured : 
as, nimium pecuniae {too much money) \ nihil mali {no evil). They may 
also be followed by the Genitive of an Adjective of the Second Declen- 
sion ; but an Adjective of the Third is commonly put in the same Case 
with the word of Quantity : as, Ne quid falsi dicere audeas, ne quid 
veri non audeas, you should dare to say nothing false, nothing true not 
dare to say. — Cic. Nee viget quicquam simile aut secundum, and no- 
thing exists like or in second rank. — Hon. 

E. Among poetic Genitives (§ 135) are these: (1) Cause: as, Lauda- 
bat leti juvenem, he praised the young man for his death. (2) Ee- 
spect : as, seri studiorum, late in your studies. (3) Dominion: as, 
Daunus agrestium regnavit populorum, Daunus ruled over rustic tribes, 
&c. 



140 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

VII. The Verb Infinite. § 140-144. 

A. The Infinitive used in direct predication (§ 140, 2.) is called the 
Historic Infinitive. It appears in poetry as well as in prose narrative, 
(a) in passages descriptive of strong emotion ; (b) where various actions 
take place simultaneously or in immediate sequence ; (c) in actions in- 
terrupted, and from time to time repeated. It is analogous to the ellipse! 
of the Copula ; in fact, both constructions occur together : as, Ceterum J 
facies totius negoti varia, incerta, foeda atque miserabilis ; dispersi J 
suis pars cedere, alii insequi: neque signa neque ordines obser-i 
vare: ubi quemque periculum ceperat, ibi resist ere ac propul 
sare; arma, tela, equi, viri, hostes, cives permixti; nihil consilio 
neque imperio agi; fors omnia regere, now the aspect of the whole 
affair was confused, indecisive, shocking, and pitiable. Parties scattered 
from their comrades were some retiring, others advancing ; observing 
neither standards nor ranks ; where peril encountered each man, there 
was he resisting and repelling ; arms, darts, steeds, men, foes, country- 
men were intermingled ; nothing was proceeding by counsel or command; 
chance directed all. — Sael. This Infinitive is not Present, but Im- 
perfect. 

B. 1. The Infinitive is called Prolative when it carries on the con-d 
struction of Verbs which express ability, desire, custom, beginning, ceasing, 
seeming, being thought, being said, &c. ; as, possum, queo, nequeo, debeo, 
volo, nolo, malo, aveo, cupio, gestio, amo, soleo, coepi, incipio, statuo, 
pergo, conor, meditor, paro, cesso, desino, videor, putor, credor, feror, 
dicor, trador, memoror, &c. Among these Verbs, those which are Copu- 
lative (videor, credor, existimor, putor, dicor, narror, feror, trador, re- 
perior, arguor, &c.) are used personally with a Prolative Infinitive 
rather than impersonally with Accusative and Infinitive. Thus it is 
better Latin to say, Videtur errasse Cicero, than Videtur errasse Cicer- 
onem ; Dicitur Homerus caecus fuisse, than Dicitur Homerum caecum 
fuisse. The Participle Passive is often found in poetry after such Verbs 
with an ellipse of esse : as Fertur Prometheus co actus, &c, Prometheus 
is said to have been compelled, &c. — Hon. The law of this construction 
should be carefully observed. 

2. The construction of a Prolative Infinitive with Adjectives abounds 
in poetry, especially lyric ; as, Audax omnia perpeti, bold to endure 
all things. — Hon. Pruges consumere nati, born to consume the 
fruits. — Hor. In the best prose it is used but with few words; as, 
Paratus, assuetus, &c. ; but Tacitus adopts it freely. 

C. Under the Dative Gerund (§ 141, 3.) note the phrase, non esse sol- 
vendo, to be insolvent-, and the use of the Dative Gerund and Gerundive 
in describing functions of office ; as, Triumviri agro dando, triumvirs 
for assigning land, &c. 

D. The Transitive Gerund is not always attracted (§ 143): as, Efferor 
studio pat res vestros videndi, I am rapt with the desire of seeing 
your sires. — Cic. Especially when a Neuter Pronoun or Adjective is 
the Object: as, Pars honest! versatur in tribuendo suum cinque, one 
branch of morality lies in giving each his own. — Cic. Parva non con- 
temnendo majores nostri maximam hanc rem fecerunt, by not despising 
small things our ancestors made this commonwealth very great. — Liv. 
But, as a general rule, the Gerundive attraction is used. 



REFLEXIYE PXOXOUNS. 141 

VIII. The Kefeexive Pbonouns. § 145. 

A. Personal and Possessive Pronouns of the Pirst and Second Per- 
ms may be used renexively ; that is, they may be referred to a Subject 
f their own Person. But se and suus diner from the rest, inasmuch as 
liey cannot be used unless there be a Noun of their own (the Third) 
'erson, expressed or understood, to which they are referred. Although 
re can say amat me, he loves one ; amat te, he loves thee ; we cannot say, 
mo se, amas se, but amo eum, 2 love him; amas eum, thou lovest him) 
tot culpo suum factum, but culpo ejus factum, I blame his deed. 

B. The reference of se or situs to the Object is not ambiguous (a) if 
he Pronoun is an adjunct to the Subject, as in the first and third ex- 
amples under § 145, a. ; (b) if the Subject is not of the Third Person, 
is in the second example; (c) if the context shows that the Pronoun 
cannot be referred to the Grammatical Subject: as, Scipio suas res 
Syracusanis restituit, Scipio restored to the Syracusans their pro- 
perty. — Lit. To suppose that Scipio restored his own property to the 
Syracusans would be absurd. The Object to which se, suus, are re- 
ferred, usually precedes: except the Distributive Pronoun quisque, 

vvhich, if so used, generally follows them. So, Sui cuique mores fin- 
*unt fortunam, his own character moulds each man's fortune. — Nep. 
When se, suus, would be improper, in some places is used the Pronoun 

:ls, in others the Pronoun ipse: as, Chilius te rogat, et ego ejus rogatu, 
Chilius requests you and I at his request. — Cic. Caesar milites in- 
3usavit cur de sua virtute et de ipsius diligentia desperarent, Ccesar 

.reproachfully asked his troops why they despaired of their ovm vedour 
mid of his carefulness. — Caes. 

IX. The Conjunctive Mood. § 148. 

The Indicative Mood states absolutely, the Conjunctive contingently. 
The Conjunctive is called pure when it is in the predication of a prin- 
cipal Sentence. Its pure uses are various : 

(1) Potential: as, Ita amicos pares, thus you may get friends. 

Dixerit aliquis, some one may say. 

(2) Conditional : „ Velim tecum esse, I should wish to be with you. 

Crederes victos, you would have supposed them 
vanquished. 

(3) Concessive : „ Age dicat, well, he may speak. 

Puerit sapiens, suppose he were wise. 

!(4) Optative: ,, Valeant cives mei, may my countrymen flourish! 
Ne vivam si, &c, may I not live if, &c. 
(5) Dubitative : „ Paveas tu hosti ? must you favor a foe ? 
Quid faciam ? what am I to do? 
(6) Hortative : ,, Imitemur bonos, Let us imitate the good. 

Kem tuam curares, you should have been minding 
your own business. 

X. Substantival Clauses, and Dependence on Oeatio Obliqua. 

§ 149-151. 

I. Every Simple Sentence is either (1) a Statement (E nunc a 
(2) a Command or Eequest (Petitio), or (3) a Question 
rogatio). As (1) P.sittacus loquitur, the pan ot speaks. (2) Loquere, 



142 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

psittace, speak, parrot. (3) Loquiturne psittacus ? does the parrot 
speak ? When any of these is a Principal Sentence, it is said to be 
Direct (Kecta Oratio); when it is a dependent Substantival Clause, 
it is said to be Oblique (Obliqua Oratio). 

A Substantival Clause is one which may take the place of a Sub- 
stantive (as Subject, Object, or Apposite), being (1) Oblique Enun- 
ciation, (2) Oblique Petition, (3) Oblique Interrogation. 

( 1 ) The principal form which Oblique Enunciation takes is the Accu- 
sative and Infinitive (§ 94.), which is either Subject of the Copula est j - 
or an Impersonal Verb, or Object of one of the Verba Sentiendi et De- 
clarandi. Grammatical writers sometimes have this construction alone 
in view when they use the term Oblique Oration : but incorrectly ; for 
it is but one, though the most important, form of Oblique Oration. As, 
Facinus est vinciri civ em Komanum, it is a crime for a Roman 
citizen to be put in chains.* — Cic. Thales dixit aquam esse initium 
rerum, Thales said that water is the origin of the universe. — Cic. 

Constructions used for the Accusative and Infinitive are : 

a. Ut, with Subjunctive, in Oblique Enunciation, implies conse- 

quence, expediency, duty, necessity, custom, law, &c. Quod, 
with Indicative (usually), implies fact : as, 

Mea refert ut venias, It is important to me that you 
come. 

Necesse est (ut) venias, You must needs come. 

Oportet (ut) venias, You ought to come. 

Tj5 e g ± } ut civitates sua jura habeant. 

It is expedient (useful) that the states have their rights. 
Gaudemus ) »' . ,, , . ■, , 

Gratumestf quod civitates sua jura habent. 

We are glad that the states have their rights. 

b. Verbs of hoping and promising prefer the Accusative with Future 

Infinitive: as, 

Spero te venturum (esse), I hope that you will come. 
Pollicetur se venturum (esse), he promises that he 
will come. 

c. After expressions of fearing, danger, &c, ne means lest, ut lest 

not: as, 

Metuo ne redeat, I fear lest he return (=1 fear he will 

return). 
Metuo ut redeat, I fear lest he return not ( = I fear he will 

not return), 

d. Interrogatio Infinitiva (or Accusative and Infinitive interro- 

gatively used with ellipse of Finite Verb) asks an indignant 
question: as, 

Mene incepto desistere ? What, I abandon my design ? 

(2) Oblique Petition is formed when ut, ne, depend on Verbs of en- 
treating, commanding, forbidding, allowing, persuading, caring, en- 
deavouring, effecting, preventing, &c. : as, Oro ut venias ; Cura ut valeas : 
Vide ne facias ; Enitendum est ut vincamus, ne vincamus, &c. Fieri 
non potest ut veniam, I cannot possibly come. Ut and ne are often 
omitted : as, Precor reddas ; fac venias ; cave dicas ; licet abeas, &c. 



SUBSTANTIVAL CLAUSES. 143 

(3) Oblique Interrogation is formed by Interrogative s dependent on 
Verbs of stating, enquiring, &c. § 149. Here too an Interrogative 
sometimes falls out: as, Interrogatur, tria pauca sint anne multa, It 
is questioned whether three things are few or many. — Cic. 

II. A Clause dependent on Oblique Oration may be called Sub- 
oblique (Subobliqua). A Clause is virtually Suboblique 
(Subobliquae potestatis), if it depends on Oratio Kecta so con- 
stituted as to be virtually Oblique, that is, containing the state- 
ment of somebody's thought, judgment, or declaration. Thus, in the 
Compound Sentence, ' Laudat Africanum Panaetius, quod fuerit absti- 
nens,' the Principal Sentence, Laudat, &c, is virtually Oblique, and the 
Clause, quod, &c, virtually Suboblique : the sense being Panaetius 
praises Africanus (=says Africanus is to be praised) because he was 
self-denying. Hence fuerit is Subjunctive, although the Conjunction 
quod is one of the Second Class, to which the Indicative is appropriate. 

XL Advekbial Clauses. 

A. An Adverbial Clause modifies the Principal Sentence like an Ad- 
verb, and is introduced by Conjunctions (1) Consecutive, (2) Final, 
(3) Causal, (4) Temporal, (5) Conditional, (6) Concessive, (7) Com- 
parative. Lists of these Conjunctions appear §152. 

Examples of Subjunctive in Adverbial Clauses : 

(1) Non tarn amens est ut eat, He is not so mad as to go. 
Non ita amens fuit ut iret, He was not so mad as to go. 
Adeo prudens est ut non ierit, He is so prudent that he 

went not. 
Tarn catus erat ut nihil diceret, He was so shrewd as to say 

nothing. 
Tarn catus fuit ut nihil dixerit, He was so shrewd that he 

said nothing. 
Tantum abest ut Eomae sit, ut in Britanniam ierit, 

He is so far from being at Borne, that he has gone to Britain. 
Tantum abfuit ut Eomae esset, ut in Britanniam ivis- 

set, He was so far from being at Borne, that he had gone to 

Britain. 

(2) Edo ut vivam, I eat that I may live. 

Vivebant ut ederent, They lived that they might eat. 
Obedi rationi ne servias appetitui, obey reason, that you 
may not be a slave to appetite. 

(3) Quae cum ita sint, ibo, Since this is the case, I will go. 
Quae cum ita essent, ivi, Since this was the case, I went. 

(4) Expecta dum veniam, Wait till I come. 
Expectabam dum venirent, I was waiting till they came. 

(5) Oderint dum metuant, Let them hate provided they fear, 

(6) Ut peccet, carus est, Though he sin, he is dear. 
Quamvis peccasset, carus erat, Though he had sinned, he 

was dear. 

(7) Obtundis tanquam surdus sim, You stun me as if I was deaf. 
Obtundebas quasi surdus essem, You stunned me as though 

I were deaf 



144 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

B. Conditional Sentences require special notice. 

A Conditional Sentence (si, if: nisi, unless) contains a Protasis or 
Conditional Clause, and an Apodosis (Statement or Principal Sentence): 
as, If you Wee (Protasis), you shall go (Apodosis). 

Its main forms in Latin are these : 

I. Si peccas doles, \ Here both Verbs are Indicative, and 

If y oil sin you grieve. \ no suggestion is made of proba- 

Si peccabis dolebis, bility or improbability (Sumptio 

If you sin you will grieve. ) Dati). 

II. Si pecces doleas, w -, ,, T7 , n • , . 

T /. r . . Here both Verbs are Conjunctive 

It iimi. worn in Ri)i vnm ttmi. _ ... J 



If you were to sin now, you [ 
would grieve ; or, If you I 



Present, and there is a suggestion 
of probability (Sumptio Dandi). 



Here both Verbs are Conjunctive, 
either Imperfect or Pluperfect; 
and an imaginary case is sug- 
gested, which has not actually 
occurred (Sumptio Ficti). 



shall sin, you will grieve. 
III. Si peccares, doleres, 

Were you to sin, you would} 
grieve. 

Si peccasses, doluisses, 
If you had sinned, you would 

have grieved. 
Si peccas r ses, doleres, 
If you had sinned, you would t 
(now) be grieving. 
In Oblique Oration these Sentences become : 

I II Aio te si Decces i clolere ( for doles )' 
1. 11. Aio te, si P^ces, | doliturum egge< 

III. Aiebam te, si peccares, doliturum esse. 

— ■ ■ — si peccasses, doliturum fuisse. 

XII. Adjectival Clauses. 

A. These are related to the Principal Sentence like Adjectives, and 
introduced by the Kelative or one of its Particles. See Eule, § 150. 

B. Quominus, quin, require special notice. 

(1) Quominus (=ut eo minus) follows Verbs and Phrases expressing 
impediment. (2) Quin ( = qui non) follows Negative expressions and 
Interrogations. (3) Quin ( = quod non) follows Negative and Interroga- 
tive expressions of doubt, prevention, prohibition, &c. Examples: — 

(1) Nihil obstat quominus earn, Nothing stops me from going. . 
Per me stetit quominus ires, / was the cause of your not going. 

(2) Quis est quin fleat ? Who is there but weeps ? 
Nemo fuit quin fleret, There was none but wept. 

(3) Nihil dubito quin gaudeant, I have no doubt they rejoice. 
Nihil dubitabam quin gauderent, I had no doubt they rejoiced. 
Quid causae est quin gaudeant ? What reason is there why they 

shall not rejoice ? 

XIII. Consecution of Tenses. 
A. Examples of Consecution (see those in XI., XII.). 

Uuaero > ^^ agas, quid egeris, quid acturus sis. 

Quaerebam \ 

Quaesivi f quid ageres, quid egisses, quid aetunis esses. 

Quaesivemmj 



ADDITAMEXTA MEMORABILIA. 145 

B. If the Perfect is Present-Past (/ have inquired), it is strictly a 
Primary Tense, and should hare Primary Consecution; but Cicero 
\ generally constructs it, even in that sense, with Historic Consecution. 

XIV. Additamenta aEemorabilia. 

A. Negatives : — 

a. Non, haud, deny : ne prohibits. Haud is chiefly used with Ad- 
jectives and Adverbs : as, res haud dubia ; haud temere, &c. And 

| with a few Verbs : as, haud scio, haud dubito. 

b. Ne . . . quidem has the emphatic word or words between the Par- 
ticles : as, Ne tu quidem, not even you. Either the Verb precedes with 
another Negative : as, Non praetereundum est ne id quidem, even that 
should not be passed over. — Cic. ; or it follows without one: as, Ne ad 
Catonem quidem provocabo, / will not appeal even to Cato. — Cic. Ne- 
dum, with Subjunctive, shows that something is denied a fortiori, when 
compared with what was denied before. See § 147. 

e. The Pronominal words quisquam, ullus, unquam, usquam, &c, are 
used with a Negative or Dubitative Particle : as, non, haud, si, num, &c, 
quisquam, ullus, &c. The Negative is contained in nemo (ne-homo), 
nullus (ne ullus), nunquam, nusquam, nequicquam, nequaquam, &c. 

d. In Negative Consecutive Clauses are used ut non, ut nemo, ut 
nullus, ut nunquam, ut nusquam, &c; but in Pinal Clauses ne, ut ne, 
ne quis, ut ne quis, ne quando, ut ne quando, ne quo, ut ne quo, &c. 

e. Non quod (generally), non quo, non quin (always), take a Sub- 
junctive. 

/. Por et nemo, write nee quisquam ; for et nihil, neque quiequam ; 
for et nullus, neque ullus ; for et nunquam, neque unquam, &c. ; for aio 
non, nego. 

g. Neque (nee) is used for et non, except when the negative emphasis 
falls on a single word : as, Quaestio difficilis est et non profutura. 

h. Non nihil, something) nihil non, everything-, non nunquam, some- 
times ; nunquam non, always, &c. ; non potui non ire, / could not but go. 

B. Single and Double Questions. 

a. Single : Nonne expects the answer Yes ; num, the answer No ; 

-ne is indifferent ; an often implies surprise, expecting a nega- 
tive answer. 

b. Double. The forms are : 

utrum an (or) 

num an (or) 

-ne an (or) 

— an, anne (or). 

A negation in the second member is annon or necne. 

a. Qualis est tua mens? potesne dicere? What sort of thing is your 

mind ? can you tell ? — Cic. 
An tu me tristem esse putas ? Do you think I am downcast ? — 

Plaut. 
Num negare audes ? Do you, venture to deny ? — Cic. 
Canis nonne similis lupo est ? Is not a clog like a wolf? — C:c. 

b. Haec utrum abundantis an egentis signa sunt? Are these the 

tokens of one who abounds or lacks ? — Cic. 
H 



146 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

Num duas habetis patrias an est ilia patria communis ? Have you 
two countries, or is this your common country r ? — Cic. 

Romamne venio an hie maneo an Arpinum fugio 1 Do I come to 
Borne, or stay here, or flee to Arpinum? — Cic. 

Quaeram jnstum sit necne poema, / will enqxdre whether it be a 
true poem or not. — Hob. 

C. Prepositions : 

a. Tenus follows its Case, which is often a Genitive : as, Taurotenus, 
as far as Mount Taurus; nutricum tenus, as far as the breasts. 

b. Ante, circa, circnm, circiter, citra, extra, infra, intra, juxta, pone, 
post, prope, supra, ultra, clam, coram, palam, super, subter, may be 
used as Adverbs. 

c. Among idiomatic Phrases formed by Prepositions, observe : (1) 
Ad: ad tempus, for a time ; ad multam noctem, till late at night; ad 
uniim, to a man ; ad tibiam canere, to sing to the flute; ad hoc, further- 
more ; ad extremum, at the last; ad summum, in fine ; ad verbum, word 
for word; &&vingViem,toanicety; ad amussim, accurately; ad decern 
annos, ten years hence ; servi ad rernurn, slaves for rowing ; ad judices, 
before the judges ; insignis ad laudem, eminent in renown ; nihil ad te, 
nothing compared with you. (2) Per: per noctem, during the night; 
per litteras, by letter; per jocum, in jest; per deos te oro, I pray you Ly 
the gods ; per me licet, I give leave ; res per se expetenda, a thing in 
itself desirable. (3) A, ab : a fronte, in the van; a tergo, in the rear; 
a millibus passuum duobus, two miles off; prope abest a mari, he is near 
the sea; philosophus a Platone, a Platonic philosopher ; hoc a me facit, 
this is on my side ; proximus a rege, next to the king ; ab animo aeger 
sum, I am sick at heart ; a doctrina instructus, well informed ; servusa 
pedibus, a footman; a manu, an amanuensis. (4) De: de nocte, in 
the night ; de die, in the daytime ; de meo, from my own purse ; de 
marmore, of marble; de more, according to custom; de industria, on 
purpose ; de novo, afresh; justis de causis,/or good reasons; de Parthis 
triumphavit, he triumphed over the Parthians. (5) E, ex: diem ex die, 
day after day; ex pedibus laborat, he has the gout in his feet; e repub- 
lican for the good of the state ; heres ex asse, universal heir ; ex impro- 
vise, by surprise ; ex tempore, ojfliand ; e vestigio, suddenly ; e regione 
Massiliae, opposite Marseilles. (6) Prae: prae me beatus es, you are 
happy compared with me; prae dolore tacet, he is silent from grief. (7) 
Pro: pro foribus, before the door; pro certo, for a fact ; pro viribus, 
according to one's powers; pro tua humanitate, such is your courtesy ; 
pro re nata, in existing circumstances; pro eo ac potui, according to my 
ability. (8) In : a. frumentum binis assibus in modium, com at two 
asses a peck ; dormire in lucem, to sleep till daylight ; vocat me ad 
cenam in hortos in proximum diem, he invites me to dine the next day 
in his pleasure-grounds ; in hunc modum locutus est, he spoke in this 
wise ; in praesens, for the time being ; in horas, from hour to hour ; 
in aeternum, for ever ; in universum, generally ; in vicem, in turns. 
£. in incerto, in doubt; in praesenti, at this moment; is in aere meo 
est, lie is in my debt ; hie non modo in aere alieno nullo, sed in suis 
numis multis est, this man is not only out of debt, but has much ready 
money of his own ; films in manu patris, a son in his father's power ; 
"in tua manu hoc est, this is in your power. 



ADDITAMENTA MEMORABILIA. 147 



D. Participles : 

a. The Participles are important elements in Latin, as in Greek, con- 
traction. But the Latin language is less rich in Participles than the 
freek. 

b. A Participle is the Attribute of one that acts, or has acted, or will 
ct ; of one that is being acted on, or has been acted on, or will be 
cted on : to which we must add, of one that is meet for being acted 
n. A Greek Verb regularly and fully conjugated has Participles (in- 
luding the Verbal in r4os) representing all these categories ; but Latin 
fcrbs with Active and Passive Conjugation have the first, third, fifth, 

| ,nd seventh (the Present Act., Future Act., Perfect Pass., and Gerun- 
dive) Participles, but want the second, fourth, and sixth, that is, the 
r'erfect Active, Present Pass., and Future Pass. Participles. For the 
!;xerundive must not be regarded as Future, though it may in some 
, ' daces contain the notion of future time. 

c. Deponent Verbs Intransitive have three Participles : Present and 
Tuture, both of which are Active in form and sense, and Perfect, which 
s Passive in form, but Active in sense: as, labor, labens, lapsurus, 
apsus. To these, Transitive Deponents add the Gerundive in dus : as, 
)atior, patiens, passurus, passus, patiendus. 

d. The want of a Perfect Participle Act., in Active Verbs, is sup- 
)lied in Latin either by the Finite Verb Active, with Relative or Par- 
icle, or by an Ablative Absolute Passive : as, Tarquinium regem qui 
ion tulerim, Sicinium feram ? Having refused to endure Tarquin as 
'ring, shall I endure Sicinius ? — Liv. Alexander, quum interemisset 
^litum, vix a se manus abstinuit, Alexander, having slain Clitus, hardly 
*ef rained from suicide. — Cic. Pompeius, cap t is Hierosolymis, 
rictor ex illo fano nihil attigit, Pompeius, having taken Jerusalem, in 
the very flush of victory, meddled with nothing belonging to that temple. 
—Cic. 

e. The want of a Present Participle Passive is supplied by the Finite 
Passive Verb with Relative or Particle: as, Pueri, qui — quum — dum 
locentur, discunt = Greek ol 7ra?5es didaffKOfMsvoi fxapOdvovcri, Children 
by being taught learn. Rarely the Perf. Participle takes a Present 
Passive sense: as, Sperata victoria (Lrv.) = victoria quae speratur. 

/. A Future Participle Passive is not often used even in Greek. In 
Latin the Finite Verb with Relative stands for it : as, Grata super- 
I veniet quae non sperabitur hora, Welcome will arrive the hour thai 
shall be never hoped for. — Hon. 

g. The Perfect Participles of some Deponent and Semi-Deponent 
Verbs are occasionally found in a Present Active sense : as, ausus, 
fisus, diffisus, gavisus, ratus, solitus, usus, veritus : as, Caesar, veritus 
.ae noctu hostes profugerent, duas legiones in armis excubare jubet, 
Ccssar, fearing the enemy would escape in the night, ordered two legions 
to keep watch under arms. — C^es. See § 62 Note. 

h. Many Participles are used as mere Adjectives: as, negligens, 
patiens, sapiens, doctns, venerandus tremendus, &c. Many appear as 

h2 



1 



148 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 



Substantives. Such are, amans, adolescens, sponsus; nupta, sponsa, 
coeptum, dictum, factum, praeceptum, &c. The nouns, man, men, thing, 
&c, are frequently to be understood with Participles : as, Jacet corpus 
dormientis ut mortui, The body of a sleeping person often lies as of 
one dead. — Cic. Grande locuturi nebulas Helicone legunto, They that 
would utter a sublime strain must cull mists from Helicon. — Pers. Male 
part a male dilabuntur, El gotten, ill go. — Cic. Beatos duco, qui aut 
faciunt scribenda, aut scribunt loquenda, I deem them happy, who 
either do things fit to be written, or write things fit to be spoken. — Pld*. 
See § 142. Also § 107 d. 

E. Active and Passive Construction : 

a. When an Active Transitive Sentence is changed into Passive Con- 
struction, the Object becomes Subject, and the Subject becomes Ablative 
of the Agent : as, 

Act. Egregie consul rem gessit. 
Pass. Egregie ab consule res gesta est. 

The consul conducted the affair excellently. — Liv. 

b. When an Active Intransitive Sentence is changed into Passive 
Construction, that Construction is Impersonal; the Subject becoming 
Ablative of the Agent ; as, 

Act. Hostes constanter pugnabant. 
Pass. Ab hostibus constanter pugnabatur. 
The enemy fought steadily. — Caes. 

c. If the Active Verb had a Genitive, Dative, or Ablative Case with 
it, the Passive Construction retains that Case : as, 

Act. Medicinae nos indigemus. 
Pass. Medicinae a nobis indigetur. 

We need medicine. — Cic. 
Act. Mihi isti nocere non possunt. 
Pass. Mihi ab istis noceri non potest. 

They cannot hurt me. — Cic. 
Act. Litibus et jurgiis supersedere vos aequum est. 
Pass. Litibus et jurgiis supersedes aequum est. 

It is fair for you to abandon strife and vjrangling, — Liv. 

(a) The Ablative of the Agent, like a Pronoun Subject, is often under- 
stood in the Impersonal Construction; as, Itur in antiquam silvam, 
They go into an ancient forest. — Virg, Nunc est bibendum, Now we 
must drink. — Hon. 

(b) Hence it appears that Passive Verbs govern the same Cases as 
Active Verbs, except only the Accusative of the Object. 

(c) Quasi-Passive Verbs (§ 72) have the construction ? of Verbs Pas- 
sive ; as, Testis ab reo fustibus vapulavit, The witness was beaten with 
cudgels by the defendant. — Quint. Malo a cive spoliari quam ab hoste 
venire, I would rather be stript by a citizen, than be sold by a foe. — Quint. 

F. Summary of Impersonal Construction : 
a. Case-construction. 

(1) Accusative of Person with Genitive of Thing: 
Piget, pudet, paenitet, taedet, miseret. § 134. 



ADDITAMENTA MEMORABILIA. 149 

(2) Accusative of the Object : 
Oportet, taedet, piget, pudet, paenitet, decet, dedecet, de- 
lectat, juvat, fallit, fugit, are Transitive. 

(3) Dative: 
Libet, licet, liquet, patet, accidit, contingit, convenit, evenit, 

expedit, placet, restat, vacat, opus est, necesse est, are Tra- 
jective. 

(4) Ad with Accusative : attinet, pertinet, conducit. 

b. Subject-construction. 

(1) Verb-noun Infinitive : 
Oportet, opus est, taedet, piget, pudet, paenitet, decet, de- 
decet, libet, licet, attinet, pertinet, contingit, convenit, 
expedit, placet, praestat, restat, vacat, delectat, juvat, in- 
terest, refert, necesse est. 

(2) Infinitive Clause (Enunciatio Obliqua) : 
Oportet, opus est, decet, dedecet, licet, liquet, patet, attinet, 

pertinet, accidit, contingit, convenit, placet, praestat, restat, 
juvat, fallit, fugit, interest, refert, constat, necesse est. 

(3) Subjunctive Clause with ut (for Infinitive Clause) : 

Oportet, opus est, licet, accidit, contingit, evenit, est, fit, ex- 
pedit, placet, praestat, restat, interest, refert, necesse est. 

(4) Subjunctive Clause omitting ut : 
Oportet, licet, necesse est. 

(5) Indicative Clause with quod (for Infinitive Clause) : 

Piget, pudet, paenitet, taedet, miseret, accidit, delectat, juvat, 
fallit, fugit, interest, refert. 

(6) Subject included in the meaning of the Verb: 

Piget, pudet, paenitet, taedet, miseret : also Impersonals im- 
plying changes of season and weather: as, pluit, tonat, 
fulgurat, &c, and Passive Impersonals. See E. b. c. 

(a) The following Deponent Perfects are occasionally used : 

Pertaesum est ; pigitum est : pudkum est ; miseritum est ; 
libitum est ; licitum est ; placitum est. 

(b) The following Verbs joined with Impersonal Infinitives become 
Impersonal: coepit, debet, desinit, potest, solet, incipit: as, Pig ere 
eum facti coepit, he began to be sorry for the act. — Just. Perveniri 
ad summa, nisi ex principiis, non potest, the highest things cannot be 
reached, except from "principles.— ^Quint. 

Ct. Summary of Eules for Time, Place, and Space : 

a. (1) Time during which: 

Accusative ; Accus. with per ; rarely Ablative. 

(2) Time at which, within which, &c. : 

Ablative ; Prepositions with their Cases. 

b. (1) Place where : 

Ablative with in ; Accusative with ad or apud. 



150 NOTES ON SYNTAX. 

But if town, small island, or domus, humus, militia, bellum, rus : 

Singular Case in ae, i or e ; Plural Case in is or ibus, 
without a Preposition : as, Eomae, militiae, Corintlii, 
domi, humi, belli, ruri, Tibure, Athenis, Gadibus, &c. 

(2) Place whither : 

Accusative with ad or in. 
But if town, small island, domus, rus, &c. : 

Accusative without Preposition usually. 

(3) Place whence : 

Ablative with ab or ex. 
But if town, small island, domus, rus, &c. : 

Ablative without Preposition usually. 

c. (1) Space intervening : 

Accusative ; as, Aberam ab Amano iter unius diei, / was 
one day' s journey from Amanus. — Cic. 

Or Ablative of Measure; as, Aesculapii templum quinque 
millibus passuum ab Epidauro distat, the temple of Aes- 
culapius is five miles from Epidaurus. — Liv. 

(2) Space traversed : 

Accusative; as, Millia turn pransi tria repimus, then 
after dining we creep on three miles. — Hoe. 

(3) Space of measurement : 

Accusative, §102; or Ablative, §118; or Genitive of 
Quality ; as, Areas latas pedum denum facito, you 
must make barn-floors ten feet wide. — Coxtjm. 



III. NOTES ON PEOSODY. 

Metre : — 

A. (a) Dactylic Hexameter or Senarius. 

This Metre has six feet. The first four may be Dactyls or Spondees. 
The fifth must be a Dactyl (rarely a Spondee). The sixth a Spondee. 

Scheme. 

1 2 3 4 5 6 



\j I — 



Examples. 

1. Siceli|des Mu|sae n pau|lo ma|jora ca|nemus. 

2. Non 6m|nes ar|busta i| ju|vant humi|lesque my|ricae. 

A break in a word, called Caesura, is usually made after the first 
syllable of the third foot, as after -sae, in (1). This is called a 
strong Caesura. If the break occurs after the second syllable of a 
Dactyl, as after -ta in (2), it is called a weak Caesura. Occasionally, 



NOTES ON PHOSODY. 151 

the chief Caesura occurs after the first syllable of the fourth foot, as in 
the following verse : 

Clamojres simul | horren | dos n ad | sidera \ tollit. 
The Heroic Measure of Epic poets, Virgil, Lucan, &c, consists of 
Dactylic Hexameters only. 

(b) Dactylic Pentameter : 

This Verse consists of two parts, called Penthemimers, which are 
kept distinct. The first Penthemimer contains two feet (Dactyls or 
Spondees) and a long syllable. The second contains also two feet 
(both Dactyls) and a long syllable. 

Scheme. 

12 12 



_ \^ w 



Example. 
Tu pater | et ma|ter || tu mihi | frater e|ras. 

This Verse is not used alone, but follows an Hexameter in the Ele- 
giac Distich : as, 

Donee eris felix, multos numerabis amicos, 
Tempora si fuerint nubila, solus eris. 

The chief Elegiac poets are Ovid, Tibullus, and Propertius. 

B. (a) Iambic Trimeter or Senarius : 
This Metre has six feet. Each may be an Iambus : as, 
Suis | et ip|sa Pi 6 j ma vi|ribus | ru.it. 

But a Spondee may stand in the first, third, and fifth foot; and 
(rarely) a Dactyl or Anapaest (^ ^ -) in the first. A Tribrach (^ v^ ^) 
sometimes takes the place of an Iambus, except in the two last feet. 

Scheme. 



1 


2 


3 4 5 


^/ \^ 







V^ N^ _ 



Examples. 
Labrm|tur al|tis n in|teiim | rlpis | aquae. 
Canidija brevi|biis n Imj plica |ta vi| peris. 
P6sitos|que ver]nas N di|tis ex | amen | domus. 

The usual Caesura is after the first syllable of the third foot. Another., 
less usual, is after the first syllable of the fourth foot ; as, 

Ibe|ricis | perus|te n fu|nibu.s | latus. 

The Trimeter may form a distinct measure. 



152 



NOTES ON PROSODY. 



(b) Iambic Dimeter. 

This Verse leaves out the third and fourth feet of the Trimeter, with 
which it is used to form an Iambic Distich ; as, 

Pater | na rii|ra bo | bus ex|ercet | siiis, 
Solu[tus 6m|ni fe|nore. 

Horace uses this and also the single Trimeter in his Epodes. 

C. The Sapphic Stanza : 

This Stanza contains four lines. The three first are the same Verse 
repeated (Sapphicus Minor). The fourth is called Versus Adonius. 



2. _ 

3. _ 

4. 



Example. 

1. Oti|um di | vos rogat | in pa|tenti 

2. Prensus | Aegae|6 simul | atra | nubes 

3. Condi |dit lu|nam neque | certa | fulgent 

4. Siclera | nautis. 

JD. The Alcaic Stanza : 

This Stanza contains four lines : of which the two first are similar. 





Scheme. 




I - - 


— *<j \j 


- w 


! 


— v-/ v^ 


— \s 


1 


— \S *w/ 


— \-/ 




-» \j k/ 


— v-» 



Scheme. 



<J — — — s-' \J 

vy — _ — W \J 

V _ _ — ^ — 

— \S \S — \S _ w 



4. — . v-' 



Example. 
Eheu | fiiga|ces | Postume | Postiime 
Labun|tur an|ni | nee pie|tas moram 
Rugis | et m|stanti | senec|tae 
Afferet | indomi | taeque | morti. 

Models of the Sapphic and Alcaic Stanzas, with other Lyric Metres, 
are found in the Odes of Horace. Kules for their elegant construction 
are given in the Grammar. 



153 



GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICUM. 



^s^«r^^^s^^^t^ 



A. 



Allans (auferre, to take ^\%*$* ^^° *** *"* 

epifte*. §§ 32, 87, 89. 
Adjectival Clauses. N. S. xii. 

^fefet, the Letters of a language, from Alpha, Beta (A, B), the two nrst 

•JSmvLti* *j *** r 7fJ a Mme " d t0 anotlier ' 

iZ7oT(^6ua, to render back), *}^&*%%?»£f£ £ 
P Clause called Protasis to"*** ^ stretch > W; g^ 1 '* 
Appositum (apponere, to place beside) an Appo site, or Sustentive **««* 
beside another in Attributive relation. §§87,90. bee p. ^ 

^t'PaSf^ to), a Figure of Syntax. § 159 N. S. , -E£ 
MtMveRelatioil, the relation of an Attribute »g^ the 
words thev qualify. This relation may be (1) Jipitnetic. as, 
Crocus divers ; Croesus rex. (2) Attributively Enthetie (see En- 
thesS) a I Croesus, regum ditissimus vmcitur; Croesus, 
rexLydo^um, vincitur (3) AdverbiaUy Enthetie : as, Croesus 
non dives interiit ; Croesus non rex intenit (4) Complementah 
as Croesus fuit dives; Croesus fit rex. 8 °<\ . . 

^J fo r ( attribuere, to assign), Attribute; an Adjective assigned to 
qualify a Substantive. §§ 87, 89. 
1 h 3 




154 GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICUM. 



Casus (cadere, to fall), Case. Gr. tctShtls. A. By Case is meant the form 
given to a Noun or Pronoun in order to show the relation in which it 
stands to some other word in the sentence. Case (casus, from cado) 
is, literally, a falling. G-rammarians repre- 
sented that form which a Noun takes when 
it is the Subject of a sentence, by an up- 
right line, as AB, and likened the other forms 
to lines falling away from the perpendicular 
at various angles; as, AC, AD, AE, AF, 
&c. These they called Cases ; and their 
series, the declension, declining, or sloping 
down, of the word. Afterwards, the Nominative or Subject case 
was called (with evident impropriety) Casus Rectus, the Upright 
Case, and the others (except the Vocative) Casus Obliqui, Oblique 
Cases ; whereas the Stem (or Crude-form) of the word is more pro- 
perly the upright line, and the several Cases, including the Nomi- 
native and Vocative, are branches deflecting from it. So, from the 
Stem nun- {walnut-tree) the Cases are: N.V. nue-s ( = nux), Ace. 
nuc-em, Gr. nuc-£s, D. nuc-£, Ab. nuc-e. 

B. The Relations which Cases fail to express are supplied by 
Prepositions ; and in the languages of modern Europe the use of 
Prepositions prevails, and Declension is comparatively rare. Thus 
the languages derived from Latin (Italian, French, Spanish, and 
Portuguese) have only one Case-form in each Number for Nouns ; 
English, two ; German, four ; but the Possessive Case in English is 
of limited use, and Grerman Declension is freely developed only in 
the Articles. Of the ancient Aryan tongues, Sanskrit had the six 
Latin Cases and two more, the Instrumental and the Locative. 
Greek had only five cases in use, discarding the Ablative, the 
functions of which it divides between the Genitive and the Dative ; 
but it retains traces of the Instrumental and the Locative. Latin re- 
tains many fragments of the Locative Case, as shown here and 
there in this Grammar; while the Pronominal forms, mihi, tibi, 
sibi, nobis, vobis, ubi, ibi, together with the Cases in -bus, appear 
to spring out of the primitive Instrumental Case, though in mean- 
ing they have lost all connection with it. 

C. The primary force of the Cases is a much debated and still 
undecided question. Modern G-rammarians have been inclined 
generally to explain it by relations of place and extent ; and there 
is much speciousness in the theory which, taking the Nominative 
as the moving agent, regards the Ablative as the point which mo- 
tion leaves, the Accusative as that to which it extends, and the 
Dative as the point of rest. But this theory fails to account for 
the Sanskrit and Latin G-enitive ; and against it may be urged that 
it assigns to the Ablative a place which in Greek is taken by the 
Genitive, and also that the Latin Ablative includes uses hardly 
consistent with that which is here stated to be its distinctive use. 
In this book classical usage has been followed, but without pre- 
judice (it is hoped) to the future study of philosophical grammar. 

Causalis Clausula, a Causal Clause ; an Adverbial Clause introduced by 
quod, quia, quum, &c. § 152. N. S. xi. 



GLOSSAKIUM GBAMMATICDM. 



155 



Character (xapaKrrjp, an impressed mark), usually means the last letter 
of the Stem of an inflected word. §11. 

Circumstantive Relation, the relation in which a Word or Phrase stands 
to the Verb when it modifies it adverbially. Such is that of Ad- 
verbs, Prepositions with their Cases, the Ablative Case always, 
the Accusative Case often. 

Clausula (claudere, to inclose), a Clause. This term is used to express any 
Subordinate Sentence. Co-ordinate Sentences are also called Clauses, 
but are not discussed in elementary Grammar. See Enthesis. 

Collectiva (eolligere, to gather together), Collective Nouns or Nouns of 
Multitude. N. S. i. E. 3. 

Comparativa Clausula, a Comparative Clause : an Adverbial Clause in- 
troduced by quasi, tanquam, ut si, &c. § 152. N. S. xi. 

* Complementum (complere, to complete), the Complement, that which 
completes the construction of a Simple Sentence, when its Verb is 
the Copula or Copulative. §§ 87, 93. K S. n. 

*Compositum Subjectum, a Composite Subject. § 92. N. S. i. F. 

Concessiva Clausula (concedere, to grant), a Concessive Clause, an Ad- 
verbial Clause introduced by etsi, quamvis, &c. § 152. N. S. xi. A. 

Conditionalis Clausula (conditio, a condition), the Protasis of a Condi- 
tional Sentence. §152. N.S. xi.i?. 

Congruentia (congruere, to agree), Agreement. §§ 88-92. 

Conjugatio (conjugare, to yoke together), the Flexion of Verbs. §§11, 48. 

Conjunctio (conjungere, to unite), Conjunction. Gr. (TvvSecrfxos. §§ 85, 152. 

Conjunctivas Modus, Conjunctive Mood ; the Mood of contingent state- 
ment, used purely or subjunctively. §§ 42, 65, 148. N. S. ix. 

Consecutio Temporum (consequi, to ensue), Consecution of Tenses. 
§ 155. N. S. xm. 

Consecutiva Clausula, a Consecutive Clause ; an Adverbial Clause de- 
noting consequence, introduced by ut, so that. § 152. N. S. xi. A. 

Consonantcs Litterae (consonare, to sound with), Consonants. § 3. 

SCHEME OF THE CONSONANTS. 





Mutes 


Liquids 


Spirants 


i 

| 

a 1 

pq 
o 

ft 
X 

z 


cS 


43 

o 

CQ 


; 

! & 

1 S 
| Pi 


o 

o 

2 

Xfl 


'cS 

m 
c3 


1 

1 

m 


1 

£ 


I 
s 


O 

1 


Guttural, or | 
Throat sounds J 


c 

(k,q) 


g 








h 




•• 


Dental, or ) t 

Teeth sounds J j 


d 


r 


1 


n 


i s 






j 


Labial, or \ \ _ 
Lip sounds . / j y 


b 






m 






f 


V 



Contr actio (contrahere, to draw together), tlie fusion of two vowels into 

one long one ; as, fidei, fide. 
Copula (link), any Finite form of the Verb sum, when incompletely 

Predicative, linking Subject and Complement. § 87. N. S. n. 



156 GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICUM. 

Copulativa Verba (copulare, to couple), Copulative Verbs. § 87. N. S. r. 
Besides Sum, they comprise the Verbs — forem, might be ; fio, become ; 
appareo, appear ; existo, stand forth ; evado, turn out ; audio, am 
called ; maneo, remain ; nascor, am born ; videor, seem ; with some 
others: also, many Passives of a class of Verbs called Factitive 
(facere), because they contain the idea of making, by deed, 
thought, or word ; such Passives are — efncior, am made ; creor, am 
created; designor, am marked out; legor, deligor, am chosen; 
eligor, am elected ; declaror, am declared ; renuntior, am pro- 
claimed ; nominor, nuncupor, am named ; salutor, am saluted ; ap- 
pellor, vocor, am called ; scribor, am written down ; inscribor, am 
entitled ; describor, am described ; aestimor, am esteemed ; numeror, 
am reckoned ; credor, am believed ; existimor, putor, am thought ; 
ducor, am deemed ; judicor, am judged ; habeor, am held ; censeor, 
am counted ; noscor, am known ; agnoscor, am acknowledged ; dicor, 
am said ; narror, am related ; feror, perhibeor, trador, am reported ; 
invenior, reperior, am found ; deprehendor, am discovered ; arguor, 
evincor, probor, am proved. 

Correlativa, Pronouns and Particles which mutually correspond in their 
several classes. § 38. N.E. in. 



D. 

Dativus Casus (dare, to give ; Gr. Botiktj irroocis), the Dative (Receptive) 

Case. §§ 104-109. N. S. iv. 
Declinatio (declinare, to slope down), the Plexion of Nouns. § 12. See 

Case. 
Defectiva (deficere, to fail), Words wanting some forms. §§ 25, 74. 
Deminutiva (deminuere, to lessen). N. E. i. D. 2. 
Deponens Verbum, a Deponent Verb, so called because it lays aside 

(deponit) Active form, having Active sense. § 40. 



E. 

Ellipsis (iWeiirsiv, to leave out), a Figure of Syntax. § 158. N. S. i. E.l. 

Enclitica, (eyKkiveu/, to lean on), words which throw back their accent 
on the word before them : as, -que, -ve, -ne. 

*Enthesis (svriQivai, to place in), a group of words, sometimes one word, 
forming an abbreviated Adjectival or Adverbial Clause. See 
Attributive Relation, observing that the Entheses, regum ditissi- 
mus, rex Lydorum, are equivalent to the Clauses, qui regum ditis- 
simus fuit, qui rex Lydorum fuit; and the Entheses dives, rex, 
to the Clauses dum dives erat, dum rex erat. An Ablative Abso- 
lute is usually an Adverbial Enthesis of Time, Cause, Condition, 
or Concession. 

Enunciatio (enunciare, to state), a proposition or statement ; the first 
and principal of the three forms of a Simple Sentence. N. S. x. A. 

Enunciatio Obliqua, Oblique Enunciation (indirect statement), the first 
and principal of the three kinds of Substantival Clauses. Its 
chief form is the Infinitive Clause (Accusative-and-Infinitive). 
§94. N.S,xJ.(l). 



GLOSSAKIUM GRAMMATICUM. 157 

Epithet (G-r. iiridtTov), an Adjective simply qualifying a Noun: vir 
bonus, a good man. §87. See Attributive Relation. 

Etymologia (G-r. irvfxds, true ; Xoyos, word), Etymology ; that division 
of Grammar which treats of Word -formation. 



Factitiva Verba (facere, to make), Factitive or Quid-quale Verbs. 
§ 99. N. S. in. D. 

Figura, Figure (fingere, to fashion), a term used in Grammar for a 
'Fashion ' which departs from ordinary use. Figures are either of 
Etymology (as Contraction), of Syntax (as Ellipsis), of Prosody 
(as Synaloepha), or of Rhetoric (as Metaphora). 

Finalis Clausula (finis, end), Final Clause; an Adverbial Clause, ex- 
pressing purpose: introduced by ut, in order that; ne, lest, &c. 
§ 152. N. S. xi. A., xiv. A. d. 

Fiaiitum Verbum, Finite Verb ; a term comprising the three moods of a 
Verb, which have limits (fines), especially of Person, from which 
the other forms (hence called Verbum Infinitum) are free. ' § 42. 

Flexio (flectere, to bend), Flexion; also called Inflection. § 11. 

G. 

Genitivus (yeviKT] titShtis), the Genitive (Proprietive) Case. § 126-136. 
N. S. vi. 

Genus {kind), Gender ; the distinction of Nouns, as Masculine (m.), 
Feminine (f.), or Neuter (n.), that is, neither of the two former. 

Gerundium : Gerundivum (gerere, to perform). The Gerundive is the 
Latin Participle in dus, and the Gerund is probably its Neuter 
Singular, declined as a Substantive, and attached to the Infinitive 
Verb-noun. The Gerundive seems to have been originally a Pre- 
sent Participle (oriundus, volvenda dies, etc.), but whether Active 
or Passive is disputed. § 140. N. S. vii. 

Graecismus, Graecism ; the imitation of a Greek idiom in Latin. 



Historic Infinitive, the Infinitive used in direct predication for a Finite 
Verb. § 140, 2, N. S. vn. A. 



Imperatiuus Modus (imperare, to command), the Imperative Mood in 

Verbs, which commands or entreats. § 42. 
Impersonalia Verba (in, not, persona, person), Impersonal Verbs, which 

cannot take a Personal Pronoun as Subject. §§ 75, 175. N.S. xiv. F. 
Indicativus Modus (indicare, to show), the declarative or absolute 

Mood of Verbs. § 42. 
Infinitiva Clausula, the Infinitive Clause: the Substantival Clause 

called Accusative and Infinitive. See Enunciatio Obliqua. 
Infinitivum (Nomen), the Verb-noun Infinitive. §§ 45, 140. N. S. vn. 
Infinitum Verbum. §§ 45, 140. N. S. vn. See Finitum Verbum, 
Interjectio (interjicere, to throw between). §§ 86, 137. 



GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICUM. 

Interrogatio Infinitiva, the Infinitive Clause used as an indignant ques- 
tion. N. S. x. D. 

Interrogatio Obliqua, Oblique Interrogation. As Direct Interrogation 
is one of the three forms which a Simple Sentence may assume, 
so Oblique or Indirect Interrogation is one of the three kinds of 
Substantival Clauses. § 149. N. S. x. A. (3). 

Intransitiva Verba, Intransitive Verbs ; Verbs which do not regularly 
take an Accusative of the Object. N. S. in. D. See Transitiva. 

K 

Kalendarium, the Calendar or plan of the days of the Roman month ; 
so called from Kalendae, the Calends, or first day in it. N. E. iv. C. 

L. 

Locativus (locus, 'place), Locative Case ; a case existing in Sanskrit, of 
which fragments remain in Greek and Latin. § 121. N. S. v. G. 2. 



M. 

Mobilia Substantiva (mobilis, moveable). Substantives which have a 
Feminine corresponding to a Masculine form. N. E. i. D. 1. 

Modus (manner), Mood ; that Accident of a Verb which shows the 
manner in which its action or state is conceived of. § 42. 

N. 

Negativae Particular (negare, to deny), Negatives. § 82. N. S. xiv. A. 
Nomina (Gr. ouo/xa, a name), Nouns comprise Substantives, Adjectives, 

and Pronouns ; but the term is often used when Substantives alone 

are meant. § 9. 
Nominativus Casus (nominare, to name. Gr. dpofiaariKT] tttcoo'is). §§87, 

88, 93. See Case. 
^Noun-term, a Substantive, or what may stand for a Substantive ; as 

Adjective, Pronoun, Verb -noun or Substantival Clause. § 87. 

n. s. i. a 

Numeralia, words representing Number. N. E. iv. A. 
Numaria Bes, Roman money. N. E. iv. D. 

O. 

Objective Relation, that of the Accusative of the Nearer Object to a 
Transitive Verb. N. S. in. 

Objectum (objicere, to cast in the way), Object; that which is affected by 
action : if directly affected it is called Nearer Object (Accusative) ; 
if indirectly, Remoter Object (Dative). N. S. in. iv. 

Obliqua Oratio (Oblique Oration), any statement, command, or question 
expressed in indirect construction. This term includes the three 
Substantival Clauses : Oblique Enunciation, Petition, and Interro- 
gation, though sometimes used with special reference to the con- 
struction of Accusative-and-Infinitive (Infinitive Clause), which is 
the chief form of Oblique Enunciation or Narration. N.S. x. A. B. 



GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICAL 159 

Oblique Subject, the Accusative Subject of an Infinitive. § 94. 
Oblique Complement, the Accusative Complement of an Oblique Copu- 
lative Clause. § 94. N. S. n. A., in. D. 



P. 

Participium (partem capere, to take a share), an Adjectival Verb-form 
which shares the functions of Adiective and Verb. §§ 45, 142. N. S. 
xrv. D. 

Partes Oratianis, Parts of Speech, or "Words. § 9. 

Particulce, Particles, or small Parts of Speech; a name given to the four 
undeclined Parts, and also including some which are only used in 
compound words ; as, ambi-, re-, se-, in-, dis-. § 82, &c. 

Partitiva Vocabula (partiri, to divide). N. S. vi. B. 

Passiva Vox (pati, to suffer), the Passive Voice, or form used in Verbs to 
show that something is acted upon, and so ' suffers.' This Voice is 
proper to Transitive Verbs only ; but many Intransitive Verbs use 
it in Impersonal construction. § 76. A Passive Verb is often 
Eeflexive ; as, vertor, I turn myself. Por Passive Construction 
see N. S. xrv. E. 

Patronymicum (irar-hp, father ; wopa, name), Patronymic, a title ex- 
pressing descent from a father or ancestor. 

Perfection (perficere, to complete) Tempus, the Perfect Tense, which in 
Latin has a double use. § 48. N. S. xin. 

Perfect-stem, §§ 46, 48. 

Periphrastic Conjugation (irepKppd^eiu, to speak circuitously). § 64. 

Petitio Obliqua. As Petition (command or entreaty) is the second of 
the three forms of Simple Sentences, so Oblique Petition is the 
second of the three kinds of Substantival Clauses. N. S. x. A. (2). 

Phrasis (<ppdais), a Phrase ; a combination of words, or a single word 
idiomatically used, containing a notion, but not forming a Clause 
or an Enthesis ; as, multae artis, ruri, Preposition with Case, etc. 

Position (situs), a term in Prosody to express that a rowel is short, 
long, or doubtful, by standing before other letters. § 162. 

Praedicatum (praedicare, to declare), the Predicate of a Sentence, or that 
which is declared of the Subject. Writers on Logic resolve every 
proposition into Subject, Copula, and what they call Predicate. But 
in Grammar this would only mislead, for it is not in this form 
that authors write. Since every Finite Verb is Predicative, inac- 
curacy is avoided by calling the Verb a Predicate only when it 
completes Predication, but in other instances 'the Verb of the 
Sentence/ When the Verb is the Copula or a Verb Copulative, the 
term which links it to the Subject, and completes the Predication, 
is called Complement (instead of Predicate), by which the incon- 
venience of giving the same title to Nouns and Verbs is obviated. 
§87. 

Praepositio (praeponere, to place before), G-r. irpSOea-is. §§ 9, 83. 
103, 122. N. S. xiv. C. 

Predicative Relation, the Relation existing between Subject and Verb of 
the Simple Sentence. 

Present-Stem. §§ 11,46. The Present-Stem of many Verbs differs 
from the True Stem. The chief variations are these : 



160 GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICUM. 

1. N is inserted before the Consonant-character: as, fi-w-do, 

fra-ft-go, &c. Before a labial this n becomes m : as, la-m-bo, 
vu-m-ipo. 

2. JV is suffixed (a) to a Vowel- character : as, si-n-o, li-n-o ; 

(b) to a Liquid-character: as, tem-w-o, cer-ft-o, sper-w-o, 
ster-w-o. So po-n-o for pos-w-o. 

3. Sc is suffixed (a) to a Vowel-character : as, pa-sc-o, ira-sc-or, 

cre-sc-o, &c. ; (b) to a Consonant- character with i : as, 
ulc-isoor. So di-sc-o for dic-sc-o ; nsL-n-c-isc-ov for nac-or. 

4. L is doubled : as, peW-o, tol-^-o. 

5. T is suffixed to Guttural-character : as, flec-£-o, pec-^-o, nec-£-o. 

6. A Guttural is cast out : as, stru-o for stru-oo, vivo for vi-^-uo. 

7. The Stem is re-duplicated : as, gi-g-no for gen-o, si-sto 

for sto. 

^Prolative Relation (proferre, to extend), that in which Predication is 
extended by an Infinitive (therefore called Prolative), joined to 
Verbs, Participles, and, poetically, Adjectives. § 140. N. S. vn. B. 
Attentive consideration shows that this use of the Infinitive is 
really distinct from its Objective use, constituting a special relation 
in grammar, and requiring a distinctive appellation. 

Pronomen (Gr. aurcopv/uiia), an inflected Part of Speech, ranking among 
Nouns, and so called because it is a substitute for a name. § 38. 

Propria Nomina, Proper Names ; Nouns peculiar to Person or Place. 

Proprietive Relation, that of the Genitive to the word proper to it. § 126. 

Prosodia (irpocrddeiv, to sing in accord), Prosody; that division of Gram- 
mar which treats of Quantity of Syllables and of Khythm. The 
Laws of Metre are usually comprised in it. § 161. Notes. 

Protasis, See Apodosis. 



R. 

* Receptive Complement, an idiom, by which the Dative stands in the 
Complement, often with another Dative. § 108. 

Receptive Relation (recipere, to receive), that of the Dative, as Case of 
the Recipient, to the governing word. § 104-109. N. S. iv. 

Recta Oratio, Direct Oration, in a Principal Sentence, as distinguished 
from Oratio Obliqua. N. S. x. 

Reduplicatio (reduplicare, to redouble), Reduplication ; a peculiar muta- 
tion of form, by which the sense of words is varied, in Greek, Latin, 
and other languages. In Latin, its chief use is in forming the 
Perfect-stem of Verbs. See §§ 48, 81 II. (5), III. 9. 

Rejlexiva Pronomina (reflectere, to bend back), Reflexive Pronouns : se, 
with its Possessive suus ; so called, because they * bend back ' 
their relation to the principal noun preceding ; generally (but not 
always) the Subject of the Principal Sentence. § 145. N. S. viii. 

Relation. The Relations of Construction existing between the words 
of a Simple Sentence are eight in number: (1) Predicative; (2) 
Attributive; (3) Objective ; (4) Receptive; (5)Circumstantive; (6) 
Proprietive; (7) Prolative; (8) Annexive. See these Words. 

Relativum Pronomen (referre, to refer), the Relative Pronoun qui, so 
called because referred to an Antecedent Noun-term. See §91, 



GLOSSARIUM GEAMMATICOl. 161 

N. S. 1. From this root are derived the Interrogative and In- 
definite Pronouns, and the Particles connected with them. In 
Latin Syntax the importance of the Relative is great. 
Boot, the common part of kindred words : as, ag- in ago, agito, ag- 
men. § 11. 

S. 

Scansio (scandere, to climb), the measurement of feet in a verse. 

Sententia (sentire, to express thought), a Sentence. § 87. Sentences 
are Simple or Compound. A Simple Sentence is either a state- 
ment (enunciatio), a command or request (petitio), or a question 
(interrogatio). A Compound Sentence consists of two or more 
Simple Sentences linked together, one being the Principal Sen- 
tence, the rest either Co-ordinate (not dependent) or Subordinate 
(dependent in construction) ; which two kinds are called Clauses. 
N. S. x. A. See Clausula. 

Spirants (spirare, to breathe). § 3. See Consonantcs. 

Stem, the crude form of a "Word without the Endings : as, mensa-, 
mone-. A Vowel-stem stripped of its vowel is called a Clipt Stem: 
as, mon- for mon-e-. 

Subjectum (subjicere, to place under), Subject. §§ 87, 88, 93, 94. 
N. S. i. ii. 

*Subobliaua Clausula, a Suboblique Clause, subordinate to Oratio Obli- 
qua. If Oratio Obliqua is contained in the sense only, not in 
form, the Subordinate Clause is said to be ' Subobliquae potes- 
tatis,' of Suboblique power, or ' virtually Suboblique.' N. S. x. B. 

Substantival Clauses, the three forms of a Simple Sentence (statement, 
command, question) thrown into Oblique Construction, and called 
Oblique Enunciation, Oblique Petition and Oblique Interrogation. 
N. S. x. A. 

Substantivum (substare, to stand beneath), a Substantive, the first of 
the inflected Parts of Speech. §§ 9 I. (1), 12, 16, etc. 

Superlativus Gracilis (superferre, to carry above), the highest Degree of 
a Compared Adjective or Adverb. §§ 35-37. 

Supine- Stem. § 47. 

Supinum, Supine, an unmeaning term, applied to the two Cases of the 
Verb-noun which end in um and u severally. §§ 45, 141 (5) (6). 

Syllaba (<rv\\a}i$av<ziv, to take together), a Syllable; that is, one or more 
letters pronounced in a breath. § 5. 

Syncope ((TvyKoirTeiu, to cut short), the shortening of a word by casting 
out an inner vowel : as, patri for pateri. 

Synesis (eweo-is, meaning), a Figure of Syntax. § 160. N. S. i. E. 3. 

Syniazis (orvj/rdaaeiu, to arrange together), that division of Grammar 
which treats of the construction of sentences. 

T. 

Temporalis Clausula, a Temporal Clause : an Adverbial Clause intro- 
duced by a Conjunction of Time. § 152. N. S. xi. 

Tempus (time), Tense; that which marks the time of action in Verbs. 
§§ 43, 48. 

Tempus (time), Quantity. § 162. 



162 GLOSSARIUM GRAMMATICUM. 

*Trajectiva (trajicere, to throw over) ; Verbs and Adjectives, which take 
a Dative. Pure Trajective Verbs have a Dative alone (Cui- Verbs) : 
Trajective Verbs Transitive (Cui-quid Verbs) have Accusative and 
Dative. §104. N. S. iv. 

Transitiva Verba (transire, to pass over), Verbs which pass over to an 
Accusative of the nearer Object. § 96 N. S. iii. 

IT. 

Universalis a large class of Pronouns and Pronominals. N.E. in. 



V. 

Verb of Being (sum, esse). Gr. p^a vnapKriKov. This has been trans- 
lated by Latin Grammarians, 'Verbum Substantivum ' ; a term 
not true to the Greek, and confusing to learners. Sum is the 
Verb of Being, essential to the expression of thought. It supplies 
the Copula of Grammar and Logic. Hence we find its root widely 
spread throughout the languages of the world. §§ 49, 87. N. S. n. 

Verbum (Gr. prj/jia, the word), Verb ; an inflected Part of Speech, so 
called, as the Word which effects discourse. §§ 9, 39, etc. 

* Verb-Noun. All the parts of the Verb Infinite are Verb-Nouns Sub- 
stantival or Adjectival, uniting functions of the Verb with functions 
of the Noun. §§ 45, 140, etc. K S. i. C. 

Vocales (vox, voice), Vowels. § 2. Their relations are shown in the 
following scheme, in which the sign f- represents the vowel 
wavering between i and u (optSmus, optilmus), which the Emperor 
Claudius brought for a time into public use : 

Standard vowel 

a 

Sharp medial e O Plat medial 

Sharp semiconsonant i f- u Plat semiconsonant 

Medial 

J and u did not exist anciently. J was introduced to represent 
the consonant power of i; u to represent the vowel -power of v. 

Vocativus Casus (vocare, to call), the Case of one addressed, which 
stands out of the Sentence. §§ 14, 87, 137. 

Vowel-change, the weakening or strengthening of Vowels, which occurs 
in Flexion, Derivation and Composition. It appears in the form- 
ation of the Perfect and Supine Stems of Verbs, and in the change 
of many Simple Verbs when compounded. §§ 81, 84. N. E. n. 

Vox, Voice ; that form, by which Verbs are shown as doing or suffering. 
§39. KS. xiv. E. 



LONDON 
PBINTED BY SPOTTISWOODE AND CO. 

NTW-STEEEX SQUABS 



Just published, in 12mo. price 2s. 6d. cloth, 
THE 

PUBLIC SCHOOL LATH PRIMER. 

Edited with the Sanction of the Head Masters of the Public 
Schools included in Her Majesty's Commission. 



This Latin Primer — which is 
now in use in all the Nine Schools 
named in Her Majesty's Commission, 
viz. Winchester, Eton, St. Paul's, 
Westminster, Merchant Taylors', 
Rugby, Shrewsbury, Harrow, and 
Charter House,— is founded on a Latin 
Grammar which has been largely used 
in English Schools during the last 
twenty years. It has been revised 
with great care and attention, first 
by its Author, subsequently by the 
lead Masters of various public 
schools, with the advice of other 



scholars engaged in classical in- 
struction. In the manner of its use, 
this book does not differ from the 
Grammar on which it is founded, or 
from any other synthetic grammar. 
Its memorial lessons need discreet 
guidance, careful explanation, and 
sound catechesis on the part of the 
masters. They need also to be sup- 
ported and supplemented by good 
exercise-books (such as Subsidia 
Primaria, now in the press) of a 
merely analytic and imitative cha- 
racter. 



LATIN SCHOOL BOOKS 

ADAPTED TO THE PUBLIC SCHOOL LATHS' PKIMER. 



The First LATIN PARSING BOOK, adapted to the Public School Latin 
Primer. By John T. White, D.D. of C. C. C. Oxford ; Joint-Author of White and 
Riddle's Latin Dictionary. 12mo. price 2s. 



This Parsmg Book lias for its object 
the gradual teaching of the structure of the 
Latin language in accordance with the Rules 
laid down in the Syntax of the Public School 
Latin Primer. It consists of Two Parts. In 
the First, each Rule of Syntax has been eluci- 
dated by the selection of a Passage or portion 
of a passage from a standard writer, and by 
its analysis in such a way as to bring out an 
exemplification of the rule. Care has also 
been taken to render the course of instruction 
altogether progressive. 

In the Second Part the Author, reversing 



his mode of proC' edina-, has presented 
to the learner the Passages themselves as they 
are found in the writers from whose works 
they have been taken, and that without any 
guide to the construction of their several parts. 
By reading them as thus printed, the pupil's 
attainments may be rradily tested; and it 
may be at once seen whether his knowledge, 
not merely of parsing, but of the words which 
he has had brought before his notice, is really 
such as from his training it ought to be. 

A Vocabulary is given of all the words 
occurring in the work. 



BHADLEY'S CORXELIUS NEPOS, with Grammatical Notes adapted to 
the Public School Latin Primer. By Johx T. White, D.D. 12mo. price 35. 6*7. 

BRADLEY'S EUTBOPIUS, with Grammatical Notes adapted to the Public 
School Latin Primer, and a Vocabulary on the plan of Dr. White's ' Junior Scholar's Latin 
Dictionary.' By Joh.v T. White, D.D. 12mo. 2s. 6d. 



London: LONGMANS, GKEEN. and CO. Paternoster Kow. 



Latin School Books — continued. 



BRADLEY'S SELECT FABLES of PHJSDRUS, with Grammatical Notes 
adapted to the Public School Latin Primer, and a Vocabulary on the plan of White's 
'Junior Scholar's Latin Dictionary.' By John T. White, D.D. 12mo. 2.?. 6d. 



In" the now editions of Phcedrus, 

Eutropius, Cornelius Nepos, Dr. White has 
altogether remodelled the notes and adapted 
their grammatical portion to the Syntax of 
the Public School Latin Primer. This he has 
done from a conviction, based on careful and 
dispassionate examination, that that Syntax 
is more philosophical, more simple, and bet- 
ter adapted for the instruction of boys whose 
reading does not exceed its limits than any 
found in any elementary Grammar which 
has yet appeared. 

The Phaidrus and Eutropius are each ac- 
companied by a Vocabulary of the words 
which they respectively contain. To this 
portion of the works, which is written on 
the plan of Dr. White's Junior Scholar's 
Latin- English Dictionary, much information 
formerly embodied in the Notes has been 
transferred. And it should further be no- 



ticed, as an important feature attach- 
ing to it, that here also will be found an 
accord with the Public School Latin Primer. 
The principles which guided Dr. Whitr in 
the preparation of the various Latin-English 
Dictionaries to which his name is attached 
will ba found fully and systematically de- 
veloped in his Latin Suffixes ; and a compari- 
son of that work with so much of the Public 
School Latin Primer as speaks of the forma- 
tion of words will show a harmony of thought 
upon the subject between the Authors of the 
two works. This will be further seen by re- 
ference to the Preface of the Junior Scholar's 
Latin- English Dictionary; a Dictionary— in- 
deed the only Dictionary — in which the above- 
named principles form the basis of the treat- 
ment of its words, and which, by the mode of 
printing adopted, exhibits them to the eye at 
a glance. 



THE FOLLOWING 



SCHOOL BOOKS ADAPTED TO THE PUBLIC SCHOOL LATIN PRIMER 

ARE NEARLY READY FOR PUBLICATION. 

SUBSIDTA DRI3IARIA, being a Companion Book to the Public School 
Latin Primer. By the same Editor. 

PRAXIS LATINA RRI3IARIA, a Handbook of Questions and Exercises 
for daily use; adapted to the Public School Latin Primer. By John Day Collis,D.D. 
Head Master of King Edward VI. Grammar School, Bromsgrove. 

*** Also, by the same Author, similarly adapted, the Sixth Edition of PONTES CLASSTCI, 
No. I. andtheEleventhEditionof JKi2J5C?Z7i^li2 LATIN VERBS. 

The First LATIN EXERCISE BOOK, adapted to the Public School Latin 
Primer ; being a Companion Book to Dr. White's First Latin Parsing Book. By John 
T. White, D.D. 

YALPY'S LATIN DELECTUS. Edited by John; T. White, D.D. 

The Rev. Dr. KENNEDY'S PAL2ESTRA STILI LATINI and CURRI- 
CULUM STILL LATINI, New Editions of both works adapted to the Public School 
Latin Primer. 

*** The above Works are all printed uniformly with the Public School Latin Primer. 



Lately published, and may now be had, 
ELEMENTARY LATIN PROSE EXERCISES. By the Rev. H. Musgrave 
Wilkins, M.A. Fellow of Merton College, Oxford. Fifth Edition, adapted to the Public 
School Latin Primer. Crown 8vo. 4s. 6d. Key (for Schoolmasters and Tutors only), 
price 55. 

Messrs. Longmans and Co. have recently published, in square 12mo. pp. 664, 
price 75. 6c?. bound, 

The JUNIOR SCHOLAR'S LATIN-ENGLISH DICTIONARY, abridged for 
the use of Schools from the Dictionaries of White and Kiddle, by John T. White, D.D. 
of Corpus Christi College, Oxford, surviving Joint- Author. 

*** In this Dictionary, the Formation of Words, which forms one prominent feature of the 
Public School Latin Frimer, is, by the mode of printing adopted, exhibited to the eye at 
a glance. 

London: LONGMANS, GREEN, and CO. Paternoster Row. 



H}$6 7~ 



7 ^ 




(5Uc: 



/ ^ 






16 I ifi 







i&* 




^ 







°0 * * ^^ o* rP Neutralizing agent: Magnesium Oxide 

V s • * ' ^o O^ Treatment Date: July 2006 

<^ <? A WORLD LEADER IN PAPER PRESERVATION 

. V** j SilSiiii^ 1 1 1 Thomson Park Drive 

* A^ "^ » ^lli\ Cranberry Township, PA 16066 . 

A * & ->^41B (724)779-2111 

A, 




^ < Deacidified using the Bookkeeper process 



PreservationTechnologies 




^. 




o r 



,4°* 















l\ 



■\ 



4 °^ 



«*°<* 



* A>*^ : 









C" ♦' 




o* *-^ 




o Ay < 

„ o -- -0 ^> 

-«• »- A <> *' ** s * a^ 





,\- 



+*£ 



m'- %/ •'&&: ***<♦' 









V v * 



W, 



A 



<*> 








A 











> 






.A 




